Georgia High School Association (GHSA)

Baseball ........................................................................................................................... 48 Basketball ........................................................................................................................ 51 Bass Fishing .................................................................................................................... 55 Cheerleading (including Game Day Cheerleading)..................................................... 56 Cross Country ................................................................................................................. 60 Dance ............................................................................................................................... 62 Esports ............................................................................................................................. 64 Flag Football .................................................................................................................... 65 Football ............................................................................................................................ 66 Golf ................................................................................................................................... 73 Gymnastics ...................................................................................................................... 76 Lacrosse .......................................................................................................................... 78 Literary ............................................................................................................................. 80 One Act Play .................................................................................................................... 87 Riflery ............................................................................................................................... 91 Soccer .............................................................................................................................. 93 Softball ............................................................................................................................. 96 Swimming and Diving ..................................................................................................... 99 Tennis .............................................................................................................................. 102 Track and Field ................................................................................................................ 105 Volleyball ......................................................................................................................... 109 Wrestling .......................................................................................................................... 111 Appendix A - Alliance of GHSA and AAASP Appendix B - State Playoff Brackets Appendix C - GHSA State Officers Appendix E - Eligibility Report Instructions Appendix F - Game Fee Chart Appendix N - Guidelines Regarding Name, Image and Likeness Appendix P - Fines Structure for Rules Violations Appendix PSR - Post Season Ranking Formula Appendix R - Classification and Alignment Appendix S - Service Areas Appendix S-R - Student Reclassification Areas Appendix Z - Results & Records of State Playoff Events from 2025-26 School Year CONSTITUTION

The objective of the organization shall be the promotio n of education in Georgia from a mental, physical, and moral viewpoint, to standardize and encourage participation in athletics, to promote sportsmanship and an appreciation for and study of music, speech, and other fine arts through Region and State competitions.

SECTION 1 STATE OFFICERS 4 The State Officers of this Association shall consist of a Preside nt, a Vice President, and an Executive Director. SECTION 2 STATE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE A. Membership of the State Executive Committee shall be com posed of the State Officers, the State Superintendent of Schools or his/her representative, and one member elected from each region in each classification, plus one member each appointed by the Georgia School Boards Association, the Georgia School Superintendents' Association, the Georgia Association of Secondary School Principals, the Georgia Athletic Directors Association, and the Executive Secretary of the Georgia Athletic Coaches Association. Membersh ip shall also include two female members appointed by the Executive Committee upon recommendation of the Board of Trustees from nominees submitted by each region. Each member shall have the right to vote on all matters pertaining to the operation of the Associati on. B. Terms of office for members of the State Executive Commi ttee elected by regions shall coincide with the length of each reclassification cycle. C. When a member of the State Executive Committee is unab le to attend a State Executive Committee meeting, the President of the region shall have power to appoint an eligible member of the region concerned to represent t he region at that meeting. D. The State Executive Committee shall have the authority t o appoint smaller committees to address issues related to the operation of the Association and its regulated activit ies, and to consider proposals made by such committees. The authority of the State Executive Committee shall be pl enary in all matters pertaining to the Association and it may accept, reject or modify any proposals made or action ta ken by any committee, the Board of Trustees, the Appeal Board, the Hardship Committee or the Executive Dire ctor. E. Each member of the State Executive Committee shall have t he right to vote on all matters coming before the full State Executive Committee. SECTION 3 BOARD OF TRUSTEES A. Membership of the Board of Trustees shall be composed o f the President, Vice President, and Executive Director, plus one member from each classification (as selected by a vot e of the SEC representatives in that respective classification) and a total of four (4) at-large member s (three (3) of which shall be appointed by the BOT) tha t must include at least two (2) females and two (2) private scho ol representatives, and all four must be approved by a vot e of the State Executive Committee. The term of office for mem bers of the Executive Committee serving on the Board of Trustees shall coincide with the length of the reclassificat ion cycle. B. The Board of Trustees shall receive and hold title to all real and personal property of said Association in trust for the benefit of said Association and shall have general custody an d administration of such property with power and authority to lease, sell and convey said property of said Associ ation; provided however, said Board of Trustees shall not sell C. or convey any real property so held by them in trust for said Association without first being authorized to do so b y a majority vote of the State Executive Committee of said Associat ion at a meeting duly called for such purpose. D. The Board of Trustees reviews pertinent issues relative t o the successful operation of the organization. The Board of Trustees reviews the recommendation by the Executive Director concerning the budget, recommends committee appointments, evaluates and recommends length of contract for the Executive Director. The Board of Trustees recommends the two at-large female representatives to th e Executive Committee. E. The Board of Trustees shall be authorized and empower ed to exercise the powers of the Executive Committee including, but not limited to, the power to amend th e by-laws of the association, and to otherwise make decision s relating to the association and its member schools as other wise allowed to be made by the Executive Committee under the constitution and by-laws of the association. 1. A majority of the Board of Trustees shall constitute a quorum thereof for the purposes of this Subsection D and action shall be authorized and taken by a majority of the votes cast. 2. The meeting of the Board of Trustees under this sectio n shall be noticed by the Executive Director or President by any reasonable means and any meeting of the Board of T rustees may be held electronically. In addition, such vote may be taken by telephone polling of the Board o f Trustees by the Executive Director if appropriate in the discretion of the President. 3. Any action taken by the Board of Trustees under this Subsect ion D shall be subject to affirmation, rejection or modification at the next meeting of the GHSA Executive Comm ittee or thereafter. F. Upon receiving a referral from the Executive Director o f alleged intentional or grossly negligent violations of GHSA by-laws and rules by GHSA member schools or their personnel, the Board of Trustees by majority vote shall have the authority to assess further and additional penalties for such intentional or grossly negligent violations against th e member school including, but not limited to, an additi onal fine of not more than $2,500.00 for each such off ense, and/or probation for a period of up to one calendar year in the sport(s) in which the violation occurred, and/ or 5 suspension of the member school from the GHSA for a period of up to one full calendar year. Any additional penalties assessed under this paragraph shall by appealable to the GHSA Executive Committee. SECTION 4 STATE APPEAL BOARD A. The State Appeal Board shall be composed of members sele cted from the full State Executive Committee on a rotating basis. B. The duties of the State Appeal Board as set forth in Se c. 9 shall be performed by four (4) members of the Board sitting on an alternating basis as selected and notified by the Executive Director. C. Eligibility appeals in regard to the eight-semester r ule will be referred by the Executive Director to the Stat e Executive Committee for a final ruling. D. There shall be no appeal of eligibility related to age restrictions set forth in the by-laws. SECTION 5 HARDSHIP COMMITTEE A. 1. The Hardship Committee shall be composed of members se lected from the full State Executive Committee on a rotating basis. 2. The duties of the Hardship Committee shall be perfo rmed by four (4) members of the Executive Committee sitting on an alternating basis as selected and notified by the Executive Director. B. The Hardship Committee shall have the authority to se t aside the effect of the migratory rule, the courses passe d rule, and the accumulation of credits rule upon an indi vidual student when in its opinion the rule works an und ue hardship upon that student. The Hardship Committee doe s not hear cases regarding eight-semester violations, or appeals arising under the By-Laws. 1. The Hardship Committee shall meet at a location and on dates established by the Executive Director and published in the GHSA Calendar. Requests will be considere d to have a rule or rules set aside for benefit of individual students and shall consider such requests at the m eetings held for that purpose, but not at any other meetings of the committee. If conditions upon which a re quest is based develop after April 1, the Executive Director is authorized to set a date for a special meetin g to be held at the State Office to consider such case or cases. 2. The principals of all member schools who have filed re quests to have the effect of a rule set aside for individu al students shall be notified of the time of the meeting at which such requests will be considered not less than seven (7) calendar days before such meeting. 3. A request will be considered at a meeting only if comp lete information concerning the case is filed in writing with the Executive Director at least ten (10) calendar days prior to the date of the meeting and if a representative of the school, along with the student, is present at the meeting to furnish the Hardship Committee with information. Complete information in cludes a transcript. 4. The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements must have been beyond the control of the school, the student, and/or his parents, a nd such that none of them could reasonably have been expected to comply with the rule. Ignorance of the rule on the part of any or all of them shall not be consider ed sufficient cause for setting aside its effects. 5. The decision of the Hardship Committee shall be decid ed by a majority vote to set aside the effects of the rule in each individual case, and such decision shall not be consid ered as setting a precedent for other cases of a somewhat similar nature. 6. The decision of the Hardship Committee shall be appe alable to the Appeals Board by compliance with Sec. 9C & 9D of the Constitution and then to the State Executive C ommittee by compliance with Sec. 9F of the Constitution. C. 1. The Executive Director shall have the authority upon rece iving an application by a member school to set aside the effect of any eligibility rule upon an individual st udent within the jurisdiction of the Hardship Committe e and to grant the same without necessity of the appearance of the student or a representative of the school before the Hardship Committee when, in the judgement of the Executive Director, the circumstances regarding the application are such that: a. The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements are beyond the control of the school, the student, and/or his parents and such th at none of them could reasonably have been expected to comply with the rule; and, b. The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements work an unjust, unfair, and unforeseeable hardship upon the student; and c. The facts are clear, undisputed, and supported by appro priate documentation. 2. The Executive Director 6 shall have the authority to grant or deny an application for hardship status. 2. 2. The Executive Director shall have the authority to gr ant or deny an application for hardship status. D. 1. The Executive Director shall have the discretion upon rece iving an application by a member school to set aside the effect of any academic eligibility rule upon individu al students when, in the judgement of the Executive Director, the following criteria are met: a. The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements are beyond the control of the school, the student and his parents, and such that none of them could reasonably have been expected to comply with the rule; and b. The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements work an unjust, unfair and unforeseeable hardship upon the student; and c. The facts are clear, undisputed and supported by approp riate documentation and evidence; and d. The setting aside of the subject rule would not resul t in an unfair advantage to the school or student nor compromise the safety of any other student. 2. The decision of the Executive Director shall be appealab le under the provisions of Section 9 of the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws. SECTION 6 REGION OFFICERS A. Each Region of each Classification shall elect a President , a Vice President, a Secretary-Treasurer, and from one to three committee members. No two of the above shall be f rom the same school unless the two are President and the Secretary-Treasurer. These officers, together with any memb er of the State Executive Committee from the region, shall compose the Executive Committee in their region. B. A member of the State Executive Committee who is not an elected member of his Region Executive Committee shall be an added member of his respective Region Executive Commi ttee. This provision that only one (1) member of the Region Executive Committee may come from the same school wil l apply only to the members elected by the region, and will not apply when the State Executive Committee mem ber in the region is from the same school as an elected member. C. The treasurer of each region is required to make an itemized statement of the income and expenditures of all funds to the region. When a new treasurer is elected, any bal ance must be turned over to the new officer immediately. SECTION 7 DUTIES OF OFFICERS The duties of the various officers and committees shall be those usually devolving upon such officers and committees. It is specifically the duty of the State Executive Committee and th e Region Executive Committees to seek at all times to educate the school officials under their jurisdiction, and at the same time, to check vigorously any practice or violati on of the rules by exercising the full penalty for such violations if it is deemed necessary. SECTION 8 ELECTION OF OFFICERS A. A President and a Vice President shall be elected as State Association officers at the spring meeting of the Georgia High School Association for a term that shall coincide with the length of the reclassification cycle. B. The election and term of office of the Executive Direct or shall be for a term of one to five years at the discre tion of the State Executive Committee and the President and Vice President of the Georgia High School Association and shall be authorized to execute a contract in the name of and f or the Georgia High School Association. C. Only members of the State Executive Committee shall be e ntitled to vote in elections. D. Should the President become disqualified by death, resi gnation, or otherwise, the Vice President shall assume the office immediately and shall act as President until the vaca ncy is filled. E. Any vacancy which may occur in the office of President or Vice President shall be filled at the next meeting of the State Executive Committee. F. Each region in each Classification shall elect at any reg ion meeting, a President, a Vice President, a Secretary- Treasurer, and from one to three region committee mem bers as region officers. Terms of office shall be for two (2) years, and elections shall be held at the beginning of e ach reclassification cycle. Any vacancy occurring on a Region Committee shall be filled by the Region Committee unt il the next meeting of the region. G. The State Executive Committee member from each region shall be elected at any Region meeting when there is a vacancy to be filled. The term of office shall shall coincid e with the length of each reclassification cycle. Any vacancy occurring on the State Executive Committee shall be filled by the Region Committee until the next meeting of the region concerned. 7 SECTION 9 AUTHORITY OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR APPELLATE PROCEDURE A. The State Executive Director shall be authorized to inte rpret the rules of the Georgia High School Association and to impose the proper penalty for their violation, includin g but not limited to, declaring a student ineligible to compete in GHSA activities for a period of time of up to four (4) ye ars. The Assistant Executive Director shall, upon the absence or at the direction of the Executive Director, have all th e powers and responsibilities of the Executive Director as provided under this Constitution and the By-Laws of the G HSA. The State Executive Director shall make all arrangements for holding and conducting the State Meets and Tournaments. B. All questions pertaining to eligibility or any other matters under the rules of the Georgia High School Associat ion must first be submitted to the State Executive Director. If the question concerns a violation of any of the rules of the Georgia High School Association, the State Executive Director sh all notify the member schools involved and advise them of the charges and advise them of their right to su bmit evidence and their right to request a hearing. Th e State Executive Director, after hearing or examining the evidence of the party or parties concerned, shall render a decisio n. C. Should any member school not be satisfied with the deci sion, appeal may then be made to the State Appeal Board by filing a written notice of appeal to the State Appea l Board through the State Executive Director within seven (7 ) calendar days of the date of the decision, which notice of appeal shall clearly state the decision appealed and the reasons for such appeal. The State Executive Director shall no tify the State Appeal Board and all other parties of the appeal. Provided however, that if the only issue under ap peal is to request modification of the penalty imposed b y the Executive Director, then the member school may appeal direct ly to the Executive Committee. Any appeal of the decision of the Executive Director does not suspend the rulin g made or penalty assessed pending a ruling on the appeal. D. Appeal Board meetings shall be set on dates established by the Executive Director and published in the GHSA Calendar. 1. Any request to the Appeal Board must be in the hands of the Executive Director seven (7) calendar days before the scheduled meeting date. 2. Any other appeal requested (other than regularly sched uled dates) must be accompanied by a check sufficient to pay the entire estimated expenses of the Appeal Board t o defray the cost of bringing the Appeal Board into session. 3. All requests for appeals must be in writing with the stated reasons for an appeal, and signed by the administrative head of the individual school. a. An appeal of an eligibility decision must be based on one or more of the following reasons: i. There is substantial new information to be submitted that was not heard by the previous group making the decision that is being appealed. ii. There is an allegation that a GHSA rule was misappli ed in that ruling. iii. There is an allegation that due process was not give n in previous considerations. b. An appeal of a decision by the Executive Director must be based on one of the following reasons: i. There is an allegation that a GHSA rule was misinterp reted. ii. There is an allegation that the Executive Director di d not afford due process to the school. c. All appeals shall set forth the basis for the appeal an d the facts supporting the same, and shall be screened by the Executive Director for compliance with this ru le prior to scheduling a hearing. E. The State Appeal Board, after hearing or examining t he evidence submitted by the party or parties, may affirm or reverse the decision of the Executive Director. In order to sustain an appeal, the vote of the Appeal Board shall be unanimous. F. Should any member school not be satisfied with the deci sion of the State Appeal Board, they may appeal to the State Executive Committee by filing a written notice of ap peal to the State Executive Committee through the State Executive Director within seven (7) calendar days of the date of the decision. The notice of appeal shall clearly state the decision being appealed and the reasons for such appe al. Such notice of appeal shall be accompanied by a check sufficient to pay the entire expenses of the State Executi ve Committee when such appeal is required to be heard at a time other than regularly scheduled meeting s of the State Executive Committee. G. The State Executive Committee, after hearing or examin ing the evidence submitted by the party or parties concerned, shall render a decision to affirm, reverse, or modify the decision under appeal. H. No other method of appeal shall be held valid and any appeal must begin with the first step outlined and not eliminate any step until reaching the final court of appeal, the State Executive Committee. When the decision by the State Executive Committee is in favor of the appealing party or parties, the State Executive Committee may charge the expense of the meeting to the Georgia High School Associati on and reimburse the appealing party or parties. I. The Executive Director shall have the authority to lengt hen or shorten the time for appeals of decisions, if req uired in his discretion, to accommodate pending schedules, events or o ther matters. J. Nothing in the Constitution of the GHSA is intended t o give any individual students of GHSA member schools any due process or other rights as only member schools are entit led to any notice or opportunity to be heard in any questions coming before the GHSA. No student of GHSA member schools shall have any rights or benefits under this Constitution as a third party beneficiary or otherwi se. 8 SECTION 10 VOTE Each school shall have one (1) vote in a Region meeting an d each member of the State Executive Committee shall have one (1) vote in the State Executive Committee meeting. SECTION 11 AMEND CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS A. To amend the Constitution, it shall take a two-thir ds vote of the members of the Executive Committee who are present at a regular or properly called meeting at whi ch a quorum is present. Blank ballots, abstentions and pass votes are excluded. B. To amend the By-Laws, it shall take a majority vote of the members of the Executive Committee who are present at a regular or properly called meeting at which a quorum i s present. Blank ballots, abstentions and pass votes are excluded. C. The effective date of any changes in the Constitution & By-Laws will be the next school year unless otherwise provided by the change. D. Proposed changes to the Constitution must be adopted a t two separate meetings of the Executive Committee to be held not less than 30 calendar days apart. SECTION 12 BI-ANNUAL MEETINGS A. The State Executive Committee of the Georgia High Schoo l Association shall meet in the spring and fall of each yea r on such dates as may be designated by the State Executive Direct or. B. In addition to these meetings, special meetings may be called by the State President or the Executive Director at a ny time or place upon giving reasonable notice to the memb ers of the Committee. C. The Executive Director is required to present an itemize d statement of the income and expenditures of all funds to the State Executive Committee. SECTION 13 VIOLATION OF RULES A. Each school is required to abide by all rules of the Ge orgia High School Association as promulgated by the State Executive Committee and interpreted by the Executive Director . B. The Executive Director is authorized to make such investigat ion as may be necessary and to judge whether or not a school has violated a rule. When a school is adjudged guil ty, the Executive Director is authorized to direct the penal ty or penalties, including but not limited to, declaring a student ineligible to compete in GHSA activities for a p eriod of time of up to four (4) years. The Executive Director shall also have the authority to refer allegations of intenti onal or grossly negligent violations of GHSA by-laws and rules by GHSA m ember schools or their personnel to the GHSA Trustees for considerations of additional penalties. C. A school violating any rule, whether it be due to care lessness, willfulness, ignorance or any other cause, may be subject to a fine of not more than two thousand-five hu ndred dollars ($2,500.00) for each offense, and/or pro bation in the sports(s) in which the violation has been made, and/o r suspension from the Association up to a full calendar year , and/or forfeiture of games and/or contests involved. (NOT E: See Appendix “P” at the end of this publication for a detailed schedule of fines) D. PROBATION - placing a school on probation permits a schoo l to compete in regular season games and/or contests, but bars that school from competing for any championship d uring the period of probation. E. A school which, after investigation, is adjudged guilty of violating the rules of the Georgia High School Associati on shall pay the costs incidental to such investigation; such cost t o be in addition to fines or penalties assessed. Failure to pay the cost shall result in suspension or in lengthenin g the period of suspension. SECTION 14 CODE OF ETHICS The Georgia High School Association recognizes its responsibili ty with respect to the promotion of honesty, truthfulness, and accuracy in record-keeping and reporting. Therefore, the professional personnel of the member schools are charg ed with upholding the Code of Ethics adopted by the Professio nal Standards Commission as accepted and approved by the State Board of Education. 9

By-Law 2.00 - School ...................................................................................................... 23

SECTION 1 SCHOOLS ELIGIBLE FOR MEMBERSHIP The membership of the Georgia High School Association shall consist of public and private high schools in the state of Georgia. SECTION 2 CLASSIFICATION OF SCHOOLS A. The Reclassification Committee of the GHSA Executive Commi ttee shall place member schools in classifications and regions based on student F.T.E. figures and geograph ic proximity, respectively. B. Member schools will be realigned every two (2) years. C. The number of classifications and the number of regio ns will be determined by the Reclassification Committee a t the time of each realignment. D. The number of classifications and regions, together wi th the assignment of schools therein, shall be submitted t o the Executive Committee. The Executive Committee, by majority vote , may approve, reject or modify in any way the proposals submitted by the Reclassification Committee. SECTION 3 STRUCTURE OF REGIONS A. After reclassification, all regions will meet and submi t to the State Office, after the final reclassification vo te, a plan for structure of the regions. These plans must spell out subdivi sions, if any, for all activities. All regions must have been approved before any scheduling may be finalized. B. In the event that any member school has a complaint wi th the structure of a region, it shall so advise the Executi ve Director and all other schools in the subject region of su ch complaint in writing within seven (7) calendar days aft er the region meeting following the final reclassification vote. The Executive Director shall then convene a meeting o f the Reclassification Committee to review the present and proposed region structure and to attempt to arbitrate the differences and, failing that, to make a recommendation to the Executive Committee. All schools in the subject region shall be advised of the me eting of the Reclassification Committee by the Executive Director and shall have the right to present evidence to the Committee. Any member of the Committee which is a member of the subject region shall be disqualified from participation on the Committee. C. The Executive Committee shall have full authority to re quire all or any portion of a subregion to play cross-over games and to align or realign the subject region into new subregions. SECTION 4 MEMBERSHIP IN ANOTHER ASSOCIATION A school is not eligible for membership in the Georgia H igh School Association if it is or becomes a member of an association whose Constitution and/or By-Laws are in conflict with the Constitution and/or By-Laws of the Georgia Hi gh School Association.

Thomaston, Georgia 30286-0004 706-647-7473 FAX 706-647-2638 www.ghsa.net GEORGIA HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATION Revised 8/27/2026 Beginning and Ending Dates for 2026-2027 ACTIVITY DATE FOR FIRST PRACTICE FIRST CONTEST MAXIMUM GAMES/DATES PSR MINIMUM GAMES MAX NON -GHSA GAMES LAST PLAY DATE PLAYOFF QUALIFIERS DETERMINED First Round/ Sectionals Second Round Quarterfinals Semifinals Finals Football Jul 27 Aug 21 10 (7 JV) 9 2 Nov 6 Nov 6 Nov 13 Nov 20 Nov 27 Dec 4 Dec 15-16 Cheerleading Jul 27 Aug 8 6 (4JV) Oct 31 Nov 7 Nov 13-14 Game Day Jul 27 Sep 19 Dec 5 Dec 10-11 Softball (FP) Jul 27 Aug 1 30 V/21 JV 20 6 Oct 8 Oct 8 Oct 12-15 Oct 19-22 Oct 28-31 Volleyball Jul 27 Aug 3 18 (13 JV) Dates 30 6 Oct 13 Oct 13 Oct 17 Oct 20-21 Oct 24 Oct 27-28 Oct 29 Oct 31 Cross Country Jul 27 Aug 10 10 (7 JV) Oct 31 Oct 31 Oct 31 Nov 6-7 Flag Football Sep 7 Sep 14 20 V/14 JV 14 4 Nov 14 Nov 14 Nov 18 Nov 18 Dec 1 Dec 3 Dec 8 One Act Play Jul 27 Oct 31 Nov 7 Oct 31 Nov 7 Nov 14 Nov 21 Literary Jul 27 Mar 8 Mar 8 Mar 13 Mar 20 Riflery Jul 27 Oct 19 Feb 11 Feb 12 Feb 25 Mar 4 Mar 20 Swimming/Diving Oct 5 Oct 19 10 (7 JV) Jan 26 Jan 30 Diving Feb 3-6, Swim Dance Oct 19 Nov 7 6 (4JV) Feb 6 Feb 19-20 Basketball Oct 19 Nov 6 25 (18 JV) 22 5 Feb 20 Feb 20 Feb 23-24 Feb 26-27 Mar 2-3 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Wrestling (Duals) Oct 19 Nov 6 20 (14 JV) Dates Total Duals and Trad Jan 28 Jan 8-9 Jan 8 G, 9 B Jan 15 Jan 15-16 Boys Jan 23, Girls Wrestling (Traditional) Oct 19 Nov 6 20 (14 JV) Dates Total Duals and Trad Jan 28 Jan 29-30 Feb 5-6 Feb 10-13 By Class. Gymnastics Jan 25 Feb 8 10 (7 JV) Apr 13 Apr 21 Individual Apr 22-23, Team Tennis Jan 25 Feb 8 18 (13 JV) Dates 14 3 Apr 16 Apr 17 Apr 22 Apr 28 May 4 May 7 May 12 Soccer Jan 25 Feb 8 18 (13 JV) 14 4 Apr 15 Apr 15 Apr 20-23 Apr 27-30 May 3-4 May 6-7 May 11-14 Track & Field Jan 18 Feb 8 10 (7 JV) Apr 24 Apr 24 May 1 May 7-8 Lacrosse Jan 25 Feb 8 18 V/ 13 JV 14 4 Apr 22 Apr 27-28 Apr 30-May 1 May 5-6 May 7-8 May 13-15 Baseball Jan 25 Feb 15 30 (21 JV) 20 6 Apr 29 Apr 29 May 3-6 May 10-11 May 15 May 17 May 22 May 24 May 28-29 May 31 Golf Jan 25 Feb 8 12 (8JV) Dates May 4 Apr 29 (5-7A) May 4, (1-4A, Priv) May 3-4 (5-7A) May 17-18 NOTES: Dates are Subject to Change. Dates and more information for Bass Fishing and Esports may be found on the GHSA website (www.ghsa.net) The "Dead Weeks" for the 2027-2028 school year are Monday, May 31 through Sunday, June 6, 2027 and Monday, June 28 through Sunday, July 4, 2027. The GHSA Office will be closed both weeks. Table of Contents Constitution ..................................................................................................................... 5 By-Laws ........................................................................................................................... 12 By-Law 1.00 - Student ..................................................................................................... 13

By-Law 3.00 - Region ...................................................................................................... 39

By-Law 4.00 - State ......................................................................................................... 40

This organization shall be known as the Georgia High Schoo l Association.

a. A “migrant student” is a student who transfers into a GHSA school without a bona fide move or without one of t he exceptions listed in by-law 1.62. The student may practice o r compete at the sub-varsity level, but may not compete at the varsity level for one calendar year from the date of entry into the new school. In the event that, after transfer, a 18 student becomes or is later determined to be a migrant student, then the student shall be ineligible to compet e at the varsity level for one calendar year from that date. b. If a student has been ruled eligible to participate by the GHSA, but it is later determined that such eligib ility should not have been approved, any ineligibility to participate in future GHSA activities may be assessed as of the date that such ineligibility was determined. c. A student who, after entering the ninth grade, has m ade one bona fide move and established eligibility at a new member school, shall be declared a migrant for one calen dar year upon a second or successive transfer to another member school. Appeal of the migrant status hereunder may be made utilizing the hardship procedure. 1.64 A student who is not eligible at the former school, and then transfers to a new school, cannot regain eligibili ty by the transfer. Academically ineligible students cannot gain elig ibility by being adjudicated to YDC and subsequently retur ning to their resident school with earned credit. NOTE: The new school may file a hardship appeal if circumstances warrant. 1.65 Students whose transfers from a member or non-member scho ol to a member school have been approved by the GHSA office within (20) calendar days of the end of the GHSA regular season p lay are not eligible for participation in GHSA sponsored tournaments and/or playoffs in that particul ar sport for the school year of transfer. 1.66 A student who is not eligible at one school because of susp ension or expulsion and then transfers to a member school cannot regain eligibility by such a transfer, for th e length of the suspension or one calendar year, whichever is less. 1.67 A permissive transfer is defined as an allowance by a local board of education for students and/or their parents to choose a school to attend without regard to the location of residence. a. A student transferring from member school to member sch ool on a permissive transfer is considered a migrant student. b. A student transferring to or from a school housing a syst em-wide, singular academic or vocation program or a magnet program on a permissive transfer is considered a mi grant student. 1. The offering of an individual course or series of cour ses by one school in a system does not provide inherent justification to grant GHSA eligibility. 2. Special options offered by a school system that allow stud ents to attend a school outside their area of residence do not provide inherent justification to grant GHSA eligibility. 3. Any such permissive transfer issue may be brought before th e GHSA Hardship Committee. c. Students transferring under the provisions of Federal o r State academic accountability regulations must be processed through the normal hardship appeals process. d. When a military base is located in two school districts, a student moving onto the base for the first time may cho ose to attend either school district, and that district will place the student appropriately. Any transfer after the i nitial placement will be subject to standard eligibility regula tions. 1.68 Hardship Applications may be filed by an administrator at a member school when a student does not meet the standards of eligibility outlined in by-laws 1.50 (academ ic issues) and 1.60 (transfer issues). a. The GHSA Constitution (Art. IV; Sec. 5; Subsection B4) specif ies that the hardship issues must be beyond the reasonable control of the persons involved. b. The process of appealing a decision of the Hardship Co mmittee is outlined in the GHSA Constitution (Art. IV, Sec. 9, Subsection C & D). c. In order for a hardship appeal based on a financial hardship to be approved, the new school must provide proo f that the family attempted to address the financial problem a t the previous school, and that the need-based financial aid was non-existent or insufficient to resolve the problem. I ncreases in tuition or other costs at a private school do no t create an automatic reason to grant the appeal, because such fee increases are considered foreseeable and not unavoidable. Documentation of the financial problem is required. 1.69 When a new school opens, student eligibility shall be de termined as follows: a. When a school district mandates a service area for a new school for all grades enrolled at the new school, all students living within the mandated service area in those grades are immediately eligible. All students living outsi de the mandated service area who desire to attend the new school are considered migrant students and are ineligible for one year. Hardship appeals may be filed if condition s warrant. b. When a school district mandates some students to attend the new school, allows some students to stay at their present school, and permits some students to transfer to th e new school, the school shall set a deadline for students living in the service area of the new school to decide whe ther they will move to the new school, or stay at the pre sent school. The decisions exercised at the deadline date are bi nding. Subsequent changes render the student to be a migrant student with the one-year period of ineligibi lity. Students who are granted permissive transfers to enro ll at the new school from other schools within the system are consi dered to be migrant students. Hardship appeals may be filed if conditions warrant. 1.70 - RECRUITING/UNDUE INFLUENCE / FOLLOWING THE COACH 19 1.71 Recruiting and Undue Influence is defined as the use of influence by any person connected directly or indirectly with a GHSA school to induce a student of any age to transf er from one school to another, or to enter the ninth grade at a member school for athletic or literary competition purpo ses, whether or not the school presently attended by the st udent is a member of the GHSA. a. The use of undue influence to secure OR retain a stud ent for competitive purposes is prohibited, and shall lea d to penalties being assessed against either school. This violatio n may cause the student to forfeit eligibility for one ye ar from the date of enrollment, provided however, that su ch period of ineligibility may be assessed from the date t hat recruitment/undue influence violation was finally determ ined to have occurred with regard to the student rather than from the date of enrollment. b. Evidence of undue influence includes, but is not limite d to: 1. personal contact with coaches, boosters, or other school p ersonnel discussing participating in athletics upon a proposed transfer 2. gifts of money, jobs, supplies, clothing, or housing in centives 3. free transportation 4. free admission to contests 5. an invitation to attend practices and/or games 6. a social event (other than an official schoolwide Open House program) specifically geared for prospective athletes 7. free tuition beyond the allowable standards found i n by-law 1.82 8. a coach asking a prospective student for contact informati on c. Complaints or reports of violations of this rule will be investigated and handled on a case-by-case basis. If coache s are found to be in violation of the recruiting rule, a copy of the investigation will be forwarded to the Pro fessional Standards Commission of the Department of Education. d. A school will be afforded an opportunity to demonstra te it could not reasonably be expected to be responsible f or the actions of a booster who is found to have violated the re cruiting/undue influence rules. 1.72 Following The Coach : A student athlete transferring from one school to anot her, or entering the ninth grade for the first time, shall be ruled ineligible for one year if it is proven that: a. The coach of the receiving school coached an out-of-school team or all-star team on which the athlete played pri or to the transfer; OR b. The coach at the receiving school acted as a private athl etic instructor for the transferring athlete, regardless of whether the coach was paid for his services and/or expertise; OR c. The student participated in a sports camp or clinic run by a member school and/or its coach(es). d. The player who played for a coach at one school (GHSA me mber or non-member) and subsequently (within a 12- month period) followed that coach when he/she moved to a GHSA school or changed schools within the GHSA membership. (This is not applicable to dependent childre n of the coach.) e. The situations cited in this by-law are considered to b e violations even if a bona fide move has occurred. Hardshi p appeal procedures are available for the demonstration t hat undue influence has not occurred. 1.73 A booster shall be considered to be an extension of the sch ool and must abide by all rules applied to coaches and other school personnel. The following persons or groups m ay be considered boosters: members of the school’s Booster Club; students; alumni; parents; guardians; or relatives of a student or former student; financial donors; donor s of time and effort; personal trainers or coaches renting facilities. 1.80 - FINANCIAL AID 1.81 Any student who receives financial aid or non-GHSA approved gifts from any source and in any form (scholarships, tuition remission, cash, gifts, etc.) arising out of or received in connection with their participation in any sport or literary event shall be ruled ineligible. The duration of the ineligibility will last as long as the illegal benefits are being received. This prohibition shall not apply to awards under By-Law 1.90 or to other items approved by the GHSA. a. If tuition is charged, it must be paid by a parent, legal guardian, or other family member with the except ion of payments coming from need-based financial aid. b. It is not legal for donated funds to be designated for a specific student that are given by non-family member s, businesses, churches or other organizations, except for progra ms specified by state law. c. Schools may not employ students to work off their tuition costs. d. The GHSA Executive Director will determine whether the financial aid or gift arose out of or in connection wit h participation in any sport or literary event. e. If a school allows a student who has received such financi al aid or gifts to participate in competition, the Execut ive Director shall assess an appropriate penalty. 1.82 Financial aid in the form of free or reduced tuition or other aid must be need-based aid as determined by a national 20 student aid service or financial aid based on institutiona l policies for academic performance (classroom record and/or test scores) that is administered by persons not in the athletic department. 1.83 Member schools who award financial aid shall issue a state ment to the Executive Director signed by the principal or headmaster of the school giving the following informati on: a. number of students enrolled in the school b. number of students receiving financial aid c. names of students (or a listing of student identificati on numbers) receiving financial aid who are involved in G HSA activities d. certification that the percentage of students who par ticipate in activities and who receive financial aid is the same percentage as the number of students receiving financial a id who do not participate in activities (plus or minus 5% ) 1.90 - AMATEUR STATUS/AWARDS 1.91 A student who represents a school in interscholastic athleti c competition shall be an amateur in that activity. a. An amateur athlete is one who engages in athletic competition solely for th e physical, mental, social, and pleasure benefits derived therefrom. b. Accepting nominal, standard fees or salary for instructin g, supervising or officiating in an organized youth sports program or recreation, playground or camp activity, shall not jeopardize an athlete's amateur status. c. Reasonable compensation derived from private lessons in a sport is permissible. 1.92 An athlete forfeits amateur status in a sport by: a. competing for money or other monetary compensations exce pt for reasonable allowances for travel, meals, and lodging. NOTE: Accepting expense allowances authorized by the United States Olympic Committee for Olympic Development Programs is acceptable for GHSA students. b. receiving any award or prize of monetary value which ha s not been approved by the GHSA. c. capitalizing on athletic performance by receiving money o r gifts with monetary value except college scholarships. d. signing a professional playing contract in any sport, or hiring an agent to manage his/her athletic career. 1.93 Only awards approved by the GHSA may be accepted by a high school student -athlete as a result of participation in school or non-school competition in a sport recognized by th e GHSA. 1.94 Symbolic awards (i.e. non-cash) presented for winning or placing in GH SA competitions are limited to $400 per year, per student in the aggregate, paid by the local sch ool. These are the only GHSA-approved awards for interschol astic competition. Beyond this, a student may receive one (1) schoo l sweater or jacket presented by the school during his high school career. 1.95 Athletes competing in golf or tennis events are limited to awards as specified in the United States Golf Association Rules of Golf, and the United States Tennis Association Han dbook of Tennis Rules and Regulations, which includes (but not limited to) the following: a. No cash awards may be accepted. b. Merchandise awards in tennis may be accepted up to a re tail value of $250.00. c. Merchandise awards in golf may be accepted up to a reta il value of $750.00. 1.96 Players attending national camps or all-star events may keep reasonable benefits for housing, meals and transportation. Players may keep only equipment that is comm emorative in nature and/or used in the process of the event’s workouts. 1.97 Students may receive consideration for the use of their ow n name, image and likeness (NIL). Guidance for NIL can b e found in Appendix “N” of the GHSA Constitution. 21 BY-LAW 2.00 - SCHOOL 2.10 - SCHOOL MEMBERSHIP TO GEORGIA HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATION 2.11 The GHSA is a voluntary association available to any Georgia high school, grades 9-12, that has been authorized to seek membership by the local board of education or similar governing body of control. a. Member schools agree to conform to the Constitution a nd By-Laws of the GHSA. b. Member schools agree to conform to the rules of the r egion organizations to which they are assigned. c. Should a conflict arise between state rules and region rules, the state rules always take precedent. 2.12 Procedure for Membership: a. The local board of education or similar governing bo dy of control must adopt a resolution authorizing member ship for the high school. b. Membership is continued through the original resolut ion as long as the school is in good standing with the GH SA. c. April 1 preceding the reclassification alignment process i s the deadline date for new and existing private schools t o join the GHSA for the next reclassification period. Newly e stablished public schools will have a deadline date of Apri l 1 to join the GHSA for the upcoming school year. No privat e school with an actual numerical enrollment of less than 150 students in grades 9-12 will be admitted to the GH SA. d. Converted charter schools whose attendance zones and elig ibility requirements do not change retain their membership in the GHSA. Converted charter schools or startup charter schools must apply for membership in the GHSA. 2.13 Dues for Membership: a. The amount of the dues is set annually by the Executive C ommittee of the GHSA and includes a portion of the cost of catastrophic insurance. 1. Dues must be paid prior to October 15 of each year. 2. Schools failing to meet the dues-payment deadline are not eligible to participate in any contest until membership dues are paid. b. Dues are prorated according to the school’s classification . NOTE: Schools with a total enrollment of less than 50 stud ents are assessed their insurance fees according to the actual number of participants. c. *The Dues schedule is as follows: CLASSIFICATION PAID BY OCTOBER 15 PAID AFTER OCTOBER 15 7A $1,240.00 $1,340.00 6A $1,115.00 $1,215.00 5A $990.00 $1,090.00 4A $865.00 $965.00 3A $740.00 $840.00 2A $615.00 $715.00 1A $490.00 $590.00 *Dues and Fees may be waived by the Executive Director. 2.14 If a school or school system initiates litigation against t he association and the court rules in favor of the associati on, the school or school system shall be responsible for paying al l court costs and attorneys’ fees. 2.15 If the association conducts an investigation of a member sch ool in reference to a possible violation of association rules and the member school is found to be in violation, the school shall be assessed the cost of the investigation in addition to any fines. 2.16 Playing a Non-Region Schedule: A school may choose to play a non-region schedule in football, fastpitch softball, basketball, and/or baseball, and this choice is in effect f or the current reclassification cycle. 23 a. A GHSA member school playing a non-region schedule may no t participate in post-season competition in the GHSA or any other association.. b. Results of games with a school playing a non-region sche dule may not be used in region standings. c. Schools playing a non-region schedule in football, fastp itch softball, basketball and/or baseball must inform the GHSA office not less than 30 days prior to the first official p laying date for that sport. 2.17 Region and Area Divisions: A classification in any sport will be considered Regionalized when a majority of the schools (with a minimum of 5) in all regions participate in that sport. In sports where all classifications are not regionalized, the classes may be divided into Area alignments, and two or more classifications, or any portions thereof, may be combined at the discretion of the Executive Director. NOTE: Regions formed by the Reclassification Committee that consist of fewer than five (5) teams may be exempted from this rule. 2.20 - ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES 2.21 The administrative head of each school shall have on file in the school office: a. a certificate of an annual physical examination given b y a licensed medical physician, a doctor of Osteopathic medicine, nurse practitioner or a physician’s assistant indica ting the student is approved for participation in athle tic activities before that student may try-out, participate in practice, conditioning drills or summer activities, or par ticipate in interscholastic contests (see By-Law 1.41). b. a written Emergency Action Plan for athletic practices and games. This plan must include responses to natural disasters, serious illnesses/injuries, and terroristic events, a nd must have the involvement of local law enforcement agencies, rescue agencies, medical doctors and hospital person nel. c. The Emergency Action Plan (EAP) should include the following : 1. The venue-specific EAP should be reviewed and rehearsed an nually prior to each sport season. Recommended personnel include local Emergency Medical Services (EMS), school p ublic safety officials, school administrators, on-site medical personnel or school medical staff (team physicians or athletic trainers) and all pertinent coaching staff members. 2. The venue-specific EAP and AED should be accessible to all invo lved in a potential emergent situation for practices, games or other athletic events. 3. All emergency equipment which is available onsite, inclu ding Automatic External Defibrillators (AEDs), should be listed on the EAP, stored in a safe place, be well-marke d and publicized. 4. The EAP should identify key personnel and their responsibi lities to carry out the plan of action with a designated chain of command, including documentation acti ons that need to be taken post emergency. 5. The EAP should contain appropriate contact information for the local and/or responding EMS personnel. 6. The EAP should contain the facility address, GPS coordinates, location and contact information. 7. A medical timeout is recommended prior to all GHSA sanct ioned events to review the EAP. 2.22 The administrative head of each school shall operate all interscholastic contests and activities under direct and complete control of the school administration or designat ed school personnel. These responsibilities are not to be delegated by the board of education, superintendent, o r principal to any person or persons who are not a part of the school’s professional staff. 2.23 The administrative head of each school is expected to be a person who believes in fairness and honesty as evidenced by the strict adherence to all rules and regulations in r egards to eligibility of contestants representing his/her school. 2.24 The administrative head of each school is expected to empl oy those persons who exemplify fairness and honesty. Any certificated person who violates rules in regard to stud ent eligibility, or illegal practices, or knowingly mislea ds a member school and/or the GHSA will have a report of that behavior sent to the Professional Standards Commission. 2.25 The administrative head of each school may submit to the GHSA Executive Committee such recommendations for the improvement of the GHSA as he/she may deem necessary. a. These recommendations must be submitted to the GHSA Off ice at least thirty (30) calendar days prior to the meeti ng of the Executive Committee. b. A proposal brought to the Executive Committee that is d enied by either a subcommittee or the full Executive Committee may not be submitted for three (3) regularl y-scheduled meetings after the previous submission unless a substantive change has been made to the proposal. 2.26 The member institution has a responsibility to educate st udent-athletes, coaches, and other appropriate persons on GHSA rules and procedures that could affect them. Further, the member school should monitor its compliance with Stat e Association guidelines. 2.27 Member schools that fail to follow stated procedures and deadlines may be assessed a fine for each violation. 2.28 Schools that need to cancel appointments scheduled with th e Hardship Committee or the Appeals Board must do so 24 at least 24 hours before the appointment. Failure to cancel properly will result in a fine. 2.29 Member schools are expected to fulfill their responsibili ties for a sports season once they have committed to play tha t sport. a. If a school commits to play a sport at the region meet ing that precedes the sport, or on March 1 for Area sport s, and then drops out of competition before or during the sea son, the school will have to play a non-region schedule in that sport the next year. b. If a school enters the competitive structure that quali fies it to advance in postseason competition, that school is expected to advance if it qualifies. Schools that drop out of competition after qualifying may be penalized with f ines or probation. c. Appeals for emergency circumstances may be filed with the Exe cutive Director. 2.30 - ELIGIBILITY REPORTS FILED BY THE SCHOOL 2.31 Eligibility reports are required for all contestants pri or to the calendar date for the first possible practice i n any GHSA activity. (EXCEPTION: Eligibility reports for Literary, One-Act Play and Riflery competitions are due twenty (20) calendar days before the first contest.) a. Students are not allowed to participate in academic, athletic or literary competitions until their eligibili ty reports have been received and processed by the GHSA Office. b. Failure to meet the eligibility deadline may lead the GHSA Executive Director to: 1. Assess a fine to the school that is delinquent. 2. Suspend the membership of a school that does not file eligibility reports. 3. Reports not filed properly will be returned to the school for resubmission. 2.32 Schools playing interscholastic contests before filing an eli gibility report on one or more participating students m ay be subject to one or more of the following penalties impo sed by the GHSA Executive Director: a. a fine per game or contest in which one or more par ticipants had no eligibility report filed; b. forfeiture of any game in which one or more partici pants did not have eligibility report filed; c. restriction from competition in any sport if the fines assessed are not paid within fourteen (14) calendar days o f notification. 2.33 Supplementary eligibility reports may be submitted at an y time on transfer students, students coming out for the t eam after the initial report, and/or those students who ga in eligibility at the beginning of a semester. 2.34 Once a student has been certified eligible by the school and has been processed by the GHSA, eligibility is assumed to be continuing, and no further eligibility report i s necessary for that student during the school year unless situ ations occur that render the student ineligible. 2.35 If a student loses eligibility and regains it during th e school year, a new eligibility report should be filed for that student. 2.36 Changes of Eligibility Records: When a school discovers that incorrect information has been given on an eligibility report, the school should contact the GHSA office for proced ural instructions. 2.37 Requests to investigate a student’s eligibility in regard to the transfer rule must be filed with the GHSA office at least twenty (20) calendar days before the end of the regular season in order for any penalties to be applied before the end of the playoffs. 2.40 - STUDENT RETENTION FOR INTERSCHOLASTIC ATHLETIC ACTIVI TIES 2.41 Member schools shall prohibit participation in interschol astic activities by any student who was retained in the eigh th grade for competitive purposes. The governing body of each school system shall develop a written policy showing that th e system does not allow retention for competitive purposes. 2.50 - QUALIFICATIONS TO COACH 2.51 An athletic head coach must be a professional teacher, a f ull-time para professional (NOTE: para professionals must take the Head Coaching Class offered through the GHSA coach es education program), or hold a four-year degree whil e also employed in a teaching or administrative position, m eeting the teaching requirements and be employed by onl y one board of education or similar governing authority withi n the GHSA membership, regardless of whether or not they are paid for their coaching (Exception: when all boards of education or similar govern ing authorities and all principals/headmasters involved sig n a consent form on an annual basis he/she may coach at another school system), AND: a. be employed for 20 or more hours per week on a regu lar basis in a professional, contracted position and must h old a 25 teaching certificate or leadership certificate issued by the State of Georgia, OR b. be employed for 20 or more hours per week on a regu lar basis as a JROTC instructor in the school's JROTC program, OR c. be assigned as a student intern in a practice teaching si tuation under the guidance of a college or university te acher training program, OR d. be a retired teacher teaching or supervising (NOTE: coa ching meets the supervising requirement of this by-law) le ss than one-half time (forty hours considered full time), OR e. be a certified teacher or administrator at a member school on medical leave governed by the “Family Medical Le ave Act” and/or the “Georgia Teacher Maternity Leave of Absence ” policy (see the GHSA web site for the required form). f. If a currently certified faculty-coach at a member school loses his/her teaching position because of a reduction in force action, that school may petition the Executive Director in writing for that individual to continue to coach wi thout going through the community coach training. g. A teacher at a non-member school who is hired to be a coach at a member school must complete the GHSA Community Coach Education program and may not be a head coach. A consent form between the two schools must be completed annually. h. If a school is in a charter or strategic waiver (IE2) syste m, the coach (head coach or assistant) must meet the highly qualified requirements outlined in the Georgia Professi onal Standards Commission’s guidelines. 2.52 Member schools may employ persons who are not professionall y certificated teachers as assistant coaches in their athletic programs. These individuals are referred to as “ community coaches.” a. Community Coach is defined as a person who does not ha ve a professional-level certification, who relates in role and function to a professional and does a portion of the pr ofessional's job or tasks under the supervision of the professional, and whose decision-making authority is limite d and regulated by the professional. Community coaches are not allowed to function without the immediate sup ervision of an educational professional and may not assume any of the duties of a varsity Head Coach or be named by t he school as a varsity Head Coach. b. Licensed para-professionals and full-time substitute te achers must complete the GHSA Coaches Education Program and testing program to be eligible to coach. c. All community coaches should be signed to a written “agre ement to coach.” 1. They may coach for only one board of education annuall y, regardless of whether or not they are paid for their services. 2. Community coaches may not coach the same sport at more th an one school even if there are multiple schools in the system. d. All community coaches must complete the GHSA Coaches Education Training and Testing Program in “Sport First Aid” and “Principles for Coaches.” 1. Prospective coaches must be subject to a criminal background check before they are registered for the GHSA coaches education program. 2. Courses are offered at various times each school year thr oughout the state. 3. Prospective coaches are registered with the GHSA office by t he school hiring them. 4. No community coach may do any GHSA coaching until he/she ha s been notified that the GHSA Coaches Education Program had been completed successfully. e. It is recommended that the following priority for e mployment be used: 1. certified employees in the local system (secondary, middle , elementary, central office, etc.); 2. retired certificated personnel; 3. community coaches who have completed the GHSA Coaches Educati on Program. f. All community coaches must attend a regular GHSA rules clin ic each year for any sport in which they coach beginning with their first year of service or the school w ill be fined. g. No person who has coached a non-GHSA team in a sport or activity within the previous 12 months may be hired or utilized by a GHSA member school in that same sport or activi ty IF any of that GHSA school’s players participated on the non-GHSA team that person coached. 2.53 GHSA member schools must register all coaches in all GHSA gover ned activities according to the following: a. An initial directory listing of administrators and coach es must be completed and filed with the State Office by Au gust 1 of each year. Only professionally certificated personnel, or individuals holding a four-year degree who are employed in a teaching or administrative position, are t o be included on the initial directory listings. b. Qualified Community Coaches are to be reported on t he “School Staff Roster” on the GHSA web site. Only those persons who have successfully completed the GHSA Coaches Education Program are to be listed. NOTE: Schools must verify the successful completion of the coaches education p rogram BEFORE community coaches are submitted to the GHSA and BEFORE any coaching activities are al lowed (forms on the GHSA web site). c. After August 1, schools will have occasion to add members to their coaching staff. It is the responsibility of the member school to register these additions in a timely man ner, using the School Staff Roster on the GHSA web site. d. Failure to comply with these procedures could result in punitive actions including, but not limited to, fines, forfeitures and other penalties assessed to the member school. 26 2.54 Every faculty coach, community coach, or student-teaching inter n at a member school must complete: a. a GHSA-sponsored rules clinic if he/she coaches the followi ng sports or activities: cross country, football, softball, volleyball, riflery, literary, esports, one act play, cheerl eading (spirit and/or competitive), basketball, lacrosse, wrestling, swimming and diving, track, baseball, golf, socce r and gymnastics. b. CPR (minimum compression only) and AED training prior t o any team activity or within a maximum of 30 days from the start of a team activity and it must be renewed at a minimum of every two years. c. All coaches must attend/complete a comprehensive training and education program for “Traumatic Head Injuries.” The recommendation is the CDC “Heads Up” for coaches. NOTE: A fine for each coach who does not complete a rules cl inic, or who does not complete the required CPR, AED or concussion management training, before the assigned de adline will be assessed to the school. 2.55 A coach on the payroll of one school district, but under co ntract to another school district for the following year, may help with spring practice at the new school if arrangeme nts are satisfactory with both systems. 2.56 An assistant or head coach at a GHSA member school may registe r and officiate a sport in which they coach with the following provisions: a. They may officiate a sub-varsity contest at any GHSA member school. b. They may officiate at the varsity and/or post-season level , if the game does NOT involve schools in the same classification as the school at which they coach. 2.60 - INTERSCHOLASTIC CONTESTS AND PRACTICES 2.61 All practices (team and individual) and all regular-seaso n interscholastic contests for GHSA-member schools shall be conducted outside the school day of the participants' school. a. Regional, Sectional, and/or State playoffs are exempt from this rule. b. The “school day” is defined as: that period of time b etween when students are required to report to school a nd the time of dismissal of that school. EXCEPTION: When the host scho ol is not in session on a given day, competitions may be scheduled earlier than normal dismissal time for t he host school. However, any school that is in session on that day may not compete in that event before the norma l dismissal time of that school. c. A player who participates in a GHSA sport may not particip ate in practices that occur during the school day. Practice is defined as any activity that is school-initiated, organize d, coordinated or supported. d. All practices will have a maximum length of 3 hours. e. A maximum of two (2) practice sessions my be held in the same day. When multiple sessions are held, the maximum practice time is extended to five (5) hours. Sessions must be separated by a three (3) hour rest break in a cool environment and this rest break cannot included weigh tlifting or conditioning. When a double session practice day occurs, the following practice day must be a single session day. (Football contact guidelines must be followed) f. Football participants complete the five (5) day acclima tization period that starts five (5) weekdays prior to the first official day of practice of each calendar year. 2.62 The GHSA shall provide rules and regulations for competit ion among member schools for those competitive activities listed in the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws. a. Member schools may be allowed to schedule and play GISA a nd GAPPS (formerly GICAA) member schools provided the principal or athletic director of each agre es in writing, utilizing the standard “GHSA Cross-Play Contract,” available on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). 1. GISA and GAPPS schools competing with GHSA schools must comply wit h all GHSA safety rules and requirements and must be in compliance with Official Cod e of Georgia Sections 20-2-319.2 relating to pre- participation physical exams and 20-2-324.1 relating to co ncussion management protocols. 2. Participants must be in compliance with all eligibilit y rules of their respective associations. b. In situations not covered by section (a), member schools sh all compete, practice or scrimmage only against other member schools or against schools that are full members of the State Association in their respective states (NOTE: Football games may be scheduled only if the opponent is a full member, without restrictions, of its state athleti c association). When competing internationally, member schoo ls may compete only against school teams in that nation that are composed of students of similar ages. Internatio nal exhibition competitions or scrimmages are not allowed . NOTE: When member schools compete out of state, the host st ate’s adaptations of NFHS playing rules will be enforced, and all GHSA by-laws regarding sportsmanship, eli gibility and game times will be enforced. c. Member schools are permitted to compete against non-me mber schools in activities not listed in the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws. d. The GHSA Executive Director has the authority to approve co mpetition between GHSA schools and private schools from states in which membership in the State Association is n ot allowed. These non-member schools must meet or exceed the State Association standards in order to compete wi th GHSA schools. e. A member school shall have no more than one varsity, one junior varsity, and one 9th grade team. 27 1. Any sub-varsity team is limited to a maximum number of g ames equal to 70% of the varsity allotment in that sport. EXCEPTION: New schools that have only 9th and 10 grade s with JV teams only (no varsity) are allowed to play the number of games allowed for varsity teams. 2. Competition between sub-varsity and varsity teams and/or individuals at the same event is prohibited. An exception may be made by the Executive Director for schools just opening and for schools just starting a particular sport. 3. In the sports of Cross Country, Golf, Swimming, Tennis, Track & Field and Wrestling, a school may use a “split squad” at two regular season events on the same day at the varsity or sub-varsity levels. Both of the contests must be counted against the total number of contests allo wed in that sport (Exception: Golf – see Golf section). Individual players may not exceed the total number of cont ests allowed at the varsity level of that sport. 4. Unattached Competitor: Individual athletes may parti cipate in non-GHSA events in the sports of Cross Country, Golf, Gymnastics, Riflery, Swimming, Tennis, Track and Wrestl ing as long as they do not represent their school, do not wear the school uniform, and are not coach ed at the event, or transported to the event, by their high school coach. “House teams” made up of athletes from various schools competing in a GHSA event are not considered to be unattached competitors and are ille gal. 5. No athlete will be allowed to compete in a GHSA gam e or contest (even in post-season play) unless accompanied by certified professional school personnel whose names have been submitted to the GHSA as coaches. Those students chaperoned by someone other than a ce rtified professional will not be allowed to compete. 6. In any GHSA sport, there may be no “open” competitions or exhibition performances that extend participation beyond the three levels of competition (i.e., varsity, JV, 9 th grade) mandated in this by-law. The only interscholastic contests in which results are disregarded are scrimmages as defined below. 7. Drones shall not be permitted to fly during any GHSA sa nctioned contest. Note: This prohibition begins when the gates or doors open and extends until the last spectat or has left the field or arena. 8. Live Animals are prohibited at any indoor GHSA event un less a signed permission letter is acquired from the principal of the school wishing to bring the animal and the principal of the host school (if different). A copy o f this letter must be provided to the GHSA office. NOTE: Thi s by-law does not pertain to certified service animals f. One interscholastic scrimmage (two teams meeting head-t o-head) is allowed in the sports of Baseball, Basketball, Football, Flag Football, Lacrosse, Soccer, Softball, Volleyb all and Wrestling (tri match allowed on days preceding school or quad match on days not preceding a school day). 1. This scrimmage may be scheduled anytime between the beg inning of practice as set by the GHSA and the first regular season game for each team. 2. This scrimmage is for varsity teams only, and shall be pla yed with normal timing and/or scoring rules except as noted in individual sports sections. 3. Officials registered with GHSA must be assigned, and the GHSA “Fee Chart” must be followed. 4. A school may not scrimmage another school that is counting the scrimmage as a regular-season contest. g. All competitions in sports utilizing a Ratings Formula to seed post-season qualification MUST be played to completion with a winner and a loser being determined . 2.63 Written contracts are required for all baseball, footb all, basketball, wrestling and fastpitch softball contests, and are strongly recommended in all other interscholastic contests th at are scheduled between member schools. a. Contract forms can be found on the GHSA web site. b. Contracts are also recommended for all sub-varsity contest s. c. GHSA-member schools are expected to fulfill the condition s of any game contract that has been properly executed. 1. Exceptions to the contract may be made with the agreeme nt and consent of both schools. 2. Member schools that fail to fulfill the requirement s of a scheduled event may be required to make restitution to the competing school if that school is unable to secure an opponent (This includes multi-school events). The offended school shall petition the Executive Director for t he desired restitution. 3. Schools failing to fulfill a game contract may be suspen ded in that sport for one (1) full calendar year or th e corresponding date of the next calendar year, whichever is greater. 4. EXCEPTION: The GHSA Executive Director may excuse the failure t o fulfill a game contract if, in his opinion, the circumstances causing the failure were outside the contr ol of the school officials. d. All athletic events hosted by GHSA-member schools (except Cro ss Country, Golf, Riflery, Tennis and Track) shall be officiated at all levels of competition by officials who a re members of associations that are approved by the GHSA. (Exception: situation noted in By-Law 2.95). 1. Officials’ associations and their assigned schools shall incl ude the method of payment in their contract. 2. It is recommended that the same number of officials b e used in regular-season competitions as the number used in playoff competitions in that sport. e. Forfeiture and Restitution Policy 1. If a team does not arrive at the game site for any co ntest without notifying the host opponent of a late ar rival, that contest will be forfeited 30 minutes after the sche duled game-time. If the second game or contest was to be played by a different team (EXAMPLE: girl/boy or JV/varsity combi nation events), then a decision to forfeit that game will be made 30 minutes after the scheduled begin ning of the second game. 28 2. If there are to be multiple games by the same team and the team does not arrive at the game site without notifying the host opponent of a late arrival, all gam es will be forfeited 30 minutes after the scheduled gam e- time of the first contest. EXAMPLE: softball or baseball doub leheaders 3. If a school fails to show up for a game or cancels a ga me within twenty-four (24) hours of the scheduled starti ng time without an emergency condition or weather-related conditions, that school shall pay a forfeiture fee to th e host school equivalent to the cost of the officials. NOTE: I f the host school is the violating team, the fee will be paid directly to the officials association. The host school sh all reimburse the visiting team(s) for mileage incurred by the visiting team(s) when this by-law is violate d by the host team). 4. If a school fails to show up for a game or cancels with in twenty-four (24) hours of the scheduled game time without emergency reasons or weather-related reasons for a second time, that school must make restitution again and must show cause to the GHSA Executive Director as to why they should not be placed on probation by the GHSA. f. The minimum penalty for allowing an ineligible at hlete to participate in an interscholastic contest is forfe iture of the game(s). Fines or other penalties may also be imposed. NO TE: If it is determined by the Executive Director that the school has exercised every reasonable precaution and has been deceived regarding the student’s data, any or all penalties may be set aside. g. A team shall forfeit any team standing or points towa rd team honors when an ineligible student participates in a contest. In sports where individual titles may be won (Cro ss Country, Literary, Riflery, Swimming & Diving, Tradition al Wrestling, Gymnastics, Golf and Track), eligible individual s will keep their placements and opportunities to advance toward individual honors even if a teammate participate d while ineligible. 2.64 Interscholastic events , other than the Region/ Area or State elimination series must be approved (sanctioned) by the GHSA Executive Director, subject to the special conditions for a thletics and/or other activities. a. A GHSA-member school shall not enter an event which requires sanctioning until it has been approved by the GHSA Executive Director. b. The GHSA Executive Director may assess a fine and/or other p enalties against a member school that violates the sanctioning rules. c. For events hosted in Georgia, applications for sanctioning must be submitted to the GH SA thirty (30) days prior to the tournament by a GHSA-member school. d. Events that require applications for sanctioning from National Federation should be submitted to NFHS sixty (60) days prior to the event by the host member school. NFHS Sanct ioning fees will increase due to late applications. e. The host school for all sanctioned events shall pay five percent (5%) of all gross gate receipts including parking fees charged in lieu of admission, to the GHSA within fourteen (14) calendar days after the tournament. 1. Gross gate receipts are the total gate/admission fees or p arking fees collected before expenses are deducted. 2. A financial report of the event shall accompany the paym ent. f. GHSA approval for events in Georgia and in contiguous states is required when there are five or more schools participating, unless otherwise noted in specific sports sections. (i.e. Cross Country and Track & Field events must be sanctioned if eight (8) or more schools participate.) g. Events that require an application for sanctioning from the National Federation are: 1. Any interstate or international event involving two (2) o r more schools which is co-sponsored by or titled in the name of an organization outside the school community (e.g ., a college/university, a theme park, a service organization (Kiwanis, Optimist) or an athletic shoe/appa rel company) 2. Events in non-bordering states if five (5) or more states a re involved 3. Events in non-bordering states if more than eight (8) scho ols are involved 4. Any event involving two (2) or more schools that involves a te am from a foreign country. The host school should complete the international sanction application. This would include any event(s) that involves international traveling teams that play in multiple ga mes in multiple states. (The exceptions to this rule are Canada and Mexico which are considered "bordering states t o every U.S. state.") h. The GHSA Executive Director has the authority to approve co mpetition between GHSA schools and private schools from states in which membership in the State Association is n ot allowed. These non-member schools must meet or exceed the State Association standards in order to compete wi th GHSA schools. i. Member state championship teams receiving an invitation to nationally-recognized event held after the designated sports season has ended must apply to the Executive Director fo r approval. Such application must be signed by the principal of the school, must be submitted at least four teen 14 calendar days prior to the beginning of the event and must include the following: contact information for the event manager; proposed plans for the school to include manner and date of travel; number of hours of instructi on to be missed and fees to participate. A decision not to approve may be appealed to the GHSA Board of Trustees, who shall review the information submitted to the Executive Director. No additional information or document ation shall be considered. The vote of the majority of t he Trustees shall control. j. In all sports except Football, a team (subvarsity or varsi ty) may play multiple games on a single calendar day in a 29 tournament setting. NOTE: In these instances, the special “ quarter/half participation rules” in Basketball, Soccer and Lacrosse are waived. When playing multiple games in a single day in Basketball, Soccer and Lacrosse , there must be at least a four (4) hour scheduling interval between games. k. For any showcase event in which more than two schools compete (i.e., a baske tball showcase or some similar event), the following stipulations are in effect: 1. A “host school” must be designated for each game even if the games are played at neutral sites. 2. The host school must provide a Game Manager for each game. 3. The host school must schedule game officials through the local association assigned to it. 4. These special events will require sanctioning approval f rom the GHSA office. l. Participation limits may be set for each sport, and they are listed in the specific spor t sections in this document 2.65 Available Seating: Member schools shall provide a seat for each ticket sold to any contest regulated by the GHSA. a. An available seat is defined as twenty-four (24) inches in width. b. Each school is required to make a determination of the available seats prior to the beginning of the contest. c. At outdoor events, “standing room” tickets may be sold as l ong as they are identified as such at the time of the purchase, and as long as there are no problems with safet y and security with such an arrangement. 2.66 Weekday Contests: a. Teams playing any regular season contest when there are classes the next day shall be limited to a travel distance o f no more than 100 miles one way as determined using the maps program at www.Yahoo.com. b. No contest shall be played beyond 11:30 p.m., unless exe mpted under By-Law 2.93 (c2b) or by procedures found in sections of the by-laws dealing with specific sports. A petiti on may by filed with the Executive Director to waive the 11:30 p.m., curfew for teams of different classifications or competitions with out-of-state teams when there are special circumstances. 2.67 Practice Policy for Heat and Humidity: a. Schools must follow the statewide policy for conducting p ractices and voluntary conditioning workouts (this policy is year-round, including during the summer) in all sports d uring times of extremely high heat and/or humidity that will be signed by each head coach at the beginning of each season a nd distributed to all players and their parents or guardians. The policy shall follow modified guidelines o f the American College of Sports Medicine in regard to: 1. The scheduling of practices at various heat/humidity leve ls. 2. The ratio of workout time to time allotted for re st and hydration at various heat/humidity levels. 3. The heat/humidity levels that will result in practice being terminated. b. Football Only: Acclimatization and Re-Acclimatization (pr ior to October 1st) 1. Acclimatization a. Football practice may begin five consecutive weekdays prior to the start date for football. 1. In the first five days of practice for any student, the practice may not last longer than two (2) hours, and the student may wear no other protective football e quipment except helmet and mouthpieces. NOTE: a. The time for a session shall be measured from the tim e the players report to the practice or workout area until they leave that area. b. During acclimatization practices, teams may hold a walk-t hrough as long as there is at least a three-hour break between the two activities. 2. Re-Acclimatization – Required for any athlete who misse s five (5) consecutive days of practice/games for any reason. a. Day 1: 1.5 hours conditioning - helmets only b. Day 2: 2 hours practice - helmets only c. Day 3: 2.5 hours practice with helmets and shoulder pad s d. Day 4: 2.5 hours practice with full pads e. Day 5: 2.5 hours practice with full pads or play a gam e c. A scientifically-approved instrument that measures the Wet Bulb Globe Temperature must be utilized at each practice (prior to October 1) to ensure that the written policy is being followed properly. WBGT readings should be taken at a minimum of every 30 minutes, beginning 30 minutes prior to the start of practice. All WBGT monitors shall be calibrated, at a minimum, every two (2) years or earlier if recommended by the manufacturer. WBGT ACTIVITY GUIDELINES AND REST BREAK GUIDELINES Under 82.0 Normal Activities - Provide at least three separa te rest breaks each hour with a minimum duration of 3 minutes each during the workout. 82.0 - 86.9 Use discretion for intense or prolonged exerci se; watch at-risk players carefully. Provide at least three separate rest breaks each hour with a minimum dura tion of 4 minutes each. 30 87.0 - 89.9 Maximum practice time is 2 hours. For Footbal l: players are restricted to helmet, shoulder pads, and shorts during practice, and all protective equipment must be removed during conditioning activities. If the WBGT rises to this level during practice, players may continue to work out wearing football pants without changing to shorts. For All Sports: Provide at least four separate rest breaks each hour with a minimum duration of 4 minu tes each. 90.0 - 92.0 Maximum practice time is 1 hour. For Footbal l: no protective equipment may be worn during practice, and there may be no conditioning activities. For All Sports: There must be 20 minutes of rest breaks distributed throughout the hour of practi ce. Over 92.0 No outdoor workouts including walk throughs. If practice has not started, delay the start of practice until a cooler WBGT level is reached. d. Practices are defined as: the period of time that a p articipant engages in a coach-supervised, school approved spor t or conditioning-related activity. Practices are timed from the time the players report to the practice or workout a rea until players leave that area. If a practice is interrupt ed for a weather-related reason (lightning, etc), the “clock” on that practice will stop and will begin again when the practice resumes. e. Conditioning activities include such things as weight tr aining, wind-sprints, timed runs for distance, etc., and may be a part of the practice time or included in “voluntary wo rkouts.” Conditioning activities are not permitted to be used as punishment. f. A walk-through is a part of the practice time regulat ion, and may last no longer than one hour. This activity may not include conditioning activities or contact drills. No prote ctive equipment may be worn during a walk-through, and no full-speed drills, or running activities may be held. Not e: A maximum of two (2) practice sessions may be held in the same day. When multiple sessions are held, the maximum pra ctice time is extended to five (5) hours. Sessions must be seperated by a three (3) hour rest break in a cool en vironment and this rest break cannot included weightlifti ng or conditioning. When a double session practice day occurs, the following practice day must be a single session day. (Football contact guidelines must be followed). g. Rest breaks may not be combined with any other type of activity and players must be given unlimited access to hydration. These breaks must be held in a “cool zone” wher e players are out of direct sunlight. h. When the WBGT reading is over 86, ice towels and spray bottles filled with ice water should be available at th e "cool zone" to aid the cooling process AND cold immersion tubs must be available for the benefit of any player showing early signs of heat illness. In the event of a serious EHI, the principle of “Cool First, Transport Second” should be utilized and implemented by the first medical provider o nsite until cooling is completed (core temperature of 10 3 or less).

6. Athletic Director(s) 7. All athletic coaches, including Community Coaches who have successfully completed the GHSA Coaches Education Program and who are registered by a member schoo l as being utilized as a high school coach. 8. 2 Certified Trainers employed by the school system in gr ades 9-12 and recommended by the Principal. A copy of their Georgia Athletic Training license must be provid ed. Passes for additional Certified Athletic Trainers employed by the school system may be requested. d. GHSA staff members 4.42 Lifetime Passes are available to retired persons of the t eaching profession, and/or those retiring from the Geor gia Teaching Retirement System, who served at least twenty (20) years in GHSA member school(s), grades 9-12 as a: a. Superintendent or Assistant Superintendent AND/OR b. Principal or Assistant Principal AND/OR c. Athletic Director AND/OR d. Coach of a sport listed in the GHSA by-laws. e. A Board of Education member with at least thirty (30) years service. f. Retired Contest Officials with at least thirty (30) ye ars of active service in the GHSA. g. GHSA staff member with 20 years or more of service. 1. Application should include the individual’s permanent address and verification of years of service and must be signed off by retiring system’s Superintendent. 2. Application are available under Forms on the GHSA web site. 3. Years of service to the GHSA as a Region Secretary and/or Exe cutive Committee member shall count towards the requirements to qualify for a GHSA Lifetime Pass. NOTE: Individuals must have retired from coaching and teach ing before applying for a pass. Should a Lifetime Pass holder return to a member school in a capacity that is eligible for a school pass, the Lifetime Pass must be revoked and placed on a “hold” status and the eligible p arty must request a school pass. Once the pass holder has fully retired from that school position, they may requ est the hold be removed and the Lifetime Pass will continue. 4.43 GHSA passes are non-transferrable and may not be used by pe rsons other than the individual to whom it was issued. a. The individual's name shall appear on the pass. b. Picture Identification is required for the user of th e pass at all GHSA post season events. c. A pass that is used illegally is to be revoked and the ind ividual to whom the pass was issued forfeits the right to receive a pass in the future. d. The spouse of a coach, coaching in a State Playoff event sh all be admitted to that event upon presentation of th eir spouse's pass and proper identification. 4.44 In the event a pass is destroyed or lost, the school admini strator should notify the GHSA Office in writing, and shou ld 44 include the payment of $25.00 with a school check to have t he pass replaced. 4.45 When a school staff member who was issued a GHSA pass leaves t he position that entitles them to that pass, the pass should be revoked immediately. 4.46 At any GHSA regular-season event, the host school must honor the GHSA pass that admits “the bearer and one other person” as well as similar passes from the GISA or the GAPPS (formerly GICAA). For GHSA state playoff events, the host school shall honor only the GHSA pass, valid media cr edentials and the GHSA Officials Pass. 4.47 School resource officers and other law enforcement personn el in uniform are to be granted free admission to all GHSA events. 4.50 - CERTIFICATION OF ATHLETIC OFFICIALS 4.51 A plan for the certification of athletic officials shall be established by the GHSA office and published in the GHSA Contest Officials Handbook and Accountability Program which i ncludes: a. published procedures for registration of officials b. published guidelines for training officials c. a system for evaluating performances of officials d. a system of recognition of years of service by officials 4.52 The following items constitute the Athletic Officials Associa tions Approval Plan for the GHSA: a. The Executive Director of the GHSA shall determine the n umber of officials associations to be approved for each activity. The number of associations will be determined by: 1. The demand for officials in that activity in that geo graphic area of the state. 2. The number of associations already in existence in that activity in that area. 3. The extent to which member schools’ needs are being me t by existing associations in that activity. 4. The assignment of associations for most activities shall be the responsibility of the GHSA office. 5. Officials’ associations must maintain minimum membership levels in order to be considered “active associations” by the GHSA in certain sports. Those numbers shall be: Baseball (20), Softball (20), Football (30), and Basketball (30). 6. New officiating associations may be established when it can be demonstrated that the needs of member schools will be met by adding an association. b. The GHSA Executive Director may, at his discretion, approve additional associations utilizing the following criteria and procedure: 1. Such associations shall make application to the GHSA request ing approval. 2. The By-Laws of such an association shall be subject to the approval of the GHSA and must include provisions indicating that the association and its members will be su bject to the rules and authority of the GHSA. A current copy of the association by-laws/constitution must be submitted to the GHSA office. 3. An approved officials association must handle its finances through a central banking account, and should distribute IRS 1099 forms to all members. Every officiating association must have a Federal Tax Identification Number on file with the GHSA office. 4. An approved association shall require all its members to be registered with the GHSA, and to comply with all requirements of the “GHSA Policies and Procedures Manual.” 5. All approved associations must comply with all GHSA policies, procedures and reporting deadlines or be subject to fines assessed to the association by the GHSA office. 6. All chartered officiating associations must comply with th e E-Verify program by July 1 of each calendar year. 7. All GHSA contest officials are required to have a current “background check” on file. Background checks are valid for a five-year period. Each local association is requi red to keep records of the background checks. Associations assigning contest officials to GHSA sanctioned contests who have not completed this requirement are subject to a monetary fine and possible loss of charter . c. The GHSA expects every officials association to operate in a manner that does not discriminate on the basis of race, sex, color, disability, religion, national origin or age . d. Officials associations shall not charge member schools any a dministrative fees not authorized by the GHSA. e. All Invoices for officiating fees in all sports shall be paid within 14 days of receipt of the invoice. Failure t o do so will result in a 10% late fee being charged to the member school by the assigned local officiating association. Local associations may send invoices for game fees as agreed upon wi th the member school. NOTE: Member schools are prohibited from paying contest officials at the game site . f. Officials may register with only one (1) local associatio n per sport during a school year, and officials are not a llowed to officiate GHSA events until the registration process has b een completed with the GHSA office. g. In the event that a local association does not have a su fficient number of eligible officials to work on a specif ic day/night, officials may be requested from other GHSA-chart ered associations. It is the responsibility of the local association assignor in need of additional officials to ma ke the initial contact with the assignor of another associa tion 45 to work out details of the request h. All GHSA chartered associations and registered contest offi cials shall comply with the policies and standards referenced in the “GHSA Contest Officials Handbook and Accoun tability Program.” i. Officials shall not be assigned in any GHSA sport or activi ty if they have had any connection in the past 10 years (attended, worked in the system, have children or other r elatives in the system, etc.) with the schools they are officiating or judging. j. All GHSA contest officials shall adhere to the “Uniform Standards” as listed in the “GHSA Contest Officials Handbook and Accountability Program.” 4.53 Contest officials and officials’ associations are independe nt contractors and not employees of the GHSA or\ its member schools. 4.54 In the event that officials do not show for a scheduled event without notification or emergency situation, a fin e shall be assessed to the officials association for twice the amount of the game fees and that amount be divided between the competing schools. 4.55 All decisions of the GHSA Executive Director in regards to off icials shall be subject to the appellate procedures as set forth in the GHSA Constitution. 4.56 Universal contest fees shall be charged for all scheduled, regular-season interscholastic contests (including scrimmages). The universal fee schedule shall be as shown in the chart in Appendix F. Schools and officiating associations may not reduce or increase game fees from those listed in this section. Penalties may be imposed for those violating t his rule. 4.57 Current-year registered contest officials have the option to purchase a “GHSA Officials Pass” through their local association via the registration process with the GHSA office. If this option is selected, an additional $15.00 will be added to the annual GHSA registration fee. The “GHSA Officials Pa ss” will allow the legal bearer of the pass his/her admi ssion plus one (1) to all GHSA sanctioned events/activities. 4.60 - SPECIAL GHSA POLICIES 4.61 Gender Equity: The Georgia High School Association shall com ply with the requirements of subsections (a) through (f) of Code Section 20-2-314, as those requirements rela te to the association's functions of organizing, sanctioning , scheduling, or rule making for events in which public high schools participate. The Georgia High School Association shal l, no later than October 1, 2003, and every year thereafte r, submit a report to the General Assembly regarding its compliance with paragraph (1) of this subsection. Such report shall a ddress the number, type, and disposition of written requ ests for the association to organize and administer regional or st ate events for additional or different sports; written requests for information regarding the types of athletic events for p ublic high school students that the association organizes and administers; and written inquiries and complaints received by the association with respect to gender discrimination i n connection with public high school events. The report shall address all such written requests, inquiries, and complain ts, regardless of whether such request, inquiry, or complaint is made by letter, e-mail, memorandum, or any other fo rm of written communication. Each report shall cover the time pe riod beginning on July 1 of the previous year and ending on June 30 of the year in which the report is due. In addi tion, the association shall have in effect a policy requiri ng notification to persons who make such requests, inquiries, or complaints ve rbally that such request, inquiry, or complaint will not be included in the association's reporting to the General Asse mbly regarding compliance with this Code section unless such request, inquiry, or complaint is made in writing. 4.62 Open Meeting/Open Records: The Georgia High School Associa tion shall comply with the requirements of Article 4 of Chapter 18 of Title 50, relating to the inspection of public records, and Chapter 14 of Title 50, relating to open and public meetings, to the extent that such records and meetings rel ate to the association's activities with respect to public hi gh schools; provided, however, that such association shall not be required to comply with such statutes or to conduct open and public meetings or provide inspection of records where the sole subject of such meeting or record pertains to th e academic records or performance of an individual student o r the eligibility of an individual student to participa te or to continue to participate in sponsored events or contests based on academics; provided. However, where a meeting or record of such association is devoted in part to matters excep ted in the preceding proviso, any portion of the meetin g or record not subject to such exception shall be open to the p ublic. 4.63 Steroids/Performance Enhancing Drugs: The Georgia High Scho ol Association strongly opposes the use of anabolic steroids and other performance enhancing substances by high school student-athletes. The GHSA believes that such usage violates legal, ethical and competitive-equity standa rds and imposes unreasonable long-term health risks on the user. The GHSA encourages member schools to educate students a nd coaches about the perils of steroid usage, and the GHSA will distribute educational materials about this issue to member schools. 4.64 Penalties for Violations: In accordance with the GHSA Consti tution, the Executive Director is empowered to make a determination as to whether a violation of GHSA rules ha s occurred, and to assess the appropriate penalty which may include a fine and/or probation. A non-exhaustive list of violations and fines is published in Appendix P of the Con stitution 46 & By-Laws. 4.65 Indemnification: The GHSA shall, to the extent legally p ermissible, indemnify each person who may serve or who has served at any timeas an officer, committee member, employe e or volunteer of the GHSA against all expenses and liabilities, including, without limitation, counsel fee s, judgments, fines, excise taxes, penalties and settlement p ayments, reasonably incurred by or imposed upon such person in connect ion with any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding in which he or she may become involved by rea son of his or her service in such capacity; provided that no indemnification shall be provided for any such person with respect to any matter as to which he or she shall have bee n finally adjudicated in any proceeding not to have acted i n good faith in the reasonable belief that such action was in the best interests of the GHSA; and further provided that any compromise or settlement payment, other than those funde d by insurance, shall be approved by a majority vote of a quoru m of GHSA Executive Committee who are not at that time parties to the proceeding. The GHSA may maintain insurance , at its expense, to protect any such person against any such liability, cost or expense. 4.66 Executive Oversight Committee: A. There is hereby established an Executive Oversight Committ ee comprised of ten (10) members as follows: 1. One member to be appointed by the Governor; 2. One member to be appointed by the Lieutenant Gover nor; 3. One member to be appointed by Speaker of the House o f Representatives; 4. Two members to be appointed by the Georgia School Sup erintendents Association, with one such member representing approximately one-half of the Georgia Hig h School Association members with classifications based on lower student enrollment figures and the othe r such member representing approximately one-half of the members with classifications based on higher student en rollment figures; 5. One member to be appointed by the Georgia School Boa rds Association; 6. One member to be appointed by a state-wide associatio n of high school athletic coaches with a current membership of not less than 300 Georgia residents and wh ich is recognized by a majority of the Executive Oversight Committee; 7. One member to be appointed by a state-wide associatio n of high school athletic officials, referees, and umpire s with a current membership of not less than 300 Georgia residents and which is recognized by a majority of the Executive Oversight Committee; 8. Two members to be appointed by the governing body of the Georgia High School Association, with one such member representing approximately one-half of the memb er schools based on lower student enrollment figures and the other such member representing member schools base d on higher student enrollment figures; B. A quorum of the Executive Oversight Committee shall consist of six (6) members. C. The Executive Oversight Committee shall elect a chairperso n and vice chairperson from among its members. D. Members of the Executive Oversight Committee shall serve t erms of three (3) years (except for the initial terms set forth below) and are eligible to succeed themselves only o nce. In order to establish a rotation of terms to ensure that a majority of the members’ terms do not expire concurrent ly, the members of the Executive Oversight Committee set forth above in paragraph (A)(1),(2) and (3) shall serve an initial term of one (1) year; the members set forth in paragraph (A) (4), (5) and (6) shall serve an initial t erm of two (2) years; and the members set forth in para graph (A) (7) and (8) shall serve initial terms of three (3) years. Thereafter, members of the Executive Oversight Committee shall serve terms of three (3) years. In the event of a vaca ncy in any seat, the appointing officer or body shall be authorized to appoint a replacement member for the re mainder of the term. E. The authority and duties of the Executive Oversight Comm ittee shall include: 1. To meet in person or remotely not less than twice each school year; 2. To meet in person or remotely upon the call of the chairperson or a majority of the Executive Oversight Committee; 3. To establish policies and procedures for the Executive Over sight Committee; 4. To conduct any independent audit, review or investigat ion the Executive Oversight Committee deems necessary, including, but not limited to, the audit, revi ew, or investigation of the classifications of participatin g schools and travel-related issues of participating schools; 5. To conduct an annual evaluation of the Georgia High School Association as a whole and present a report of its findings, recommendations, and conclusions to the General Assembly’s High School Athletics Overview Committee. F. Travel and other expenses actually incurred by the Executive Oversight Committee, or any member thereof in the performance of his or her duties, shall be reimbursed by the Georgia High School Association. 47 BASEBALL GENERAL INFORMATION A. Baseball is a state championship event in each classificatio n, and schools are aligned on a regional basis. B. All games will be played by the rules published by the National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS). C. The maximum number of games allowed (not including state playoffs) is thirty (30). This limit of 30 games incl udes any region tournament games. Beginning and ending date s for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication. NOTE: “Arm Acclimation”. Student-athletes wishing to try out for the sport of baseball may participate in one week of “Arm Acclimation” beginning on the Monday prior to the 1 st day of practice. “Arm Acclimation” includes the use of a glove, catching gear and a baseball under the supervision of a coach. To ensure the safety of all participants, “Arm Acclimation” applies to all players including bullpens. D. A school shall not allow its baseball team to engage i n an interscholastic practice and/or scrimmage game, except f or one (1) interscholastic scrimmage consisting of a 7-inning g ame using a “free substitution” format and umpires registered with the GHSA. E. All varsity baseball games shall be played with officiall y-dressed officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials. 1. The assignment of officials for regular-season games, i nvitational tournaments, and any sub-region or region playoffs allowed in the 30-game limit will be made by the GHSA office. a. The GHSA will assign one or more associations to each schoo l for their games. b. The school and the local association(s) will sign a contr act for the games that are assigned. 2. In accordance with By-Law 2.71-c, the host school has the responsibility of providing security escorts for umpires at all regular-season and post-season games. F. The following items allowed in the NFHS rule book a s “State Adoptions” have been adopted by the GHSA: 1. A game will end anytime that a team is 10 or more r uns behind and has completed five or more turns at bat. A game will end anytime that a team is 15 or more runs b ehind and has completed three or more turns at bat. 2. The suspended game rule will be used: a. When a game is stopped before it becomes a legal gam e (4.5 or 5 innings), it is considered “no contest” and any replay will begin from the first inning. b. When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can be determined, it is a completed game. c. When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can not be determined, any replay will begin from the point of interruption. d. In any terminated game, accumulated pitches will count . 3. The use of the “courtesy runner” is the only “speed-up rule” that has been adopted. Being a courtesy runner does not count as a game played. 4. Sub-varsity teams have the option of using free substitut ion and a batting order of ten (10) players if agreed upon by both coaches before the game. Lineup cards must be presented to the umpire at the plate meeting and the batting order shall remain the same throughou t the game. G. The following interpretations have been approved by the GHSA. 1. Termination of the game due to weather, unplayabl e conditions, or mechanical malfunctions: a. The umpires may halt play for up to two hours when co nditions do not allow play to continue. 1. The two-hour interruption(s) is cumulative 2. The game must be terminated when the two-hour tim e has elapsed. If the first game of a doubleheader is terminated, the second game will be po stponed. 3. The two-hour period does not include time needed t o prepare the field for the resumption of play. b. Umpires must wait for at least thirty (30) minutes be fore terminating a game for unplayable field conditions. 2. Pitching restrictions: a. Regular Season Maximum Pitches in One Day : Varsity 110; sub-varsity 90. b. Regular Season Required Rest Periods: Varsity Sub-Varsity 1-40 Pitches 0 Days 1-30 Pitches 0 Days 41-60 Pitches 1 Day 31-44 Pitches 1 Day 61-85 Pitches 2 Days 45-64 Pitches 2 Days 47 86-110 Pitches 3 Days 65-90 Pitches 3 Days NOTE: During the Regular Season, a pitcher shall not thr ow more than 110 pitches (90 for sub-varsity) cumulative over a two-day period and cannot pitch more th an two consecutive days. The rest period is based on the total pitches thrown during a given two-da y period. Pitches thrown during a game that was suspended or rained out shall be counted towards any pitch ing restriction thresholds. c. State Tournament - During the State Tournament, no pitcher shall be al lowed to throw more than 120 pitches over a three-game series . The “Required Rest Period” chart does not apply. d. A pitcher at any level (varsity or sub-varsity) shall be all owed to finish the batter when the maximum pitch count limit is reached during an at-bat, but must be re placed immediately when that at-bat ends. e. A “Day of Rest” is defined as a calendar day. Example: a varsity level pitcher who reaches the 110-pitch limit on a Tuesday would not be allowed to pitch again until Saturday. f. Tabulation of Pitch Counts - It will be the responsib ility of each team to track their own pitch counts throughout the game. And at the conclusion of the game, the head coaches shall meet to approve and agree upon the respective pitch counts for each team. It w ill then be the responsibility of the home team head coach to enter the agreed-upon numbers into the “ PitchKount” electronic tabulation program, immediately after each game. g. In games versus non-GHSA member schools, the GHSA pitching r estrictions shall be adhered to, regardless of the pitch count policy of the host school affi liation or state association. When playing non- GHSA or out of state, it is the GHSA member school’s responsib ility to report the pitch count information in PitchKount. h. If a school is found to have violated any of the provisi ons of this policy, the offending school shall be fined $250.00 and the head coach at that level assessed a two-ga me suspension, and the game forfeited. Any subsequent violation during the same season will result in penalties being doubled and the head coach being required to meet with the Executive Director prior to being reinstated to coach. H. he use of WBGT for ALL Contests is mandated as follows: 1. WBGT must be measured 15 minutes prior to start of con test, coaches and umpires must be notified. 2. If WBGT is equal or above 86.0 F, an ice immersion tu b must be present and ready for use. 3. If WBGT is equal or above 88.0 F, Umpires will take a 3-minute hydration break at the beginning and mid-po int of inning 3 and continuing until the conclusion of the game. I. Contracts are required for all regular-season and pl ayoff contests. Contracted games can not be canceled for any reason other than weather/playing conditions without th e approval of the GHSA office. NOTE: When rescheduling, region games take priority. J. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/m eet results during the season on MaxPreps and be responsible for updates as needed. This information will support statewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged t o maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. STATE PLAYOFFS: A. The top 32 teams advance to the state playoffs based upon the results of the PSR formula. B. Each region champion will be guaranteed a top-16 seed a nd will host a first round playoff series. C. All rounds of the state playoff involve a best two-of-t hree series. 1. The higher seeded team will host all three games. 2. A doubleheader is required on the first day of each r ound of the playoff series. 3. The host team will be the home team in the first g ame, and the visiting team will be the home team in t he second game. The host team will be the home team for a third gam e. 4. The responsibilities of the host team are to: a. furnish game balls beyond those furnished by the GHSA b. notify the GHSA office as to the arrangements for the series c. in the spirit of sportsmanship provide the visiting team, whenever possible, with the opportunity to take pregame batting practice and provide a schedule for pre- game warmups 5. In the event that two schools involved can not agree on the arrangements for the series (dates, times, etc.), th e GHSA Executive Director will make a ruling to cover the situat ion. 6. In the event that a State Playoff game is suspended pri or to becoming a legal game, or if it is suspended afte r becoming a legal game without a winner being able to be determined, it shall resume from the point of interruption on the next available date. If that date can not be agreed upon by the competing schools, the GHSA Executive Director shall determine the playing date. If a State Playoff games is suspended at a point where a winner can be determined, it shall be considere d an official game. D. The play windows for the State Tournament are listed in the Beginning and Ending Dates published at the beg inning of the Constitution. In all cases, the first date of the play window will be a doubleheader, followed by the “if” game on the second date. 48 E. The finances for the state playoffs are as follows: 1. Admission fees must be charged for all post-season games - ticket prices are published on the GHSA website . 2. Total gate receipts include all ticket sales and radio/ television payments (see fees in Broadcast section 2.80). a. The fee for a radio broadcast is paid to the host scho ol prior to the game and is added into the gate receipts. b. Television contracts are negotiated by the GHSA Executive Di rector. c. Money from concessions and program sales are not part of the gate receipts. 3. The process of dealing with finances is handled as foll ows: a. Twelve percent (12%) of the gross receipts will be pai d to the GHSA. b. The umpires will be paid out of gross receipts.NOTE: I f the gross receipts are not sufficient to pay the umpires, the host school will pay that cost. c. The remaining balance is to be divided with 50% of t he proceeds going to the visiting team and 50% to the host team. 1. The visiting team shall be paid $.80 per mile (one way) for travel. 2. The host team is responsible for paying local service char ges, stadium charges, operating expenses, personnel costs, etc., out of their 50% share. 3. Admission fee for State Championship Series at a neutra l site will be posted on the GHSA web site. 4. At neutral-site games, each participating team is allo wed free admission for a maximum of 25 players and team essential personnel. Coaches will be admitted with a GHSA coaching pass. 49 BASKETBALL GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Basketball is a state championship event in each classificati on for boys and girls, and schools are aligned on a regional basis. Beginning and ending dates for practice a nd competition can be found at the front of this publi cation. B. All basketball games will be played by the rules publish ed by the National Federation of State High School Associations. C. The number of basketball games allowed (not includin g regional, sectional and state tournaments) is twenty-fi ve (25) regular season games either in head-to-head competition or in invitational tournaments that have been approved by the GHSA. The minimum number of games required to be eligible for the post season is twenty-two (22) games that count toward a team's PSR. Please refer to the PSR Appendix f or additional details. NOTE: All basketball schedules and contracts are to be completed by June 1 each year. D. The following policies exist for basketball games: 1. Warm-up time between games shall be no less than fif teen (15) minutes. The game clock operator shall start the clock between games when the last player from the pre vious game leaves the court. 2. Sub-varsity games shall be played using seven (7) minute q uarters. Playing time may be reduced on a night that precedes a school day. 3. Region and State Tournament games do not have a star ting time restriction, but shall be completed no later than 11:30 p.m., on a night that precedes a school day. E. In accordance with National Federation rule options, when there is a competitive imbalance between teams, th e second half of a game may be reduced to six (6) minute qu arters, while using normal timing/scoring rules when: 1. The point differential at halftime is thirty (30) points or greater, and the coach of the trailing team wishes to have the quarters reduced. 2. The point differential at the beginning of the f ourth (4th) quarter is thirty (30) points or greater, the reduction will be invoked automatically. F. All varsity basketball games shall be played with official ly-dressed basketball officials who are registered under th e GHSA plan for the registration of officials. 1. The assignment of officials associations for regular-seaso n games, invitational tournaments, and sub-region and region tournaments will be made by the GHSA office. a. The GHSA will assign one or more associations to each schoo l for their games. b. The school and the local association(s) will sign a contr act for the games that are assigned. 2. The host school must provide an adult (21 years old or older) to maintain the official scorebook, electronic scoreboard, and 35-second clock at all varsity games. 3. The host school must provide a safe and secure changing a rea near the playing court for contest officials, free from traffic by school staff, students and spectators one hou r prior to game time, during the duration of the contest(s) and until the contest officials depart the facil ity. 4. In accordance with By-Law 2.71-c, the host school has the responsibility for providing security escorts for officials at all regular season games and tournaments. 5. The host school for a “special event” contest shall contact the GHSA office for the officiating assignments. 6. All varsity level games shall be officiated by a 3-person crew. Sub-varsity games may be officiated by a 2- person crew. 7. 35-SECOND CLOCK – The 35-second clock is to be used in all “Varsity Level” games. a. The individual designated as the “Shot Clock Operator” shall be approved through the GHSA 35-Second Shot Clock Operator certification. b. Schools not in compliance with the 35-second shot clock req uirements will be assessed a technical foul to start each game. G. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/ meet results during the season on MaxPreps and be responsible for updates as needed. This information will support statewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged t o maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. H. Spectators from participating schools shall not be allow ed to sit or stand in the first row of seating at court level on either sideline or endline, and a minimum of one (1) school administrator must be in close proximity to the stud ent section. I. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION: 1. Cheerleaders at basketball games shall be restricted fr om the area at the end of the court during the time a game is in progress unless they are more than eight (8) f eet from the boundary line of the court. a. This includes when cheerleaders are in an “L” shape wi th part on the sideline and part on the endline. b. The host school or tournament director is responsible f or enforcing this rule. 2. The throwing of souvenirs (such as small basketballs, t-shi rts, etc.) into the stands is prohibited until after the final basketball game of the day. 3. During Semifinals and Finals, schools are limited to a maximum of 20 uniformed cheerleaders at court side. 50 a. Cheerleaders shall not occupy spectator seating and shall be in designated courtside areas. b. Mascots shall be members of the student body. 4. No artificial noisemakers (including megaphones) shall be allowed in the gym during basketball games. 5. Bands shall play only during intervals between periods o r during timeouts; the home school is responsible for enforcing this rule. 6. The practice of cutting or removing nets, or hanging on the rim or backboard is prohibited at all GHSA games. 7. For the pregame and second half warmup period and during the time of team introductions, teams can not ru n around or through the opposing team’s half of the cour t and the midcourt circle area is off limits to both tea ms. The penalty for violation of this rule will be a techni cal foul if the officials have taken jurisdiction of the g ame. 8. All spectators must wear shirts during the games. 9. The host school should provide dressing areas for visiting teams in close proximity to the playing floor. Game managers, in conjunction with game officials, may extend h alftime intermission to 15 minutes if the dressing area is not in close proximity to the playing floor. 10. Coaching boxes must be marked on the floor in both bench areas with one line that is 28 feet from the end line of the court. 11. An “X” must be marked on the floor in front of the spot where the scorekeeper sits in order to facilitate th e substitution process. 12. Players are prohibited from warming up on the cour t at halftime intermission of the preceding game. 13. In accordance with NFHS rules, the official scorer is r equired to wear a black-and-white, vertically-striped shir t. 14. There shall be a minimum warm-up time of 15 min utes between multiple games. REGION TOURNAMENTS: A. Each region will decide its method for determining t he teams that will advance to the State Tournament. 1. Four teams from each region will advance to the First Round of the State Tournament in all classifications (boys and girls), even when the region is sub-divided. 2. No region may use a double-elimination tournament. 3. The tournament committee or tournament director sha ll secure the services of competent scorekeeper(s) and clock operator(s). NOTE: No team shall have the privilege o f placing its scorekeeper and/or timekeeper at or near the position of the official scorekeeper and clock ope rator. B. Officials associations for sub-region and region tourna ments will be assigned by the host school’s local association. Issues for covering the tournament will be handled by the tournament director and the assigning officer of the selected officials association. C. Region post-season games (sub-region games and full re gion games) must have a minimum of two games at each site. STATE TOURNAMENT A. In the First Round through the Quarterfinal Round , the higher-seeded teams will host (if equal seeds meet , a “universal” coin flip will determine the host school). In each of the first three rounds, there are two dates of competition. 1. The girls teams will play on the first night of the designated round, while the boys teams will play on the second night of the round. 2. In the event that the same school hosts both the boys an d girls games, the host school may petition to schedule a doubleheader with the following stipulation s: a. If a doubleheader is scheduled, it shall be played on the second playing date of that round. If more than two (2) schools are involved, they must all agree on the p lay date or the schools will play on the gender- designated dates and there will not be a doubleheader . b. If the day of the doubleheader is requested to be c hanged, all participating schools must agree to play the doubleheader on the requested date. 3. Officials will be assigned by the GHSA office. Officials m ay not work back-to-back games in the post-season except in emergency situations. 4. The host team will provide an adult (21 years or old er) timer and scorer. 5. All other GHSA by-laws pertaining to the State Tournam ent apply to these games except where specified. 6. SEATING: a. All seats are to be general admission, and tickets will be full-price for each day of the tournament. b. The host school shall provide 50% of the available seat ing to spectators from the visiting school(s). c. The minimum seating requirements are: 6A & 5A - 1,200; 4A - 1,000; 3A & 2A - 700; A - 500 (with bleachers on both sides). 7. FINANCES: a. Ticket prices will be published on the GHSA website . b. Only GHSA passes and valid press credentials, with a picture ID, will be honored for admission. c. In the First Round through the Quarterfinal Round: 1. The host school will be allowed to deduct expenses up t o $500.00 for a single game or $700.00 for a doubleheader. 51 2. The host school will deduct officials fees of $570.00 f or a single game or $1140.00 for a doubleheader. 3. Visiting team(s) will be paid $.80 per mile (one wa y). 4. For a single game or a doubleheader involving two sch ools, the net proceeds are split equally between the two schools and the GHSA. 5. For a doubleheader involving three schools, the net p roceeds will be divided as follows: 20 per cent to the GHSA; 20 percent to each visiting team and 40 perce nt to the host school. d. In the Semifinals and Finals, from net receipts (afte r all expenses have been paid), the GHSA will receive 40%, and 60% is divided among the participating schools. 8. Semifinal Round games will be played at centralized si tes (to be determined). 9. The Final Round games will be played at a centralize d site(s), to be determined, and will be known as the “ Dr. Ralph Swearngin Basketball Championships.” Dates for the se mifinals and finals may be found in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the front of this p ublication. B. Until eliminated from the tournament of its respect ive classification, each team will be entitled to free ad mission at their site on the date of their game only: 1. A maximum of twenty (20) players and team essential per sonnel. 2. A maximum of twenty (20) cheerleaders in uniform. 3. Coaches will be admitted with a GHSA coaching pass. 4. The school will be charged by the GHSA office for addit ional personnel entering at the team gate. 5. Floor passes will be given to the basketball coaches liste d on the official roster and a maximum of six auxiliary personnel (managers, statisticians, and trainers). 6. Team Instructions for State Tournament games will be available on the GHSA web site. C. In the First Round through the Quarterfinal Round , the host team is designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. In the Semifinal and Final Rounds, the te am listed at the bottom of the bracket is designated as t he home team, and will wear white jerseys, regardless of th e seeding in prior rounds. D. Upon arriving at the tournament site, the head coach or a designee shall: 1. submit a complete lineup to the official scorer. 2. verify with the opposing coach the color of jerseys being worn. E. Tournament sites will not be available to participat ing teams prior to the tournament. EXCEPTION: When the t eam of the host school is in the tournament. 1. Teams playing in the first game of the day shall have access to the court no earlier than thirty (30) minutes before game time. 2. There will be a minimum of fifteen (15) minutes b etween tournament games. F. Each team is responsible for providing its own basketball s for warm-ups, towels, training supplies, and half-time refreshments, unless notified differently by the GHSA office . The GHSA will provide game balls at the Semifinal and Final Rounds. G. Each school is responsible for the behavior of its coaches, players, and spectators at tournament games. Therefore, the behavior of these groups must be monitored by school a dministrators, especially (but not exclusively) in the following areas: 1. No artificial noise makers, banners or signs, radios or similar music-producing devices are allowed. 2. Throwing objects on the floor will not be tolerate d. 3. Cutting nets, hanging on rims, climbing on backboards is prohibited. 4. Security personnel may ask that spectators refrain from sta nding the entire game if it blocks the view of other spectators who choose not to stand. 5. Displays of unsportsmanlike conduct directed toward the o pposing team or the officials will not be tolerated. 6. Spectators are not allowed on the court at any time p rior to, during or following the game. Players are not allowed to go into the spectators’ area following the game. 7. Pep bands with a maximum of 15 members and one (1) a dult school personnel member may be allowed. If the home team allows its pep band to attend, it shall also allow the visiting school’s pep band to attend. H. Each school in the tournament is allowed to have one vi deo camera filming only its games under the following conditions: 1. The video personnel of the school must film from an a rea designated by the Tournament Director. 2. The video of the tournament game(s) may not be shown at the school or in the community for admission, nor on cable television (see regulations in Broadcast section 2.8 0) without authorization from the GHSA. I. Tournament Officials 1. Officials for State Tournament play will be selected u sing the following criteria: a. District partnership rankings. b. Evaluation reports from regular season games. c. Nominations from members of the Evaluation Committee. d. Evaluations from previous State Tournament games. 2. There will be three (3) officials on the court in a ll State Tournament games. 3. Official scorekeepers for the Championship Finals will be selected by the GHSA office from a list compiled from recommendations by Region Secretaries. 52 53 BASS FISHING GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Bass Fishing is a state championship co-ed event open to a ll GHSA schools in all classifications. B. Notification of entry in Bass Fishing must be filed wit h the GHSA office by March 1 for the next school year. C. The Bass Fishing State Championship will be held in th e Spring of each year. The first of four regional quali fier will begin in January of each year. D. The GHSA is partnering with MLF/TBF to oversee and man age the Regional Qualifiers and State Championship Fishing Tournament. E. Sites for Competition- the GHSA/MLF/TBF shall make the determination of the region competition sites. Schools interested in hosting may submit a request. F. There is no limit to the number of students each schoo l can have on their team roster. G. Each school may enter up to six boats in each regional com petition. Schools can enter boats into multiple GHSA regional competitions. H. The top 15 boats from each regional advance to the st ate championship. One additional boat will advance from each regional for every 10 boats that compete over a minimum of 100 boats in the regional. Boats will advance to the state championship from the first event in which they qualified . If a boat has already qualified for the state champio nship, the next eligible boat will advance. I. There is no limit of State Championship qualifiers f rom a member school. J. Each boat may have up to four student contestants, only tw o of which may be in the boat at any one time, assigned from the team’s roster. K. No student may be assigned to more than one boat. ELIGIBILITY TO ENTER COMPETITION PLAY AND SUBSTITUTIONS: A. All participating students must be submitted for eligi bility through the GHSA office. Each school shall enter all GHSA eligible students on the electronic roster. This roster ma y be revised throughout the regular season and shall serve all roster purposes in these rules. B. All member schools participating must abide by the GHSA p olicy requiring the HEAD COACH to be a certified employee. All Volunteers and Boat Captains are not requir ed to be certified employees. C. For more rules, policies, and registration informati on, please go to ghsa.net/bass-fishing. 54 CHEERLEADING GENERAL INFORMATION - SUPPORT/SPIRIT AND COMPETITIVE: A. Schools may have only one (1) varsity competitive team. Schoo ls may choose to have any number of support/spirit squad(s) that do(es) not compete. B. All cheerleaders (competitive and non-competitive) must be eligible according to academic standards and the transfer rule and must be declared eligible by the GHSA o ffice on the proper eligibility forms. Non-students are not allowed to be part of a sideline cheerleading group e ither as mascot or “junior cheerleader.” C. All cheerleaders (competitive and non-competitive) must have a physical examination on file in the school office before they may try out, practice, or perform. D. All cheer coaches (competitive and non-competitive) must co mplete a GHSA Rules Clinic or the school will be fined. E. At basketball games, support/spirit squads may perform stu nts and/or tumbling that are allowed by NFHS Spirit rul es without mats. NOTE: National Federation rules dealing with safety are to be followed in any cheerleading pract ice or performance. F. No “stomping” of any kind is allowed in the stands or seating area of the gymnasium. Stomping is restricted to t he floor of the gymnasium. G. Taunting of any kind will not be tolerated. Aggressive cheers should not be performed under any circumstances. H. Cheerleading apparel is restricted as follows: 1. Male uniform for competition cheerleading will be uniform pants and a top which counterparts those worn by the female teammates. Sideline male cheerleaders may include shorts in place of the pants. Tank tops will not be permitted. 2. Female cheerleaders (sideline & competition) must wear a uniform (skirt or dress) that fully covers the athlete’s entire torso. The skirt or dress should cover the briefs, bl oomers or any spandex material. Bows should be in school colors. 3. All athletes on the same team must wear the same unif orm when performing at a game or competition. Hair must be secured and must NOT extend below the waist. I. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION: 1. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on can be found at the front of this publication. 2. Cheerleading teams are allowed to attend camps afte r the last day of school until July 27th. 3. Spirit Cheerleading season ends after the last day of basketball season at each respective school. Other activities for cheerleaders after this date can be allowed with a waiver from the GHSA office. 4. Out-of-season practices may be held in preparation for tryouts only. Once tryouts are complete, no practices may be held until school is out. Practices for tryouts are li mited to a maximum of ten (10) consecutive school days per school between February 1 and the last day student s are in school. (NOTE: All a school’s different level teams must use the same 10-day period.) 5. Eligibility for try-outs: a. Students must be enrolled at a school in order to try out for that school's cheerleading team. A student may be enrolled in only one school at a time. EXCEPTION: See By-Law #1.45 (g) b. Enrolled migrant students may try out for a cheerleadi ng team, but may not represent the school at the varsity level during the school year until the migratory sit -out period has ended. c. Students must meet academic eligibility requirements in order to try out. COMPETITION RULES: A. Cheerleading is a state championship sport in each classi fication for All-Girl teams. 1. Schools are aligned on a regional basis for classes 2A thr ough 7A. 2. Class A will compete at a sectional to determine the t op 8 to advance to finals. 3. Private schools in 2A-4A will compete at a sectional to de termine the top 8 to advance to finals. 4. An open division (all classifications) will be held for coed competition. 5. All schools are allowed to have only one varsity competiti on team. 6. The term “all-girl” refers to all-female teams thr oughout this section. B. All cheerleading competitions must be conducted according to the rules of the “National Federation Spirit Rule s Book” and the “GHSA Competitive Cheerleading Manual.” Th e GHSA cheerleading manuals are posted on the GHSA web site. The NFHS Spirit Rules Book may be purchased fro m the GHSA office. Video review will be allowed at the state championship only. 1. An Ipad will be located at the top of the judge's t able. 2. Two judges will manage the video-tap to start and e nd. 3. Review will take place if a judge sees what he/she thinks may be a deduction in the case of (but, not limited to): 1. Illegal hand placement on a stunt 55 2. Illegal stunt execution 3. Tumbling questions 4. Timing review 5. Illegal basket execution 6. Out of bounds seen by 1 or more judges 7. Verification on legality calls on stunts and/or tumb ling 4. The video will not be used: 1. To make a call after the competition is over. 2. For DoD questions in stunts or tumbling 3. For coaches to view before the competition is over. C. The maximum number of competitions for a varsity cheerl eading team is six (6), plus region/sectional and state competitions. In order to be eligible to compete in Re gion/Sectional/State, a team must compete in at least thr ee (3) sanctioned competitions during the competitive regular sea son in the division they declare (All-girl or Coed). 1. All competitions must be sanctioned by the GHSA by June 1. 2. GHSA sanctioned Cheerleading competitions may include me mber schools only or schools from other states who are members of their state association. This excludes no n-member high schools and all middle schools. 3. Cheerleading exhibitions are not allowed at any GHSA sanctioned invitational tournament. 4. Cheerleading coaches, certified teachers and Community Coaches may not be involved in any way during the school year with a competition not sanctioned by GHSA that i nvolves cheerleaders on their school's team. 5. Only coaches who meet the criteria of By-Law 2.50 are e ligible to assist teams in the competitive setting. Any others assisting a team in any manner at a GHSA competition will be guilty of illegal coaching. 6. Groups that are not members of the GHSA may NOT perfo rm at any time before, during, or after the competition without approval from the GHSA office. 7. Officials will be paid for a minimum of twelve (12) high school teams. (See Appendix F for fee schedule). D. Deadlines for the competitive season are as follows: 1. Request Sanction of Regular Season Invitational Tourna ment - June 1 2. Declaration of All-Girl and Coed - October 1 3. Register to enter Regular Season Invitational Tourna ments - August 1 4. Cancellation of tournaments that do not make - August 10 5. Confirmation of tournaments submitted with list of teams competing - August 20 6. Submit rosters electronically on app.ghsa.net - October 1 E. A competitive cheerleading team is comprised of a maximu m of sixteen (16) performers. 1. A team mascot (if used) is included as one of the 16 pe rformers. 2. A school may have a roster greater than 16 performers, and may use any combination of eligible cheerleaders in any competition in each specific division. 3. All team members must be dressed in the appropriate a dopted school uniform that displays the school identification (i.e., letter, monogram, mascot symbol, e tc.) NOTE: The mascot is exempt from this uniform rule. F. The competitive area is a 42’x42’ blue cheerleading m at, and the routine must be performed within the bou ndaries of the competitive area. Mats must have a minimum thickness of 1 3/8 inches. 1. A full set of cheerleading mats (42’x42’) must be used in all competitions including invitationals, regional, a nd state competitions. (Directions for proper placement of m ats can be found in the GHSA Cheerleading Manual). 2. Only approved GHSA coaches, competitors and officials are a llowed in the competitive area. 3. Only team members may act as spotters. 4. Non-competitors (i.e., alternates, coaches) may not assist during the routine. 5. All mats should be placed on the floor horizontally fa cing the judges. Center of the mat should be marked wit h tape. The floor will be considered out-of-bounds. 6. It is recommended, but not mandatory, that cheerlead ers practice stunting on one or more 6'x42' cheerleading mats prior to performing stunts in a team routine. 7. Middle school and high school events must be considered se parate events. Middle schools may not be placed in rotation with high school teams. The arena should be cleared between the two events and reopened for the sale of tickets prior to the beginning of the high school competition. G. The competitive routine must include both cheer and d ance. 1. Tumbling skills are permitted only within the body of the routine. 2. Tumbling skills may not be performed as a part of the entrance to or exit from the competitive area. 3. Poms are the only props allowed in a competitive routi ne. H. The length of the routine shall be a maximum of tw o minutes and thirty seconds (2:30), timed by an official timer. 1. The routine must begin within thirty (30) seconds of the head judge's signal. Failure to do so shall result i n a five-point deduction for delay of the meet. 2. Teams may begin from any position inbounds, and the t ime of the routine will begin with the first word, m usical sound, or movement of any team member. 3. The routine ends on the last word, musical sound, or movement of any team member. 4. If the routine ends with a pyramid, the final dismo unt is not timed. 56 5. There is no minimum/maximum time limit for music in the routine. 6. If the routine is longer than the allotted time, a deduction of five (5) points for every fifteen (15) seco nd period or portion thereof will be assessed. I. Each school is responsible for the preparation and prese ntation of the music in its routine, and for complying w ith all copyright laws (NOTE: music must be submitted in the ClicknCl ear portal.) 1. The principal must review the music to be used in the school's routine, and must stipulate that the music is in good taste for high school students and acceptable for the morals of their community. 2. Each school must furnish a high-quality version of their music. 3. The coach or team representative is responsible for star ting and stopping the music during the competition. 4. Schools are responsible for furnishing their own equip ment and music for use in the practice/warm-up area. J. Winners in the competitions will be determined by the highest point total from the judges. The rules for br eaking ties are explained in detail in the Competitive Cheerleadi ng Guide. Ties will be broken by culminating the scores of jumps, tumbling, stunts and pyramids and subtracting the d eductions. K. Prior to any disqualification for a rules violation, t he Head Judge must call a conference at the conclusion of competition, and the majority of the judges must agree the violation occurred. Video review may be used for this purpose. L. Judges' decisions are final. M. In all competitions, all judges must be registered wi th the GHSA and must have completed the GHSA training program. 1. A minimum of five judges and two safety judges will be used at all competitions, plus scorers and timer. 2. Judges must be secured by the GHSA office. N. Five percent (5%) of the gross receipts from all invita tional competitions shall be paid to the GHSA office. REGION/SECTIONAL COMPETITION: A. Each school is allowed to enter one team in the regio n competition for the all-girl division. There are no region competitions in Class A, nor in the coed division. 1. Entry notification and roster must be sent to the Regi on Secretary (or GHSA Office for Class A and Coed) according to deadline dates. 2. All rosters must be submitted to the GHSA office electron ically. NOTE: Substitutions may be made at any time after the roster has been submitted until the last regu lar season competition. 3. The principal must approve the music being used. B. Teams will advance to the state competition as follows: 1. All teams (2A through 7A) will attend Sectionals in comb ination with the region competition. The top sixteen (16) teams will advance to the finals. 2. Depending on the number of private schools in Classes 2 A-4A, a private school division may be added. 3. Class A teams will compete at sectionals which will deter mine the top 8 teams to advance to finals. C. A panel of judges to be used at invitationals, region , sectional, and state competitions will consist of seven (7) judges to make up three (3) panels. More than one set of judg es may be used if necessary. D. Twelve percent (12%) of the gross receipts from the re gion/sectional competition must be paid to the GHSA office . E. Region/Sectional competitions will be held on Saturda y, November 7, 2026. The region secretaries involved with each region shall determine the procedures for finances, awards, number of judges, etc. The school who will determine trophies and competition order for Class A wil l be determined by the GHSA office. The sites can be found on the GHSA web site. COED COMPETITION: A. There will be a separate Open Meet competition (al l classifications) for Coed teams. 1. Having one or more males constitutes a coed team. 2. Once a team has declared the Coed division of competit ion, they will not be able to switch to another division without approval from the GHSA. 3. Coed teams and All-girl teams may not compete against one another in the regular season. 4. The Coed Sectionals will be held on Saturday, November 7, 2026, at High School. The top sixteen (16) teams will advance to the State Championship. 5. The Coed State Championship will be held on Saturda y, November 11, 2026, at the Macon Centreplex. NOTE: The GHSA office has the authority to make adjustments in th e Coed format depending on the number of teams who have declared Coed. STATE COMPETITION: A. The Cheerleading State Championships will take place November 13-14, 2026, at the Macon Centreplex. There w ill be two sessions per day and the arena will be cleared and cleaned between sessions. If attending, please make sure your ticket is for the correct session. The exact schedules for t he two days will be published on the Cheerleading page of the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net) prior to the b eginning of the event. B. Flash photography of any kind (cameras, cell phones, iPad s, etc.) will not be allowed during the competition. 57 C. Video review will be allowed during competition. D. Finances: Net receipts will be divided with the GHSA re ceiving 40% and 60% divided among the participating schools. Each participating team will be allowed free adm ission for a maximum of 20 cheerleaders, two coaches and one music person. GAME DAY COMPETITION RULES A. Game day cheerleading is a coed state championship sport with championships in classifications A-7A. Schools are allowed to have one (1) varsity team in this competition. The State Championship will be held on December 10-11 , 2026 at the Macon Centreplex. Exact information will be published on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net) prior to the event. B. The Game Day competition team can be comprised of any combination current sideline and competition cheerleaders at that school, or any eligible student atte nding that school. C. The maximum number of Game Day competitions is three (3) in addition to the State Game day competition in February. 1. All Game day competitions must be sanctioned by the GHSA b y July 1. 2. Judges will be contracted through Varsity and the GHSA Boo king agent for Game Day, Kelly Fields. 3. Cheerleading coaches, certified teachers and Community Coaches may not be involved in any way during the school year with a competition not sanctioned by the GHSA. D. A team should have a minimum of seven (7) and a maximu m of 24 participants. E. Traditional game day uniform is required. F. The use of signs, poms, flags, and megaphones are allo wed and encouraged for performances. The use of additional props is not permitted. G. Music 1. Schools must use recorded marching band music for the fig ht song and Band Chant categories. 2. All use of music must by compliant with U.S. Copyright La ws. 3. Neither The GHSA nor Varsity Spirit is responsible for ob taining any necessary permission or licensing of the recorded music used by a school team during the course of th e GHSA Game Day Invitational. 4. Fight Song /Band Music a. If a high school marching band records their school’s or iginal fight song, they will need to get the school’s permission to use the song and recording. b. If a team legally acquires a recording of a band pla ying a popular recording from an authorized provider (iTunes, Amazon, etc.), the song can be used as long as no e dits are made to the music (other than for timing purposes). c. A team cannot use a recording of their band playing a popular song (a cover) or other music without the proper permissions or the band becoming a preferred pro vider. H. Schools will be judged in the following categories: 1. Band chant 2. Situational response 3. Crowd Leading 4. Fight Song 58 CROSS COUNTRY GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Cross Country is a team championship sport for boys and g irls for all classes, A-6A and Private (2A-4A) . B. The distance for both boys and girls Cross Country will be approximately three (3) miles or five (5) kilometers. C. All GHSA Cross Country meets will be run in accordance wit h the rules as published in the National Federation Tr ack and Field and Cross Country Rule Book with any exceptions as may be found in this section. D. The maximum number of competition dates in Cross Coun try shall be 10, exclusive of sectional and state competitions. 1. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed com petitions. 2. Any meets involving eight (8) or more schools must be app roved by the GHSA Executive Director in accordance with the process found in By-Law 2.64. 3. No individual athlete may compete in more than one (1) race per day. E. All competitors shall have legal uniforms in compliance with GHSA and NFHS uniform rules. F. The use of WBGT for ALL Cross Country contests is mandated as follows: 1. WBGT must be measured 15 minutes prior to start of con test and coaches notified. 2. If WBGT is equal or above 86.0 F, an ice immersion tu b must be present and ready for use at finish line. 3. If WBGT is equal or above 88.0 F, A minimum of two ( 2) hydration stations must be placed throughout the racecourse as well as at the finish line. G. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on can be found at the front of this publication. 1. There will be no interscholastic practices in Cross Count ry. 2. Athletes may run in non-GHSA events as long as they do not represent their school, do not wear the school uniform, and are not coached at the event, or transport ed to the event, by their high school coach (“unattached runner”). 3. Communication through electronic devices is not allowed during competition. 4. The State Championship course is off limits beginning August 1 of each year until all state championships are concluded (unless a GHSA sanctioned/scheduled meet is held during the regular season on the course and a school participates in the event). SECTIONAL COMPETITION: A. The initial team roster of fourteen (14) runners m ust be submitted on MileSplit GA. 1. Changes to the roster may be made until the deadlin e established for Sectionals. 2. No replacements may be made in the list submitted to the Sectional Meet Director. 3. Five (5), six (6) or seven (7) of the fourteen (14) a thletes may compete as a team in the Sectional Meet to qualify for the State Meet. 4. Individuals may compete at the Sectional Meet to quali fy for the State Meet. B. All Sectional Meets will be held on Saturday, October 31 . 1. Twelve (12) teams in each Sectional Meet will advance t o the State Meet. 2. The first twenty (20) individual finishers from each Se ctional in all classes will qualify for the State Meet regardless of whether they are a member of a qualifying team. 3. Sectional qualifiers must be finalized by electronic subm ission on MileSplit GA immediately following the completion of the Sectional Meet. STATE MEET: A. The State Cross Country Meet for all classifications will be held at Carrollton High School on the dates indicat ed on the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the front of t his publication. The running order may be found on the Cross Country page of the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). 1. There will be an admission fee posted on the GHSA web site for all spectators. 2. Awards will be presented at the conclusion of each classif ication. B. A minimum of five (5) and a maximum of fourteen (14 ) runners will be allowed free admission for each team that qualified. Individual qualifiers also will be admitted free. Coaches will be admitted on their GHSA coaching pa sses. 1. The first five (5) finishers for each team will count for the total team score. 2. Each team must begin and end the competition with a minimum of five (5) runners. If, for any reason, a qualifying team does not have five (5) runners, that tea m will not be allowed to compete in the State Meet. 3. Each member of a qualifying team, as well as individu al qualifiers from each Sectional, is considered to be in contention for individual honors. 4. Practice times and Team Instructions for the State Meet will be announced on the Cross Country page of the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net) approximately one month prio r to the State Meet. 59 60 DANCE GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Dance is a co-ed state championship sport with as many di visions as deemed necessary by the number of teams competing. B. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on may be found at the beginning of this publication. C. All dancers must be turned in on the proper eligibil ity forms and ruled eligible by the GHSA office. D. All dancers must have a physical examination on file in t he school office before they may try out, practice, or perf orm. E. All dance coaches must complete a GHSA Rules Clinic or the school will be fined. F. Tryouts may be held in the spring any time after the state competition is completed and before the end of school.Tryouts may be held again after school begins in the fall. Tryout can be held for 10 consecutive days. 1. Students must be enrolled at a school in order to try out for that school’s dance team. A student may been enrolled in only one school at a time. 2. Enrolled migrant students may try out for a dance team , but may not represent the school at the varsity level during the school year until the migratory sit-out perio d has ended. 3. Students must meet academic eligibility requirements in order to try out. G. Dance teams are allowed to attend camps after the la st day of school until July 27th. COMPETITION RULES: A. All Dance competitions must be conducted according to the rules of the National Federation Spirit Rules book and the GHSA Dance Competitive Dance Manual. The Dance manual is posted online on the GHSA web page (www.ghsa.net). The NFHS rules book can be purchased from the GHSA office, online at Amazon.com, or from the NFHS site. B. Schools are allowed to have only one (1) varsity competit ion team. C. All teams must consist of at least 7 dancers, but not mor e than 20 dancers. If the number of competitors falls be low the number required to compete in that division, the t eam will be allowed to compete in the division they have entered with a five-point penalty per dancer below the minimum. D. A school may have a roster greater than 20 performers, and may use any combination of eligible dancers in any competition in each specific division. A team’s second routine must be comprised of at least half +1 participants of the original performers. E. All team members must be dressed in appropriate unifo rms/costumes approved by their school. All NFHS rules for apparel must be applied. No hard jewelry is permitted. Hair must be secured and must NOT extend below the wais t unsecured. F. Dance apparel is restricted as follows: 1. When standing at attention, apparel must cover the m idriff. 2. Fabric must cover the skin from the bra line to the kne es (tights, body liners, pants, etc.). 3. Dancers must wear footwear that is appropriate for t he activity. (see NFHS rulings) G. The maximum number of competitions for a varsity dance team is six (6), plus the state competition. To qualify fo r state, a team’s selected routine must be scored in at least three (3) GHSA sanctioned competitions before state. 1. All competitions must be sanctioned by the GHSA by October 1. 2. GHSA sanctioned Dance competitions may include member schoo ls only or schools from other states who are members of their state association. This excludes non-member high schools and all middle schools. 3. Dance coaches, certified teachers and Community coaches may not be involved in any way during the school year with a competition not sanctioned by the GHSA that in volves dancers on their school’s team. 4. Only coaches who meet the criteria of By-Law 2.50 are e ligible to assist teams in the competitive setting. Any others assisting a team in any manner at a GHSA competition will be guilty of illegal coaching. 5. Groups that are not members of the GHSA may NOT perfo rm at any time before, during, or after the competition without approval from the GHSA office. 6. Invitational competitions should have a minimum of 12 high school routines participating in the event. Officia ls will be paid for a minimum of 12 high school teams. (Se e Appendix F for fee schedule) 7. Middle school and high school events must be considered se parate events. Middle schools may not be placed in rotation with high school teams. GHSA judges may be hir ed as officials for middle schools or solo, duets, or trio events; however, it is not mandatory. H. Deadlines for the competitive season are as follows: 1. Request Sanction of Regular Season Invitational Tourna ment Oct. 1 2. Register to enter regular season invitational tourna ments Oct. 15 3. Submit rosters for “Notification of Entry” online Feb. 1 I. The competitive area is the basketball court inside the basketball boundary lines. 1. Only approved GHSA coaches, competitors, and officials are allowed in the competitive area. 2. Non-competitors may not assist during the routine. 61 J. The length of the routine shall be a minimum of on e minute, 40 seconds and not exceed two (2) minutes. 1. The routine must begin within 30 seconds of the cue, “Welcome to the floor, _______ High School.” Failure t o do so could result in a five-point deduction for delay of meet. 2. Teams may begin from any position in bounds, and the time of the routine will begin with the first note o f the music. NOTE: Inbounds is determined as the area inside the end lines and side lines of a basketball court. 3. The routine ends with the last note of the music or choreographed movement. 4. If the routine is longer or shorter than the allot ted time, five (5) points for every 15 seconds will be ded ucted. K. Each school is responsible for the preparation and prese ntation of the music in its routine, and for complying w ith all copyright laws. (NOTE: music must be submitted and approved in the ClicknClear portal.). 1. Music should be free of any explicit language or violen t implications can result in a disqualification. 2. Each coach is responsible for providing a high quality ver sion of their own music for the DJ. 3. Principals have the responsibility of approving the music chosen for performances. Notation is provided on the dance rosters page for each school (found in MIS site) 4. Delays in music could cause a meet delay deduction of five (5) points. L. A state champion in each style of dance will be determi ned. 1. The following styles of dance will structure the catego ries: HipHop; High Kick; Jazz/Lyrical and Pom. 2. An overall winner for each classification will be named for each style. Classifications, depending on size of school, will be determined based on number of teams who have entered in each classification and/or genre. 3. Prior to any disqualification or noticeable deduction for a rules violation, the Head Judge must call a confere nce at the conclusion of competition, and the majority of th e judges must agree the violation occurred. M. Judges’ decisions are final. N. In all competitions, all judges must be registered wi th the GHSA and must have completed the GHSA training program. 1. A minimum of 4 judges, including 1 tech judge will b e used at all competitions. 2. Judges must be secured by the GHSA office. 3. 5% of the gross receipts from all invitational competi tions shall be paid the GHSA office. STATE COMPETITION: A. The State Championship will be held at a site to be determined. In each session, teams will rotate by division s. A total of five (5) judges will be used per division. B. No flash photography of any kind will be allowed dur ing the competition. C. Video replay will be used to review deductions if necessa ry. D. Finances: Net receipts will be divided with the GHSA re ceiving 40% and 60% divided among the participating schools. Each participating team will be allowed free adm ission for a maximum of 24 dancers, 2 coaches and 1 music person. 62 ESPORTS GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Esports is a state championship co-ed event open to all G HSA schools in all classifications. B. There will be a fall season and a spring season each ye ar, with specific dates published on the GHSA web site. C. GHSA will select games for GHSA championships each season, an d each game’s championship will be determined by a single-elimination tournament. D. Each school may have multiple teams, and players may parti cipate in multiple games. Esports Coaches must complete an annual Rules Clinic. E. Eligibility reports are required for all participant s. 1. Participants must be academically eligible as specified in by-law 1.50 and cannot be a migrant student as defined in by-law 1.60. 2. Eligibility reports must be received in the GHSA office a t least 20 calendar days prior to the first contest. F. Pre-participation physicals will not be required for G HSA Esports . G. All matches and game rules will be governed by PlayVS. In addition to PlayVS rules, schools must follow GHSA by- laws, which will take precedence over PlayVS procedures. All Espor ts participants are reminded they must follow GHSA by-law section 1.90 concerning Amateur Status/Awards. H. PlayVS will specify equipment needed for competition in each game. In general, coaches should have access to the communication platform utilized by PlayVS. I. Sportsmanship of coaches and players will be monitored b y PlayVS and the GHSA. J. Rosters will be managed during registration for the games with PlayVS. K. All practices and matches must be conducted in the physical presence of a certified coach. Students may not play GHSA Esports from home. Coaches will be required to check in for each match using the PlayVS platform. L. Forfeitures without timely communication beforehand may be grounds for fines and/or other penalties. M. The State Coordinator for Esports is Kent Morrow (kent.morrow@ghsa.net ). 63 FLAG FOOTBALL GENERAL INFORMATION A. Girls’ Flag Football is a state championship event org anized on an Area basis in five (5) divisions with eight (8 ) areas in each division, playing during the late Fall each year. Schools must indicate their desire to play Flag Football on the “Intent to Participate” by March 1 each year. NOTE: Classifi cation and georgraphic location are factors used to create playing area and division placement. B. The maximum number of games allowed (not including the State Tournament) shall be 20 at the varsity level an d 14 at the sub-varsity level. 1. Host schools shall schedule a minimum of two (2) games e ach playing date. 2. Teams shall not play more than (2) games each playing date. 3. Varsity level teams are allowed to play (1) scrimmage/ja mboree play date after the first official practice date, and prior to the first regular season game of either p articipating school. 4. Beginning and ending dates are listed on the GHSA Cal endar and in the front of this publication. 5. Try-outs may be held on five (5) days anytime after May 1 and prior to the final day of school attendance with the following restrictions: a. The five (5) days are not required to be consecutive an d schools may use a non-school facility. b. Limited to current enrolled students maintaining at hletics eligibility for the subsequent school year (grades 9-11), and current year 8th graders (rising 9th graders) . c. The 5th and final day of the tryout period may be use d as an official jamboree event with a minimum of three (3) schools participating. C. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/ meet results during the season on MaxPreps and be responsible for updates as needed. This information will support statewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged t o maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. D. PLAYING RULES – Official Girls Flag Football playing rules may be fou nd on the GHSA web site. E. HEADGEAR - All players are required to wear soft-shell protective headgear or headbands during GHSA-sanctioned flag football competition. Any such equipment must meet t he following minimum standards: 1. Safety Performance Standard - All headgear must: a. Be independently tested and verified by a recognized th ird-party laboratory; and b. Achieve a 5-Star Safety Rating as determined by the Virgi nia Tech Helmet Lab. 2. Product Liability Insurance Requirement - All manufactu rers of approved headgear must: a. Carry a minimum of $5,000,000 USD in active product l iability insurance coverage; and b. Provide proof of such coverage upon request to GHSA. 3. Commercial Availability & Accessibility - Approved headgear m ust: a. Be readily available for purchase at scale; and b. Be distributed through multiple recognized retail or team sales channels to ensure equitable access for all member schools. 4. Non-Proprietary Language a. No specific brand name, trademark, or proprietary pro duct shall be referenced or mandated within GHSA rules. b. All approved equipment shall be referred to generica lly as "soft-shell headgear" or "protective headband." 5. Coverage & Fit - All headgear must: a. Provide full circumferential coverage of the head, incl uding the forehead, temples, and occipital region; and b. Be properly fitted and secured according to manufacture r specifications. F. STATE TOURNAMENT 1. The (32) teams advancing to the State Tournament will be determined by the PSR System . 2. In the first and second rounds, the higher seed in ea ch of the four-team quadrants will host two games to be played on the same date. 3. In the quarterfinal and semifinal rounds, the higher seed will host a single game . In the event of equal seeds matching up, a universal coin toss will determine the host school in each quadrant. 4. The championship finals for each division will be playe d at a neutral site to be determined by the GHSA Executive Director. 65 FOOTBALL REGULAR SEASON: A. Football is a state championship sport in each classificat ion, and schools are aligned on a Region basis. 1. In the reclassification year (see Article III of the GHSA Constitution), all regions will meet after reclassificati on has been finalized by the Executive Committee and after an y sub-divisions have been finalized and cross-over games have been arranged. a. No schedule is valid until the plans of all regions ha ve been approved. b. Plans for determining the Region Champion for the pla yoffs must be drawn by the respective regions before the football season begins. c. All contracts should be drawn to coincide with the two-ye ar reclassification period and show the day, date, time, opponent and game site. 2. Each school must file its football schedule with the GHSA Executive Director no later than March 1, each year. a. The schedule must show the day, date, time, opponent, and game site. b. The GHSA Executive Director must be notified concerning an y changes made to the schedule after the submission date. c. Any changes made for a region game must be made prior to the date for beginning football practice. 1. Any change of opponent after that date will cause the game not to count as a sub-region or region game. 2. Limitations regarding schedule changes shall also be con strued to prevent a school from canceling a game when such a game could affect the region and/or sub-region standings. 3. A change in date or time with the same opponent is n ot considered a change affecting region or sub-region status. d. Contracts with officials for varsity games must be signed by June 1 each year, and copies of the schedules must be submitted to the proper official's associat ion(s). e. Each school must have a signed contract for its football scr immage, and a school may be fined for failure to comply with that contract. f. There may be a $250 penalty for schools that change th eir football schedules after June 1. (NOTE: Appeal procedures are available.) B. All schools are REQUIRED to enter all game results into the GHSA MIS site immedia tely following their respective contest. This is imperative as it will impact all classifications in the Post Season Ranking System. Schools are to enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game results during the season on MaxPreps as well and be responsible for updates as needed. This information will support sta tewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged to maintain t eam/individual statistics on MaxPreps. C. All GHSA football games must be played according to the rules as published by the National Federation of State High School Associations, and any other rules found in this se ction. D. The number of football games allowed (excluding stat e playoffs) is ten (10). 1. No varsity football game may be played on a night pre ceding a school day without specific authorization from the GHSA Executive Director. 2. Only one football game may be played per week (the sch edule week is a traditional week - Sunday through Saturday) by the same level team (varsity/sub-varsity) except in the case of make-up games due to special circumstances that have been approved by the Executive Director. 3. Football players playing on both the varsity and one su b-varsity team are limited to six quarters of competition in any seven (7) calendar day period beginning with the date of the varsity game. The penalty for violation of this rule will be forfeiture of the game in which the violation occurred and a $1,000.00 fine. 4. The football season ends for a team or individual wh en that team, having completed its regular-season schedule, is eliminated from playoff competition or wins the State Championship. 5. All JV games will be played with 10-minute quarters. I f there is an 8th grade student(s) on the JV team, then 8- minute quarters must be played. 6. Schools may play 10 Mini Games at the JV level, instead of seven (7) regular games, the combination of which cannot exceed the current 28 quarters allowed for sub-varsi ty play. Each Mini Game will be one-half of a regular game. Four (4) schools would meet at one site, with two schools playing a half and then the other two schools playing a half. Officials would be paid the regul ar fee for a single game. 7. Any football contest MUST have an on-site WBGT monitor a nd take measurements 15 minutes prior to the start of the contest and again during halftime. The followi ng requirements for hydration breaks must be followed: a. Kick-off WBGT equal or above 87.0 F – referees will ta ke a mandatory hydration break at or near the 6- minute mark of each quarter lasting three (3) minutes ( change of possession or touchdown and PAT). All participants must remove their helmets and no coaches are p ermitted on the field at this time. It is recommended that players who are actively engaged in the competition and come to the sideline remove their helmets and hydrate until such time that they re-e nter the field of play. 65 b. Kick-off WBGT equal or above 90.0 F – referees will ta ke a mandatory hydration break at or near the 4- minute and 8-minute mark of each quarter lasting 3 min utes (change of possession or PAT). All participants must remove their helmets and no coaches are p ermitted on the field at this time. It is recommended that players who are actively engaged in the competition and come to the sideline remove their helmets and hydrate until such time that they re-e nter the field of play. 8. Regulation of 7-on-7 Contests Clarification of Term inology: 7-on-7 play between 2 or more teams where the re are NOT any officials present will be viewed as a “PRACTICE” and therefore will fall under the GHSA Interscholastic Contests and Practices (Section 2.60) and the Pr actice Policy for Heat and Humidity (Section 2.67) along with the following guidelines: a. Teams that participate in back-to-back play periods lasti ng a maximum of 60 minutes, must be followed by a 30-minute break in a shaded area before resuming a ctivity. b. It is recommended that medical personnel (athletic tr ainer or EMT) be present during said practice session. c. 7-on-7 play between 2 or more teams in the presence o f officials will constitute a “CONTEST” and therefore will follow guidelines listed below: 1. WBGT Temperature will be taken and recorded prior t o the start of all contests. 2. The host school will notify the Head Official and bot h Head Coaches of the WBGT reading prior to the start of the contest. 3. Hydration breaks will be implemented when the WBGT i s equal or above 90.0 F. Referees will take a mandatory three-minute hydration break at the 10-min ute mark of each contest. 4. Ice immersion tub on-site and ready for use when WBGT is equal or above 86.0 F. 5. Medical Time-out taken prior to start of contest to d iscuss procedures for possible heat exhaustion or heat stroke treatment. 6. Teams that participate in back-to-back play periods lasti ng a maximum of 60 minutes, must be followed by a 30-minute break in a shaded area before resuming activity. 7. It is recommended that medical personnel (athletic tr ainer or EMT) be present on each field during all contests. E. Football practice may begin five consecutive weekdays prior to July 27th (NOTE: Schools are reminded of the special Heat and Humidity Acclimatization restrictions listed in By-Law 2.67-b pertaining to football). 1. In the first five days of practice for any student, the practice may not last longer than two (2) hours, and the student may wear no other protective football equipment except helmet and mouthpieces. NOTE: a. The time for a session shall be measured from the tim e the players report to the practice or workout area until they leave that area. b. During acclimatization practices, teams may hold a walk-t hrough as long as there is at least a two-hour break between the two activities. 2. Beginning July 27th, any student may practice in full pads and may practice a ma ximum of two (2) times in a single calendar day under the following stipulations: a. A student must have participated in five conditioning p ractices wearing no other protective football equipment except helmet and mouthpieces before being al lowed to practice in full pads. b. In a single calendar day: 1. No single session may last longer than three (3) hours. 2. If two (2) practices are held, the TOTAL time shall n ot exceed five (5) hours. 3. There must be at least a three-hour time of rest be tween sessions if two (2) sessions are held. 4. There may not be consecutive days of two-a-day practice sessi ons. All double-session days must be followed by a single-session day or a day off. 5. A walk-through may not be held on days when two practi ces are conducted. c. These procedures are derived from recommendations create d by the Inter-Association Task Force for Preseason Secondary School Athletics Participants in the paper “Pr eseason Heat-Acclimatization Guidelines for Secondary School Athletes.” 3. Full contact should be limited during practices as wel l as during activity outside of the traditional fall pra ctice. (Note: No limitation is placed on activities defined bel ow as “AIR, BAGS or CONTROL” contact. a. For purposes of this by-law, the following definitio ns shall apply: AIR - Players run a drill unopposed without contact; BAGS - Players run a drill against a bag or another soft-contact surface; CONTROL - Players run a drill at assigned speed until the moment of contact and one player is pre-determined the “winner” by the coach. Contact remains above the waist and players stay on their feet; THUD - Players run a drill at competitive speed through the moment of contact with no pre-determined “winner.” Contact remains above the waist; players stay on their feet and a quick whistle ends the drill; LIVE ACTION - Players run a drill in game-like conditions and is the onl y time that players are taken to the ground; FULL CONTACT - Contact which meets the definition of Live Actio n or Thud. b. Pre-Season & Spring Practice & Summer Contact Camps: 1. Full contact shall be allowed in no more than 2 cons ecutive practice days per week. 2. Full contact during practice shall be limited to not more than 45 minutes per day. 3. Full contact during practice shall be limited to not more than 135 minutes per week; and 4. During any twice-daily practice, only one session per day shall include full contact. 66 5. In Summer Contact Camps, the only form of Full Conta ct allowed is Thud. 6. Schools will be limited to attending no more than t wo (2) padded Team Contact Camps per summer: one in June for two days during a three consecutive day period, and one in July for two days during a three consecutive day period (no more than f our (4) days total). There must be at least four (4) participating schools or the camp cannot be held. c. Regular & Post Season Practice: 1. Full contact during practice shall be allowed in no m ore than three (3) practice days per week. 2. Full contact during practice shall not be allowed on more than two (2) consecutive days. 3. Full contact during practice shall be limited to not more than 30 minutes per day. 4. Full contact during practice shall be limited to not more than 90 minutes per week. d. Written Practice Plans: A written practice plan in compli ance with this by-law shall be prepared in advance by the head coach prior to every practice and maintained b y the school for a period of at least twelve (12) months. Such practice plans shall be made available to the GHSA upon request. e. Violations: The penalty to be imposed upon any member school found to have violated this by-law in any substantial manner shall be as follows: 1. First Offense: A fine of not less than $500 nor more than $2,500 per violation at the discretion of the Executive Director. 2. Second Offense: The school shall be placed on probation and shall not be eligible to participate in post season play. 4. From the end of school in the spring until the first day of preseason practice, players may wear no other protective football equipment except helmets and mouthpi eces for all voluntary workouts and passing league games. Institutional heat policies are also in effect for voluntary workouts supervised by school personnel. 5. All applications for team summer camps at GHSA schools or o ther facilities must be submitted to the GHSA office by May 1, and all subsequent correspondence to comple te the application must be completed by May 15. Coaches for these players must verify that the participants h ave had acclimatization practices for five days immediately preceding the camp. 6. Equipment in summer (contact) camps is limited to helme ts and mouthpieces, shoulder pads, and compression style shorts (girdles) that have thigh pads and/or girdle pads. NO FOOTBALL PANTS OR KNEE PADS CAN BE WORN AT ANY TIME DURING SUMMER. F. All varsity football games shall be played with a minim um of five (5) officially dressed field officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for registering officials. The offici ating crew also shall have an electric clock operator whose only duty is to operate the game clock. 1. In all games, the host school must provide some type of dressing facilities for officials at or near the game site that can also be used to hold the pre-game conference. 2. During the regular season, the host school is responsibl e for providing a crew to work the sideline chains. These individuals must be responsible adults. 3. In accordance with By-Law 2.71-c, the host school is respon sible for providing security escorts for the officials at all regular season and playoff games. G. The following regulations are in place for GHSA foot ball games. 1. All GHSA football games will have a twenty (20) minute halftime unless both school administrators agree in writing by Thursday of game week to shorten the halftime period to fifteen (15) minutes, or unless NFHS weather-condition rules supersede. 2. Artificial noisemakers, except airhorns and whistles, are legal at football games unless the host school has a policy excluding other artificial noisemakers that may hinde r on-field communication. The Illegal noisemakers are to be confiscated when visible and/or used. 3. Bands / artificial noisemakers that hinder communication s are not to play during live-ball situations. NOTE: This includes the situation in which there is no timeout, and the teams are in a huddle. a. If, during a football game, a team claims interfer ence with communications due to band noise and or artificial noisemakers, the Referee shall give a warning to one or both head coaches and the bands / noisemakers must cease playing. b. If there is a second offense by the same school's band / artificial noisemakers, a delay of game penalty will be administered. c. The third offense results in an unsportsmanlike conduct p enalty imposed against that school's team. 4. During the state playoff series, a crew of seven (7) fi eld officials will be used. 5. Fans shall not be allowed to enter the playing fiel d either before the game or at halftime to form a t unnel for players to run through. 6. In the regular season, a school may utilize a visible 25 /40-second clock as long as the time is visible on both ends of the field and the clock is operated by a paid gam e official. 7. Football stadiums may never be completely dark during t he use of any flashing stadium lights. The ability to see from one endline to the opposite endline must be main tained at all times before, during and after the gam e, until the officials have left the competition area. H. Spring Football Practice for each school year may be held from February 1 until the end of the school year, consisting of 10 practices spaced over 13 consecutive school days. ( Note: Spring and fall scrimmage games and jamborees are considered to be extensions of practice as far as eligibility rules are concerned.) 67 1. Schools must choose by February 1 each year as to whether t hey will have spring football practice. a. If a school conducts spring practice, all preseason practice schedules remain the same (See item D. 3(b) for a listing of contact limitations). b. If a school chooses not to conduct spring practice, the te am will be allowed to hold an additional (second) scrimmage game or controlled scrimmage against another scho ol, or a jamboree with three teams playing a half against the other two teams, in the fall. c. Schools hiring a new coach may appeal to the Executive Dire ctor to change an earlier decision. 2. Schools that have scrimmage game/games canceled or suspende d by inclement weather will have the following options: a. Play on another night during the same calendar week ( defined as Sunday to Saturday.) Sunday play is not allowed. b. Play during another week when the school does not have another scrimmage or regular season game scheduled. (Note: No scrimmage game may be played after a school’s first varsity contest.) 3. Schools which participate in Spring Practice are allowed to play a spring game/scrimmage with another school, or a jamboree with three teams playing a half against the other two teams, in place of their last (10th) pra ctice of the spring (Note: Restrictions under by-law 2.62 (f-2 ) & (f-3) will apply). Schools may use an OTA format in lieu of a scrimmage/jamboree if they so choose. This forma t may utilize up to 4 schools but must have the same time restraints as a traditional scrimmage/jamboree. 4. A football coach on the payroll of one school district, but under contract to another school district for the following year, may help with spring football at the n ew school, if the arrangement is satisfactory with both systems. 5. Students enrolled in grade 8 in a middle school or j unior high school that is a feeder school to the high scho ol may participate in Spring Practice at that high school. 6. No student (eighth grade or above) may participate i n more than ten (10) days of Spring Practice and may participate for no more than one (1) school. I. In case of a game being terminated in the first hal f (suspended game), By-Law 2.93-c must be followed. NOTE: All varsity football games must be played to completion. Any int errupted game must be replayed from the point of interruption. The school that is behind in the score may choose not to continue the game and the score will be recorded as it was at the point of interruption. NOTE: Teams will not be allowed to play two football games i n the same week, except when making up a suspended game with the permission of the Executive Director. J. During warmups before the game and at halftime the re shall be a division of the field, and neither team shall enter the other team's portion of the field. That division shall be as follows: 1. Before the game: each team shall occupy the space from t heir own 45-yard line to the endline of their goal l ine. Neither team shall occupy the area between the 45-yard l ines. EXCEPTION: When kicking, each team shall have the area between the opponent's 45-yard line and kicking team's end zone in the side zone area on the same side of the field as their bench. Kickers shall kick towar d their end zone. 2. Re-entering the field before the game and at hal ftime: each team shall have the portion of the field b etween their bench and the near edge of each goal post - i.e. , field divided lengthwise. K. Overtime is mandated for all games between schools due to the implementation of the Post Season Ranking System. 1. See procedures below: 2. Overtime games are exempt from the 11:30 p.m. GHSA cur few. L. When there is a competitive imbalance between teams, the coach of a team trailing by 30 points or more at ha lftime may choose to play the second half with a running clock. Qua rters will remain at 12 minutes. 1. If the coach does not exercise the option of the runni ng clock, the third quarter will be played with regulat ion timing. 2. If the point differential reaches, or remains, 30 o r more points during the third quarter, the clock will still run according to rule for the remainder of the third quar ter, but the fourth quarter will have a running clock mandated. 3. A running clock means the clock will be stopped only: a. after a touchdown and until the ball is kicked off. b. during deliberations for penalty administration. c. during charged timeouts or official’s timeouts 4. A game that is reduced in time by use of a running clo ck shall constitute a “completed” game to meet other by- law considerations. GHSA OVERTIME PROCEDURE 1. There will be a 3-minute intermission between the end of regulation play and the coin toss to start the ove rtime procedure. 2. The captains will meet for the coin toss, and the win ner may choose one of the following: a. Be on offense first b. Be on defense first c. Choose the end of the field on which to play 68 3. The ball is placed on the 15-yard line and the offe nse keeps the ball until: a. The ball is turned over on downs (NOTE: The team on offense can gain a first down.) b. The defense gains possession of the ball (ball is dead immediately) c. The offense scores a touchdown or field goal d. The offense misses a field goal 4. After the first offensive team completes its possession, th e opposing team gets its opportunity from the 15-yard li ne. 5. If the game remains tied after each team has had an offensive possession, there will be a 2-minute intermissio n and the team that lost the first coin toss has the first optio n for the second possession. 6. For each additional overtime period (i.e., an offe nsive possession by each team) the original coin toss options a re alternated. 7. Beginning with the second overtime period, a team mu st attempt a 2-point try after a touchdown. 8. Subsequent to the first two series from the 15-yard li ne, if the game remains tied, the ball will be placed on the three- yard line and teams will alternate two-point conversions until the tie is broken. 9. Each team is allowed one timeout per overtime period . Timeouts may NOT be carried over from regulation play. REGION PROCEDURES: A. To qualify for championship consideration in a region or sub-region, a school must play a minimum number of g ames with schools in its region as determined by the region an d the GHSA Reclassification Committee. 1. In any region or sub-region in which there are six (6 ) or less schools, if each school plays two (2) games, both games will count as region games. In any other case where two (2) schools have played more than once during the regular season, only the first game scheduled shall cou nt in the region standings. 2. Any school playing a non-region or non-sub-region schedu le (i.e., not in consideration for a region championship) will not have its games count for or against any opponent. B. The GHSA Executive Director, upon presentation of evidence to show that a school cannot secure the required number of games in a region or sub-region, may authori ze each school to substitute any number of games in any classification or region to qualify for championship conside ration. NOTE: A request for substitution of game(s) must be submitted prior to September 1. C. In All Classes, Regions will determine their respective Reg ion Champion who will automatically qualify for the po st season and host a first round playoff game. 1. Each region will formulate a tie-breaker procedure to d etermine the Region Champion. 2. In case there is a tie between teams and the region does not have a different written tie-breaker plan, th e following procedures will be used (NOTE: The use of mini -games to break ties is no longer allowed): a. If two teams tie, and one of the teams has defeated the other in a regular schedule region game, the winner shall have the higher placement. Three or more tied teams shall first be considered in sets of two- way ties. NOTE: If three or more teams are tied, use hea d-to-head record among the tied teams to break ties for seeding. Only utilize points to break ties among teams when the ties are a perfect triangle, with each team having the same record among the tied teams. b. If two teams tie and the tied teams split or have no t played each other in a region game (no round robin) , the team with the greater sum of winning margin using the following Point System, shall have the higher placement. c. If more than two teams remain tied after applying “ a” above, the following Point System shall be used to eliminate all but two teams. Tabulate the sum of the winning margins of each team’s region games as indicated in the following: POINT SYSTEM: 1. If the margin of victory is more than 13 points, only 13 points shall count. 2. Losses shall be tallied as 0 (zero) points. 3. Forfeited games: Offended teams shall receive 13 poin ts when tabulating the sum of the winning margins for breaking region ties. d. After tabulating the sum of the winning margins, al l teams except the two (2) with the greater sums shall be eliminated, and the selection process shall begin agai n with paragraph “a” above. e. If teams remain tied after the above procedures are applied, the playoff representatives shall be determined by a coin toss. The coin toss, supervised by the REG ION OFFICERS, shall be used to eliminate all but two (2) teams, and then the process sh all begin again with paragraph “a” above. f. In the event the region is eligible for more than one playoff representative, each subsequent playoff representative shall be chosen by reapplying the procedure above. g. All regions will use the adopted procedures for breaki ng ties that occur in the order of standings when round robin schedules are completed. D. In All Classes the remaining Playoff Qualifiers (non-Regio n Champions) will be determined by the GHSA Post Season Ranking Formula (PSRF). Refer to Appendix "PSR". STATE PLAYOFFS: 69 A. All rounds of games after the end of the regular sea son are considered part of the state playoff structure. 1. In ALL Rounds except the Finals, the higher-seeded team a ccording to PSR will host. (Note: In the first round, all Region Champions will host a first round playoff ga me). 2. In ALL Rounds except the Finals, game date and time w ill be set by mutual agreement. If that agreement is n ot possible, the GHSA Executive Director will finalize the arran gements. If an administrator does not attend the meeting at which the playoff contract is negotiated, the coach shall be authorized by the principal to negotiate and sign a binding contract. 3. In ALL Rounds except the Finals, one half of all perm anent and temporary seats shall be offered to the visitin g team, and it is the responsibility of the home team to regulate the seating so as to guarantee designated seating to the visiting team's supporters. 4. In ALL Rounds except the Finals, there should be adequ ate parking space with a recommendation of one (1) space for every four (4) spectators. 5. In ALL Rounds except the Finals, security shall be provide d at the site in the ratio of at least one officer per 500 spectators. 6. In ALL Rounds except the Finals, facilities for official s to dress, shower, and/or hold meetings shall be made available at the site or nearby. 7. It is mandatory to have emergency medical personnel at the site of all football playoff games. 8. Playoff ticket prices are published on the GHSA website . (NOTE: Only babies in arms do not need a ticket.): a. Through the semifinal round, high school level studen ts of the participating schools may purchase presale tickets at a discount of $2 off regular price. Stud ents may purchase one (1) ticket each from their schools at this discounted price. b. Certified staff members who work at the participatin g schools ONLY will be allowed free admission through the semifinal round with proper identificatio n. B. In order to host a Semifinal Round playoff game, a school must meet the following site requirements: 1. Permanent seating requirements: a. One seat equals 24 inches in width. Exception: each thea tre style seat (with back and arm rests) will count as one seat regardless of the width of the seat. b. All seats must be at least 15 feet from playing field. c. Total seating capacity for each class is as follows: Class A ,2A, Private.......2,000 seats Class 3A .........2,5 00 seats Class 4A & 5A............3,000 seats Class 6A.........3,500 seats Class 7A.....4,000 Seats d. Each principal of a school in the playoffs shall certify t hat the school stadium meets or does not meet football playoff requirements. If a principal certifies such information falsely, then $2,000.00 of such school's share of the gate receipts of the contest held in the non-complying stadium shall be paid to the opposing team. e. The GHSA will mediate with both teams involved when t here are concerns about the safety of a venue in regard to seating limitations. f. The higher-seeded team in the Semifinal Round will be the host team. If they do not have a stadium that meets GHSA minimum standards, they may secure a suitable site. g. The higher-seeded team may use portable seating to b ring its home stadium seating capacity up to the GHSA minimum in order to host the game as long as (NOTE: Any portable seating brought in for games in earlier rounds also must meet these specifications): 1. The seating meets the standards of the industry and is installed by professional installers. 2. All seats provide clear sight lines to the field of pla y. 3. No costs for the temporary seating are taken out of ga me receipts. 4. Seating requirements for a semifinal game may be wai ved upon written agreement of the principals of the competing schools that the host’s stadium will be a dequate and with the approval of the GHSA Executive Director. h. In ALL Classes the higher seeded team according to PSR will host. 1. The higher seeded team will have the opportunity to br ing its stadium up to specifications as outlined in item “g” above, or to secure a suitable stad ium (if their stadium doesn’t meet GHSA specifications.) 2. The higher seeded team will have until 4:00 p.m., on the Monday before the game to commit to bringing their stadium up to specifications or to secure a suitable site. 3. If the higher seeded team cannot secure a suitable site, or bring theirs up to specifications, the opponent will then be awarded the home game, assuming their stadium meets requirements. 4. If neither school meets or exceeds GHSA standards, and the hi gher seeded team can’t find a suitable stadium or bring its stadium up to the specificat ions, the Executive Director will designate a neutral site. 5. Above seating requirements apply to all Classifications for semifinal games. i. The GHSA will provide a supervisor at all semifinal gam es. 70 2. The stadium shall have adequate working space in the p ress box as follows (NOTE: the first priority for access to the press box after the clock operator and the PA announ cer is the working media): Classes A, 2A, 3A, Private: 30 linear feet Classes 4A, 5A: 40 linear feet Classes 6A, 7A: 50 linear feet C. All Championship Round games will be played *December 15 &16 (*tentative dates) at Mercedes-Benz Stadium. These games will be known as the “GHSA/Tommy Guillebeau Fo otball Championships.” 1. The expense and revenue shares by classification will be a s follows: 7A - 17.5%, 6A - 15%, 5A - 15%, 4A - 13.5%, 3A - 12%, 2A- 9%, 1A- 9%, Private- 9% 2. A “Video Review” system will be used in all championship games, the procedure for which will be published on the GHSA web site. 3. The exact schedule for the championship games will be p ublished on the GHSA web site. D. Financial Procedures: 1. Total game receipts will include all revenue from ti cket sales plus any payments for radio or television broadcasting and will not include money from the sale of programs and concessions. 2. All band chaperones and other support personnel must h ave tickets. 3. The division of game receipts will be handled as foll ows: a. From the gross receipts: 1. Twelve percent (12%) will be sent to the GHSA Office a long with a financial report. Each Football Financial Report Form shall include the number of specta tors admitted with a GHSA pass, along with a copy of the sign-in sheets listing the names and nu mbers of the passes used. 2. The visiting team shall receive reimbursement for trave l expenses in the amount of $5.00 per mile (one way) taken from the game receipts and guaranteed b y the host school. NOTE: If the game is played at a neutral site, both teams will be reimbursed for mileage. 3. FOR ALL ROUNDS OF THE PLAYOFFS: The game officials will i nvoice GHSA and GHSA will pay the officials. 4. The HOST school shall receive a fee of 7% of the gross g ate receipts. b. After items in Section “a” have been paid, the remain der shall be divided equally between the two teams. c. Local service charges, stadium charges, lights, cost of opera ting personnel, etc., are not to be deducted prior to the division of funds and are considered a part of the expenses of the host school. 4. Broadcasting procedures are handled as follows: a. The GHSA office will process radio contracts in all round s of the playoffs. The fee schedule and regulations for radio broadcasts may be found in the Broa dcast section 2.80. b. Outlets wishing to televise or webcast football games m ust contact the GHSA office for contract terms E. Game officials will be assigned by the GHSA Office in al l playoff rounds. Officiating crews shall include seven (7) field officials, clock operators, and three (3) chain crew member s. 71 GOLF GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Golf is a state championship event for boys and girls he ld on an Area basis in Classes A through 7A. For the next two-year reclassification cycle a separate 2A, 3A and 4A Private State tournament will be held. Each Public class in 1A through class 7A will be divided into four Areas by combin ing two Regions. Area assignments can be found on the Golf Home Page at www.ghsa.net. An Area Coordinator shou ld be assigned by the two combined Regions to schedule and direct the area golf tournament. An Area Co ordinator should be assigned to schedule and direct the area tournaments. The Private school division will be divid ed into four Areas. These Areas should select an Area Coordinator as well. B. All GHSA golf matches shall be conducted in accordance wit h the “Rules of Golf” as published by the United States Golf Association (USGA). Please refer to the GHSA Postseason HARD CARD for the Rules of Play for competition. Exceptions specific to all GHSA competitions include: 1. Players may use push/pull carts in regular season and post season matches. Motorized carts or caddies are not permitted. 2. Range finders and GPS devices will be allowed in match and tournament play with the following stipulations: a. In each grouping (2-4 players), if any player uses a “r ange finder” then all players will have access to the distance information. b. Any player using a device who does not share the distance information with other players in his grouping, when asked, will be subject to disqualification for a seri ous breach of etiquette. c. Single function GPS devices that measure distance are allow ed. Any device that performs multiple functions may be used for distance only. Use of any other fu nctions will lead to disqualification. d. Smart Phones/Watches that include yardage book applicatio ns may be used during play. Any use of these devices is limited to scoring as well as what is covered under the USGA rules that govern “artificial devices.” Air Pods are prohibited. 3. The use of spectator carts will be based upon their ava ilability at each course. Only spectators with a legitimate handicap will be allowed to rent a cart when there is a limited availability. C. School Rosters must be submitted electronically on the GH SA MIS system by April 15, 2027. A school may list up to 10 golfers for the Postseason. Lineup changes/substitutions m ay be made at the Area/Sectional/State level but only using those golfers listed in MIS. 1. In addition, each School Roster is required to input in iWanamaker (the GHSA golf app) by April 15, 2027. Results from Area/Sectional/State Tournaments must be verifi ed and finalized both in iWanamaker as well as the GHSA MIS system . Schools are required to use iWanamaker during the regular season as well. 2. Golfers not submitted by the deadline are ineligibl e to compete in the postseason. 3. Entering an ineligible player in a postseason event is punishable by disqualification. D. The number of matches allowed (excluding region, secti onal and state tournaments) is twelve (12) playing dates. 1. A 9-hole match played prior to the last play date wil l count as 1/2 playing date. 2. Schools may use one (1) Saturday during the regular seaso n as a playing date that does not count as one of their twelve (12) allowed play dates. E. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on can be found at the front of this publication. 1. There will be no interschool practice or scrimmages in golf. 2. Schools may participate in a maximum 4 regular season to urnaments (4 or more schools) per gender beginning no earlier than 1 PM on a school day. These tournaments m ust be sanctioned and approved by the GHSA. All matches / tournaments in addition to these 4 conducted on a school day are not allowed to commence until school is dismissed. F. A maximum of two (2) golf coaches may confer with their golfers anywhere on the course with the exception of the greens, so long as there is no delay in play. Note: Conver sations with or suggestions from any other person is prohibited (First violation: warning. Second violation: 2-stroke penalty. Third violation: disqualification). G. In the event that a match ends in a tie during the regular-season or post-season competition, a “team sudden- death playoff” will be used. Boys: 1. All six (6) players will play the first playoff hole 2. The first foursome will include the top two players f rom each team, the second foursome will include the 3rd and 4th players from each team, and the final foursome will include the other two players. 3. The best four (4) scores of each team will count. 4. If the teams are still tied, all players will proceed to the next playoff hole. Girls: 1. All four (4) players will play the first playoff hole in A , 2A, 3A, 4A and Private; all five (5) players will pla y in 5A-7A. 2. The first foursome will include the No. 1 and No. 2 players from each team, the second foursome will include the No. 3 and No. 4 players from each team, and in 5A-7A the last twosome will include the No. 5 players from each 72 team. 3. The best two scores of each team will count in classes A, 2 A, 3A, 4A and Private; the best three scores will count in classes 5A through 7A. 4. If the teams are still tied, all players will proceed to the next playoff hole. NOTE: Any ties for Individual championship in Area and/or State must be played off using a “sudden death” format. H. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. If both squads are playing in the sa me event, it will count as only one (1) of the school’s maximu m allowed competitions. However, if the split squads are playing in two different events, it will count as two (2 ) of that school’s maximum allowed competitions. I. A maximum score of 10 per hole will be used in all com petitions, regular-season and GHSA post-season. J. All golf coaches must complete the GHSA/GSGA online rules cli nic for golf or the school will be fined. Dates for the clinic may be found on the GHSA web site. AREA TOURNAMENTS: A. Each Area Tournament will be an 18-hole event. 1. The Area Director is responsible for communicating deta ils of the Area Tournament to both Region Secretaries that form the Area who will (in turn) communicate to a ll schools in their respective regions. GHSA will maintain no record of where or when the Area Tournaments are sche duled to be played. 2. Boys: A team may enter up to six (6) players with the top four scores counting. Girls: Classes 5A through 7A: A team may enter up to five (5) girls with the three bes t scores counting. In Classes A-4A and Private: A team may enter up to four (4) girls with the best two scores co unting. 3. In Classes 5A-7A, the following advancement criteria fro m the Area Tournament to the State Tournament will apply: a. Each Team Area Champion and Runner-Up will receive an automatic bid to the State Championships. b. Each Team that finishes in 3rd and 4th Place will advan ce to a Classification Sectional. c. The Area Tournament Director will electronically submit the Area results to app.ghsa.net and iWanamaker no later than 9:00 a.m. on April 27, 2027. 4. In Classes A through 4A, the top three public school tea ms in the respective Area tournaments will advance to the State Championships along with the top individual o n a non-qualifying team in each area. Private schools in 2A-4A will be placed in four separate Areas with three te ams from each Area advancing to the Private State Tournament along with the top individual on a non-qu alifying team from each area. a. Ties for the final qualifying slot(s) must be played o ff. b. The Area Tournament Director will electronically submi t the Area results to app.ghsa.net and iWanamaker no later than 9:00 a.m. on May 4, 2026. B. Each Area Tournament will have a team competition and an individual competition. 1. The lowest Individual score not automatically qualifyin g for the Classification Sectional or the State Championships as a member of a full team will advance to the State Championships. 2. In the case of a tie for a qualifying slot, the tied competitors must play it off. 3. Schools that do not have a regular girls' or boys' team may enter individuals in the Area Tournament to compete for individual advancement to the State Tourname nt. C. Each school will pay an entry fee to participate in the Area Tournament as follows: 1. *Recommended Pricing : Boys' teams all Classes: $150.00: Girls teams Classes 5A-7A: $12 5.00. Girls Teams Classes 2A-4A and Private: $100. All Individuals: $25.00. 2. The checks are to be made payable to the golf course to help cover costs. CLASSIFICATION SECTIONAL (5A-7A Only): A. Each Sectional Tournament will be an 18-hole event. 1. Details of the tournament will be sent to schools by t he Sectional Director. 2. Boys: A team may enter up to six (6) players with the top four scores counting. Girls: A team may enter up to five (5) girls with the three best scores counting. 3. The following advancement criteria from the Sectional Tournament to the State Tournament will apply: Each team that finishes in 1st through 4th Place will advance t o the State Championships. 4. Ties for the final qualifying slot(s) must be played o ff. 5. The Sectional Tournament Director will submit electro nically to the GHSA the Sectional Golf Results (app.ghsa.net) and iWanamaker. The deadline for this submission is May 6, 2026, at 9:00 a.m. B. Each Sectional Tournament will have a team competition and an individual competition. 1. The lowest 2 Individual scores not automatically qualif ying for the State Championships as a member of a full team will advance to the State Championships. 2. In the case of a tie for a qualifying slot, the tied competitors must play it off. C. Each school will pay an entry fee to participate in the Sectional Tournament as follows: 1. * Recommended Pricing : Boys' teams: $150.00; Girls teams: $125.00. Individuals $2 5.00 2. The checks are to be made payable to the golf course to help cover costs. STATE TOURNAMENT: 73 A. The State Golf Tournaments in all classifications will be held on the dates designated in the Beginning and En ding Dates table at the front of this publication. 1. All State Tournaments shall be 36-hole events. Note: I n the case that one of the rounds is canceled due to inclement weather, etc., the tournament will be an 18 -hole event. 2. Details of the state tournaments will be sent to the schools involved by the respective tournament directors or the GHSA office. 3. Substitutions from the Area/Sectional Tournaments to th e State Tournament must be submitted to the Tournament Director no later than 6:00 p.m., the even ing before the State Final. 4. Substitutions after the first day of the State Tournam ent must be submitted to the Tournament Director no la ter than 8:00 a.m., on the morning of the second round. B. All State Tournament sites will be marked and prepare d by the Tournament Director and the host club’s golf professional. The Georgia State Golf Association will provi de officials for the State Tournament to answer question s regarding the Rules of Golf. C. The recommended playing distances for all Area, Sectiona l, and State Tournaments: Boys - 6,500 yards; Girls - 5,500 yards (on Par 72 courses). Adjustments may be made for Par 70 or Par 71 layouts. D. Each school will pay an entry fee to participate in the GHSA State Tournament as follows: 1. *Recommended Pricing: Boys' teams: $300.00; Girls teams Classes 4A-6A: $250.00. Girl s Teams A-3A and Private: $200. All Individual qualifiers: $50.00. 2. The checks are to be made payable to the golf course to help cover costs. E. A listing of the State Tournament sites will be posted on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). *Host schools may not be able to negotiate these p rices. If the costs exceed the recommended amount, this is acceptable. 74 GYMNASTICS - GIRLS GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Girls gymnastics is a state championship event open to schoo ls in all classifications. There will be two championship divisions: A-4A and 5A-6A. 1. Competition in all meets will be held in the foll owing events: a. Balance Beam b. Uneven Parallel Bars c. Vault d. Floor Exercise e. All-Around (competition in preceding four events) 2. The order of competition will be determined by blo ck style. 3. Open scoring will be used. (Note: the Capital Cup w arm-up format is allowed, but schools will be expected to pay an extra $10.00 per judge if using this format.) 4. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on can be found at the front of this publication. B. The GHSA gymnastics meets will be played according to the rules published by the National Federation of State High School Associations with such GHSA modifications as may be fo und in this section. C. Each school desiring to participate in gymnastics must file its intent by March 1 of the preceding year by filing th e form found on the GHSA web site. D. The number of regular-season gymnastics meets allowed i s 10, including any invitational tournaments. 1. The state elimination series does not count in these m eets. 2. An invitational tournament is defined as a competitio n involving more than three teams. 3. All invitational tournaments must be approved by the G HSA Executive Director. 4. Only two meets per week may be scheduled. 5. All teams and gymnasts (except when prevented by injury) m ust participate in a minimum of three (3) GHSA sanctioned varsity meets during the regular season to be el igible to participate in the state Preliminary Meet. If an injury occurs, a doctor’s statement with the date and t ype of injury and the release date to participate must be presented prior to the Preliminary Meet. Scan and ema il the doctor’s statement to the penny@ghsa.net. 6. Schools may organize and conduct invitational tournament s to assist in meeting the three (3) meet requirement. a. These tournaments may be held outside the school, but must be run by school personnel and must be sanctioned by the GHSA. (Note: schools hosting a meet are re sponsible for paying the judges.) b. Scores should be submitted to Penny Mitchell by the tourn ament director as soon as possible to determine rankings to be posted on the GHSA web site. E. There will be no interscholastic practice and/or scrimma ges. F. No exhibitions are permitted during seasonal or invit ational meets. G. In accordance with NFHS rules, the GHSA limits the numbe r of participants a school may enter in a meet as follows: 1. For regular season meets, the limit is five (5) parti cipants per event. 2. For invitational meets during the regular season, th e limit is four (4) participants per event, unless approve d by the tournament director. 3. For post-season meets, the limit is four (4) participa nts per event (including the All-Around competition). H. All gymnastics coaches are required to complete an online GHSA rules clinic as specified in the GHSA By-Laws. I. Tiebreaker Procedure when using three (3) or more ju dges. 1. Gymnast’s scores are determined by dropping the high an d low scores and averaging the two middle scores when 4 judges are used. When 2 or 3 judges are used, al l scores will be averaged. All scores shall fall within the range determined by the Chief Judge's score. 2. In the event of a tie, an average of all three (3) or four (4) judges’ scores will be used. 3. If a tie still remains, the score of the Chief Judge will be used. 4. If, after the above steps, a tie still remains, the t ie stands. The "Dr. Lucia B. Norwood GHSA State Championship" Finals will be held on April 21-23,2027 at Buford High School. The GHSA Coordinator is Penny Pitts Mitchell in the GHSA office (e mail: penny@ghsa.net) A. In the State Meets, expenses are paid from the gross ga te receipts, including the cost of officials, and the bala nce is sent to the GHSA Office. B. In the State Meets, a maximum of 10 athletes and two coaches will be given free admission. INDIVIDUAL CHAMPIONSHIP Wednesday, April 21, 2027 76 A. The Individual Championship for each division w ill be held on Wednesday evening. B. The only gymnasts who qualify as individuals will compete in this portion of the championship. C. The top 16 ranked individuals in each event wi ll qualify for this portion of the championship: Vault, Bars, Beam, Floor and All- Around D. Individuals will be ranked using the average o f the individuals top three (3) scores throughout the sea son on each event. This process is the same method presently used for tea m rankings. STATE MEET Thursday, April 22, 2027 A. The A-5A Team Championship will be held Thursday evening. B. The top eight ranked teams will compete. C. There will be no preliminary competition. Friday, April 23, 2027 A. The 6A-7A Team Championship will be held Frida y evening. B. The top eight ranked teams will compete. C. There will be no preliminary competition. 77 LACROSSE GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Lacrosse is a classified event with three (3) state champi onship divisions: Class 6A, Class 5A, and Classes 1A-4A. NOTE: Geographic location may determine division placement regardless of classification. B. All Lacrosse games will be played according to the rules published by the National Federation with such GHSA modifications as may be found in this section. C. Notification of entry in Lacrosse must be filed in wri ting with the GHSA office no later than March 1, for th e upcoming school year so that teams may be placed in Areas for competit ion. D. The number of Lacrosse games allowed (not including st ate tournaments) shall be eighteen (18). If a region/ area chooses to hold a region/area tournament, those games mu st be included as part of the 18-game total allowed. To be eligible for the post season, teams must play a minimu m of 14 games to count toward their PSR. Please refer to the PSR Appendix for additional information. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication. E. All GHSA Lacrosse games shall be played with a minimum of two officially-dressed officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for registration of officials. F. For evening games, a single game must begin no later than 7:30 p.m., and a doubleheader must begin no la ter than 6:00 p.m. If the host school does nor offer a warm-up l ocation for the visiting team, there must be a minimum 30- minute warm-up period between games for both teams. I f a warm-up location is provided, then a minimum 20-mi nute interval between games in required. G. Sub-varsity games will be limited as follows: 1. Boys and girls will play four 10-minute quarters. 2. No overtimes will be played in sub-varsity competition. H. When there is a competitive imbalance between two te ams in a contest, the game will be shortened as follows: If a team is more than ten (10) goals down at any time, the remainder of the game will be played with a running clock that will stop only for timeouts and injuries in both b oys and girls competitions. I. Games that are tied at the end of regulation will be handled according to the procedures outlined in the appropriate rule book as follows: 1. BOYS: Any game that ends in a tie will be resolved by pla ying a sudden victory overtime period as outlined in Rule 3-4 of the NFHS Boys Lacrosse Rules Book. 2. GIRLS: For all regular season games in girls lacrosse th at end in a tie, overtime will be played according to sudden victory overtime rules (Rule 4-7) published by US Lacr osse and endorsed by the NFHS. This format will also be used in all tournaments where advancement is necessa ry. J. The use of WBGT for ALL contests is mandated as follows: 1. BOYS: WBGT must be measured 15 minutes prior to start of contest, coaches and officials must be notified. a. If WBGT is equal or above 86.0 F, an ice immersion tu b must be present and ready for use. b. If WBGT is equal or above 88.0 F, Referee’s will take a 3-minute hydration break at or near the midway point of each 12-minute period (ball out of bounds/fo ul assessed or goal scored). Teams to the bench area during hydration break, no coaches permitted on fie ld. 2. GIRLS: WBGT must be measured 15 minutes prior to start of contest, coaches and officials must be notified. a. If WBGT is equal or above 86.0 F, an ice immersion tu b must be present and ready for use. b. If WBGT is equal or above 88.0 F, Referees will take a 3-minute hydration break at or near the midway point of each half (ball out of bounds/foul assessed or g oal scored). Teams to the bench area during hydration break, no coaches permitted on field. K. Teams arriving late for a scheduled contest by thirty (3 0) minutes or more shall forfeit the game,and shall be responsible for payment of the officials unless prior arra ngements are made in a timely manner. Consideration wi ll be given to emergency situations over which the traveling school has no control. The host school has the responsibility of notifying the officials of any changes in the schedule. L. Schools must enter team schedules and game results during the season in the GHSA MIS System, MaxPreps and be responsible for updates as needed. Deadlines for submitting schedules and game results MUST be met, all schools, regardless of classification, are REQUIRED to enter all game results into the GHSA MIS System immediately following their games. This information will support statewide media, event pr ograms, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged t o maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. M. Stadiums/fields may never be completely dark during the use of any flashing stadium lights. The ability to see the entire field must be maintained at all times before, during and after the game, until the officials have le ft the competition area. This is a safety concern. AREA COMPETITION: A. Each Area shall have a written tie-breaker procedure in order to seed teams for the playoffs. 77 B. An Area may choose to use the GHSA tie-breaker procedure: 1. Winning percentage against all teams in the Area. 2. Head-to-head competition among the teams that are tied. 3. Goals allowed in head-to-head competition between teams that are tied. 4. Goal differential in head-to-head competition bet ween teams that are tied (maximum of 10 goals per game ). 5. Goals allowed in all Area games. 6. Goal differential in all Area games (maximum of 10 goals per game). 7. At any point in the process where ties can be broken so t hat only two teams remain tied, consideration of head- to-head competition will be invoked. If the tie is compl etely broken for all teams involved at any step in the process, the tie-breaker process is completed. C. If the Area is subdivided, then the same tie-breaker p rocedure should be used for both subdivisions. POST-SEASON COMPETITION: A. If championship games end in a tie, the rulebook pro cedure for breaking a tie is followed (see Lacrosse Section I). B. Seeding and Bracket will be determined by the PSR . Please refer to Appendix PSR of the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws for additional details. C. Ticket prices will be published on the GHSA website . D. Finances: 1. The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts. 2. Officials will be paid by the host schools out of the g ate receipts. 3. The visiting team’s mileage will be paid at .80 per mile one way. 4. Any remaining receipts will be shared by the participat ing teams. 5. Host school(s) will be responsible for security, facility f ees, maintenance costs, etc., and these expenses will not be taken out of gate receipts. 6. At neutral-site games, each participating team is allo wed free admission for a maximum of 25 players and team essential personnel. Coaches will be admitted with a GHSA coaching pass. E. In order to host a state playoff game, the host school must be able to provide the following: 1. seating for 700 attendees (calculated at 24 inches per seat) Note: GHSA may waive this stipulation with approval of the visiting school. 2. adequate restroom facilities for the size of the crowd ; 3. a dressing room or locker room for the visiting team. 78 LITERARY GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Literary is a Fine Arts and Academic event that produces St ate Champions in classifications 1A-7A 1. The Literary events include the following: a. Literary Interpretation: Solo Dramatic, Solo Humorou s and Duo (Dramatic or Humorous) b. Essay: Personal, Argumentative and Literary Analysis c. Extemporaneous Speaking: Domestic and International d. Music: Male Vocal Solo, Female Vocal Solo, Trio and Quar tet 2. Eligibility reports are required for all Literary con testants. a. Contestants must be academically eligible as specified in By-Law 1.50 and cannot be a migrant student as defined in By-Law 1.60. b. Eligibility reports must be received in the GHSA Office a t least twenty (20) calendar days prior to the first contest. B. The rules and regulations of the GHSA as developed and enforced by state and region personnel and as published in the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws shall govern the opera tion of all Literary meets. NOTE: It is important that all rules be followed precisely in all competitions leading u p to the state competition. C. In Literary, a student may represent their school in n ot more than two (2) individual events and one group e vent, or two (2) group events and one individual event. A school ma y have only one entry per contest. NOTE: There may be a conflict in schedule when a student is in two events. D. Schools are encouraged to avoid using the same performa nce selections in consecutive years. E. In Literary, audiences WILL BE ALLOWED in the competitio n room (if space allows) for all events EXCEPT Essay writing and Extemporaneous Speaking preparation. F. Photography, video recording, and audio recording ARE N OT ALLOWED at any GHSA Literary or One Act Play event. G. Decisions related to rules’ violations can be made only by judges (acceptable criteria are met) or tabulators (ti ming infractions) in collaboration with the Meet Director. H. Literary is an inclusive competition. Students with acade mic accommodations are allowed to compete and receive their accommodations, provided each submits appropriate documentation (see bel ow) to GHSA during the registration process and no later than the registration deadline. 1. Accommodations will be allowed in the two academic events: Essay and Extemporaneous Speaking (preparation only). a. In Essay and Extemporaneous Speaking, the existing criteria and expectations will be used to adjudicate the student’s work. b. In Extemporaneous Speaking, accommodations related to extend ed time apply only to the 30-minute preparation period; all speeches must adhere to the 7-m inute time limit. 2. The following items must be uploaded during the regist ration process: a. A copy of the student’s official education plan (504 or IEP) - the plan should be active and used by the student in the classroom on a daily basis as well as on local and standardized assessments. b. A written request for the accommodation from the mem ber school’s administration 3. The following rules will apply for students who recei ve technology-based accommodations: a. The school must provide a device and a printer. b. The contestant must arrive 30 minutes prior to the be ginning of the competition time to ensure that all technology is set up and functioning properly. c. The device cannot be connected to the Internet. d. The word processing program must not have spell check or grammar check capabilities (suggestions: TextEdit on a Mac or Notepad on a PC). e. The device will need a wired connection to a printer . This includes all necessary adapters or dongles required to connect directly to a printer. f. The school must provide the writing device (laptop), p rinter, ink, all power and connection cables, and paper for the printer. g. The contest supervisor may inspect the device and the software settings prior to the start of the event to ensure compliance. 4. Accommodations not acknowledged and uploaded during the r egistration process cannot be granted. I. Each school wishing to enter Literary must notify the Re gion Secretary by the deadline date. 1. The Literary roster must be electronically filed at ap p.ghsa.net by February 1 of each year. a. Schools are encouraged to list alternates when submitti ng their roster. Only students listed on the submitted roster will be allowed to participate. 79 1. If necessary, schools may shift students to different catego ries, provided that the students were listed on the original roster submission. 2. Region Literary Meets may be held on any date after February 15, 2027 , provided they are completed by March 6, 2027 . 3. State Literary Meets will be held on the date indica ted in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the fro nt of this publication. Schedules will be posted on the GHSA web site J. All literary coordinators and coaches shall complete the coach ing clinic by the established deadline. K. All literary judges shall complete the judging clinic and present their completion certificate to the meet coordin ator prior to judging REGION INFORMATION: A. The first-place winner from every region in each Lite rary event qualifies for the State Meet. 1. When the first-place winner in a region cannot compe te in the State Meet, the next person or group in the order of finish may replace the original winner. a. The school whose winner will not compete must notify t he Region Secretary so the replacement can be identified and informed. b. The Region Secretary must notify the GHSA Office about a ny changes in contestants. c. In group events (Duo Interpretation, Trio, and Quar tet), one student may be substituted between region and state, provided that substitute was listed either as a competitor or an alternate on the original entry form. d. The deadline to make any changes is noon on the Thursd ay prior to the State Meet unless special circumstances exist. 2. In a Region Meet where there is a tie in any event involving more contestants than the region is entitled to enter in the State Meet, the judges should deliberate and de termine a winner. If, because of very unusual circumstances, two students or groups of students are allowed to represent a Region at State Literary for the same position, only one of these c an place in the Top 4 and earn team points at the State Meet. B. The GHSA Office will furnish each Region Secretary with a copy of score sheets that will be used in region competitions. 1. The same score sheet used in region competition will b e used at the State Meet. 2. The GHSA score sheet includes: a. Space for the tabulator to note the amount of time allotted for the event and the amount of time used b y the contestant if over or under time. b. Space for the rank of the contestant to be clearly note d c. Space for the name of the selection(s) performed d. The number of possible points available e. Space for written comments that reflect why points were deducted from presentations. 3. Individual copies of the score sheet may be obtained fr om the GHSA Office or the GHSA web site. C. Miscellaneous Regulations: 1. During competitions, contestants should be identified by order of appearance numbers ONLY. 2. A director/coach is expressly prohibited from conducting du ring a musical contest at the region and state competitions. 3. Digitally created music downloaded from the Internet may be used so long as all copyright laws have been met. It is the school’s responsibility to make sure all copyright l aws have been met. When digitally-created music is used, schools should provide proof of purchase or website do cumentation if retrieved from public domain websites. 4. Host sites shall provide a warm-up room(s) for music cont estants. Keyboards may be provided in the warm-up rooms, but are not required. Schools requiring a keyboard for warming up should consider bringing their own. 5. Each school having one or more students participating mu st have a school representative at the Region and State Meets. 6. Judges will rank the contestants based on the point tot als of each contestant. a. Winners will be chosen by adding up the rankings of ea ch judge. b. There can be no tied rankings or point totals on any judge's score sheet. NOTE: Judges shall not score a presentation below 70 except in very unusual circumstances. c. In the event of a tie between contestants when the ra nkings are tallied, point totals will be used to break the tie. d. All decisions are final. Mistakes due to mathematical er rors or decisions made contrary to GHSA rules that are discovered before or after the decision of the judges shall be corrected. e. Judges will render their decisions without conferring. When necessary, judges may sit together to view a single piece of music, but they may not confer with one an other. 7. The presiding official at each event shall not (by wor d, gesture, or any other expression) indicate approval or disapproval of the performance of the contestant. 8. For timed events: 80 a. An adult timekeeper MUST be present at all region an d state events. Timekeepers should be at least two years removed from high school graduation. b. The timekeeper shall not be a judge. c. The adult timekeeper will show time cards upon request , record times, and provide them to the event coordinator or tabulator at the end of the competitio n. 9. Point totals for determining the Region Champion a nd the State Champion in Literary are as follows: 1st Pla ce = 7 team points; 2nd Place = 5 team points; 3rd Place = 3 te am points; 4th Place = 1 team point. a. If contestants finish in a tie (equal ranking points a nd numerical points), the points shall be divided equall y among the contestants who are tied. STATE INFORMATION: A. The State Literary Coordinator is Tim Harris (e-mail : tim.harris@bufordcityschools.org). B. The GHSA will provide: 1. A competent person at each State Literary Meet to discuss the rules with the judges prior to the contest. 2. Two competent judges to adjudicate each competition. 3. Written copies of the rules for each competition. C. Completed score sheets at the State Meet are submitted by the judges to the chairperson of each contest. 1. The chairperson will place the score sheets in a proper ly marked envelope, seal it, and turn it in to the GHSA representative. 2. The envelope will be opened by the GHSA representative s who will tabulate the results and announce the winners. 3. In the event of error by the judges (i.e., mathemat ical errors, having tie scores, etc.) the score sheets will be returned to the judges for correction. 4. Ties in the State Meet shall stand, and the points sha ll be divided equally among those who are tied. 5. All judges' decisions are final. Protests are not allowe d. D. Schedules for the State Meet will be posted on the GH SA web site. LITERARY INTERPRETATION A. Separate contests will be held in Solo Dramatic Interp retation, Solo Humorous Interpretation and Duo Interp retation (dramatic or humorous) in all classifications. B. This contest is designed to showcase a performer’s abilit y to interpret narrative literature . 1. Contestants may perform selections from prose, poetry, o r dramatic literature. a. Selections should be narrative in nature and must be so urced from a published book, play, musical, or online written source. b. The following are not permitted: unpublished orig inal pieces, selections from television or movie scripts, content from video games or social media platforms, or con tent from other visual media sources (such as YouTube). i. Coaches will verify during the notification of entry p rocess that the presentations meet the established criteria and have not been copied from any visu al media source. 2. Contestants will be judged on how well they communica te the meaning, tone, and emotional depth of narrat ive literature through vocal and physical techniques. a. Each performance should include a slate , an introduction that provides the title, author, and context of the presentation. NOTE: The introduction may be embedded in to the performance; it does not have to be given at the beginning. b. The material must be memorized and delivered withou t the use of a manuscript. c. The performance space should be completely vacant - CHAIRS ARE NOT ALLOWED. Additionally, costumes, props, music, and recorded sound effects are not al lowed. NOTE: Props, as defined in The Stage and the School (1999, p. 600), are “all the stage furnishings, including furniture and those things brought onstage by the actors.” i. Performers should use pantomime for most physical actions. (For example, a pair of glasses becomes a prop when removed as part of the presentation. ) d. Movement, physical contact, and eye contact are allowed. 3. In solo interpretation (dramatic and humorous), cont estants shall portray a minimum of two characters. In duo interpretation, roles and characters shall be balanced between the two performers. 4. A student may participate in only one individual contest in Literary Interpretation, but may also participate i n the group event of Duo. (Please refer to Rule C in General Information above.) C. Each contestant’s interpretation must be a minimum of five (5) minutes and no more than ten (10) minutes in length. A five-second buffer will be allowed on either side of the scale. 1. Any performance that does not meet the timing requir ements will be scored, but cannot be ranked. 2. The time allotment includes the introduction. 3. The adult timekeeper will show time cards upon reque st, record times, and provide them to the event coordinator or tabulator at the end of the competitio n. 81 a. Should a timekeeper request information from a contestan t in order to complete the timekeeping document, the delivery of that information SHALL NOT be timed. D. If the order of performance is not assigned by the GH SA, contestants shall draw for order of presentation upon reporting to the site of the competition. 1. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them. 2. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary event s should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest and may have early or late presentation positions designated f or them. 3. The first place winner in each Region competition sha ll advance to the State competition. 4. One (1) substitution will be allowed in Duo betwee n the Region Meet and the State Meet. (Please refer to Rule A1c in Region Information above.) E. There shall be two (2) judges assigned to all competitions at the Region and State levels. 1. Judges shall use GHSA score sheets and shall follow scoring d irections provided by the GHSA office 2. The following criteria will be considered in the ju dging: a. Selection of material and preparation b. Vocal techniques c. Physical techniques d. Overall communication ESSAY A. Separate contests will be held in Argumentative Essay, Perso nal Essay and Literary Analysis in all classifications. A student may compete in only one (1) of the essay categories. B. This is an on-the-spot writing contest in which contesta nts are provided with topics on which to write. 1. The GHSA Office shall select at least three (3) topics fo r the contests in Argumentative Essay and Personal Essay, and two (2) topics in the Literary Analysis contest. a. Argumentative Essay topics will be selected from current eve nts discussed in the media through the end of January prior to the competition. The most successful resp onses will include ample evidence that supports the line of reasoning; sources may be mentioned, but citations are not required. b. Personal Essay topics will be short prompts designed to eli cit creative and descriptive narrative responses. c. Literary Analysis topics will be excerpts from prose or poet ry along with a prompt that directs students to use evidence, support and commentary to develop a defensibl e interpretation of the excerpt. 2. For the Region competition, the GHSA Office will send the topics to the Region Secretary (or their designee) i n sealed envelopes, and the seal will be broken for the fi rst time in the presence of the contestants at the competition site. 3. For the State competition, the GHSA Office will send t opics to the State Literary hosts in sealed envelopes, and the seal will be broken for the first time in the prese nce of the contestants at the competition. 4. Topics used at State Literary will be different from those used at Region Literary. C. Contest Rules: 1. Contestants will compete at the same time in a group setting. 2. Contestants will have one (1) hour to write their e ssay. Contestants must stop writing when time is called. 3. Contestants may NOT use a dictionary or other reference materials during the competition. 4. Essays shall be written in English 5. Essays shall be written on lined paper in blue or black ink. 6. Contestants must provide their own paper and pens. 7. This is an on-the-spot writing contest. Any evidence of p re-written, memorized of plagiarized compositions will result in disqualification. 8. The first place winner in each Region competition sha ll advance to the State competition. D. There shall be two (2) judges assigned to all competitio ns at the Region and State levels. 1. Judges shall use GHSA score sheets and shall follow scoring dire ctions provided by the GHSA office. 2. The essays shall be judged on the following: a. Thesis & Line of Reasoning (20%) b. Content & Development (20%) c. Analysis & Support (20%) d. Organization & Structure (20%) e. Style & Sophistication (20%) EXTEMPORANEOUS SPEAKING A. Separate contests will be held in Domestic and Interna tional Extemporaneous Speaking in all classifications. B. This is a speaking contest in which contestants are provide d with a selection of topics dealing with current nation al and international issues that have been discussed in period icals since September 1, of the current year that have been compiled by the GHSA Office. In late January, the GHSA will distribute three (3) general areas that topics wil l be chosen from in both Domestic and International Extempo raneous Speaking The most successful responses will 82 directly attack the question provided in an organized, wel l-structured speech that includes ample evidence, mentions sources, and demonstrates engaging delivery; a reference to counterargument is suggested, but not required. 1. Contestants will be allowed to use one notecard ( of any size, but no larger than 5x7 ) during the speech. NOTE: Contestants who use more than one notecard or something other than a notecard will be scored, but will not be ranked. 2. Thirty (30) minutes before the contest is scheduled to begin, the student who is to speak first shall draw three (3) topics and select one (1) on which to speak. The remai ning two (2) topics are returned. 3. Contestants will draw for topics at seven-minute inter vals in the order of presentation. 4. The presiding official of the contest shall record the contestant’s name, contestant’s school, position for presentation, and topic drawn. 5. A student may compete in only one of the two Extemporan eous Speaking events C. The procedure for the contest shall be as follows: 1. When the students are all present, the room monitor wi ll collect and hold any phones, smart watches or other internet enabled devices the contestants have brought into the room. 2. After each student has drawn a topic, that student wil l be escorted to a room where they will have 30 minutes to prepare a speech in brief, outline form. a. Students should not compose and read an entire speech f rom their notecard. b. Students cannot leave the prep room during their 30- minute prep time. c. The room monitor should ensure that students do not have internet access. If a contestant is suspected of accessing the internet during the preparation time, the room monitor should inform the meet coordinator. 1. Any competitor who is found to have accessed the internet du ring the preparation time will be disqualified. 3. Contestants may not receive assistance from another person , but may use any paper copy materials that have been brought to the site as well as self-contained comput ers or laptops. (Cell phone and/or smart phone use and Internet access ARE NOT allowed and will result in disq ualification. Cell phones must be left outside the prep room or with the monitor). Contestants may make use of a computer or laptop to store and to retrieve subject matter only. NOTE: If the Internet is needed to retrieve stored material, this retrieval will not be al lowed. 4. At the end of the preparation time, the contestant will be escorted to the presentation area and the conte stant shall give a copy of the selected topic to a judge. 5. Each contestant shall be allotted seven (7) minutes in w hich to deliver the speech. a. All speeches shall be delivered in English. b. The adult timekeeper will show time cards upon reque st, record times and provide them to the event coordinator or tabulator at the end of the competitio n. c. Contestants that exceed the time limit (7 minutes) wil l be scored, but will not be ranked. A five second buffer will be allowed for before the infraction is e nacted. 6. The first place winner from each Region competition shall advance to the State competition. D. There shall be two (2) judges assigned to all competitio ns at the Region and State levels. 1. The judges shall use GHSA score sheets and shall follow scoring directions provided by the GHSA office . 2. The judges shall take into consideration the followin g components: a. Thesis & Content (20%) b. Development & Support (20%) c. Organization & Structure (20%) d. Language & Delivery (40%) E. If the order of performance is not assigned by the GH SA, contestants shall draw for order of presentation upon reporting to the site of the competition. 1. Contestants shall report to the drawing area at the designated time set for the contest. 2. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them. 3. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary event s should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designat ed for them. TRIO & QUARTET A. Trio and Quartet are singing competitions held in a ll classifications. 1. The singing parts for these events are as follows: a. Trio - Soprano 1, Soprano 2, Alto b. Quartet - Tenor 1, Tenor 2, Bass 1, Bass 2 2. Two selections shall be sung from memory. a. Both selections shall be appropriate for a small group of singers. i. For Trio, both selections should be specifically arrange d for SSA and should conform to copyright law. ii. For Quartet, both selections should be specifically arr anged for TTBB and should conform to copyright law. Barbershop arrangements are allowed. b. Both selections must be copyrighted, published pieces, and not arrangements of instructional or choral 83 pieces. i. Please limit divisi (i.e., limit to cadences, isolated m easure, etc.). c. One selection must be one of the following: i. Chorale ii. Madrigal iii. Art song iv. Folk song v. Spiritual song a. For further information, please refer to the chart at the end of the music section. d. One selection must be a cappella. e. Any group that does not perform selections that meet t he above stated criteria will be scored, but will not be ranked. 3. One legal copy of the music to be performed shall be pre sented to the judges . a. If possible, schools may present the judges an additional co py of the music so that each judge may have his or her own copy to view. b. Schools are encouraged to number the measures in the music. c. Refer to Rule C3 under Region Information above to review expectations related to the presentation of music. 4. The performance should match the instrumentation of the arrangement of the music presented to the judges. (For example, a cappella arrangements should be perform ed a cappella. Accompanied arrangements should be performed with appropriate accompaniment. Points may be deducted in the “Choice of Music” category for failure to comply.) a. Live piano accompaniment is the only form allowed. Re cordings are not allowed. b. Schools are responsible for arranging their own accompa nist. An accompanist is not provided. c. Any group that does not present music to the judges will be scored, but will not be ranked. 5. Each group shall be allotted eight (8) minutes to pe rform their selections. Any group that exceeds the time lim it (8 minutes) will be scored, but will not be ranked. A fi ve-second buffer will be allowed before the infraction is enacted. a. In music events, the introduction is not timed. Timing starts on the first musical note whether sung or played by the accompanist. Timing ends at the end of the second selection; timing does not stop between songs. 6. An adult is expressly prohibited from conducting during any musical contest at the Region or State levels. 7. One (1) substitution will be allowed in Trio and Q uartet between the Region Meet and the State Meet. ( Please refer to Rule A1c in Region Information above.) B. If the order of performance is not assigned by the GH SA, contestants shall draw for order of performance upon reporting to the site of the competition at the schedul ed time. 1. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them. 2. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary event s should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designat ed for them. C. There shall be two (2) judges assigned to all competitio ns at the Region and State levels. 1. Judges shall use GHSA score sheets and shall follow scoring dire ctions provided by the GHSA office. 2. Judging criteria are as follows: a. Musical Knowledge: Pitch Accuracy, Rhythm Accuracy (20%) b. Vocal Technique: Tone, Diction (20%) c. Musicianship: Tempo/Style, Phrasing, Dynamics (30%) d. Other Observations: Ensemble, Stage Presence, Choice of Mu sic (30%) VOCAL SOLO A. Separate contests will be held for males and females i n vocal Solo. B. Two selections shall be sung from memory: 1. One selection must be one of the following from the standard repertory: a. Art Song b. Oratorio Aria c. Operatic Aria d. Folk Song e. Spiritual i. For further information, please refer to the chart at the end of the music section. ii. Any contestant that does not perform selections that me et this stated criteria will be scored, but will not be ranked. 2. Both selections should be from appropriate solo litera ture and not arrangements of instructional or choral pieces. All music selected should conform to copyright law. 3. One legal copy of the music to be performed shall be pre sented to the judges. 84 a. If possible, schools may present the judges an additional co py of the music so that each judge may have his or her own copy to view. b. Schools are encouraged to number the measures in the music. c. Refer to Rule C3 under Region Information above to review expectations related to the presentation of music. 4. The performance should match the instrumentation of the arrangement of the music presented to the judges. (For example, a cappella arrangements should be perform ed a cappella. Accompanied arrangements should be performed with appropriate accompaniment. Points may be deducted in the “Choice of Music” category for failure to comply.) a. Live piano accompaniment is the only form allowed. Re cordings are not allowed. b. Schools are responsible for arranging their own accompa nist. An accompanist is not provided. c. Any contestant that does not present music to the judges w ill be scored, but will not be ranked. 5. Each soloist shall be allotted eight (8) minutes to pe rform their selections. Any contestant that exceeds the time limit (8 minutes) will be scored, but will not be ranke d. A five-second buffer will be allowed before the infr action is enacted. a. In music events, the introduction is not timed. Timing starts on the first musical note whether sung or played by the accompanist. Timing ends at the end of the second selection; timing does not stop between songs. 6. An adult is expressly prohibited from conducting during any musical contest at the Region or State levels. 7. Soloists are not allowed to use any type of instrument or prop. C. If the order of performance is not assigned by the GH SA, contestants shall draw for order of performance upon reporting to the site of the competition at the schedul ed time. 1. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them. 2. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary event s should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designat ed for them. D. There shall be two (2) judges assigned to all competitio ns at the Region and State levels. 1. Judges shall use GHSA score sheets and shall follow scoring dire ctions provided by the GHSA office. 2. Judging criteria are as follows: a. Musical Knowledge: Pitch Accuracy, Rhythm Accuracy (20%) b. Vocal Technique: Tone, Diction (20%) c. Musicianship: Tempo/Style, Phrasing, Dynamics (30%) d. Other Observations: Artistry, Stage Presence, Choice of Musi c (30%) Reference for Required Vocal Music Literature STYLE DEFINITION EXAMPLE Art Song A classical vocal piece composed for solo voice with accompaniment often inspired by poetry requiring expressive interpretation, precise diction , and dynamic contrast Die Forelle (Schubert) Chorale A harmonized, hymn-like piece with rich, sustained chords and smooth vocals, often associated with sacred or classical music traditions that empha size blended vocal harmonies. Jesu, Meine Freude (JS Bach) Folk Song A traditional song passed down through oral tradition, often reflecting the culture and history of a specific region or people characterized by simpl e melodies and rhythmic patterns Shenandoah (American Folk Song) Madrigal A secular, polyphonic vocal composition that originated in t he Renaissance and early Baroque period characterized by complex counterpoint, word painting, and independent vocal lines that weave together harmonically Now in the Month of Maying (Morley) Operatic Aria A solo vocal piece from an opera that typically reflects a cha racter’s deep emotions and require both vocal skill and character portrayal “O mio babbino caro” from Gianni Schicchi (Puccini) Oratorio Aria A solo vocal piece from an oratorio usually based on sacred o r Biblical themes typically performed in concert forms that emphasize musicality and cla rity “But Who May Abide” from Messiah (Handel) Spiritual A religious folk song with deep historical roots in African American musical traditions often using call-and-response, syncopated rhythms, and emoti onal intensity to express themes of faith, resilience, and hope Swing Low, Sweet Chariot (African American Spiritual) 85 ONE ACT PLAY GENERAL INFORMATION: A. One Act Play is a Region and State event in classifications 1A-7A . 1. Region winners must be determined by the date indica ted in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the fro nt of this publication, and the Region Secretary must file t he winner of the Region competition electronically at GHSA MIS immediately following the Region competition. 2. The focus of GHSA One Act Play is acting. Technical elements should support the performance, not do minate it . 3. No admission may be charged at any Region or State One Act Play competition 4. No photography, videography or audio recording is permitted during any performance. 5. The facilities used for State competitions will not be available for practice or walk through prior to the competition day. 6. The GHSA State One Act Play Coordinator and Director of Adjudicator Training is Dean Slusser (ghsaoneacts@gmail.com). ENTRY AND ELIGIBILITY: A. Entering the Competition: 1. Rehearsals (working on show material) for One Act Play may b egin on or after the designated first date of practice. 2. One Act Play Directors and Coaches must complete an annual online One Act Play Coaches Clinic o r the school will be fined. 3. Schools must electronically submit notification of entry at GHSA MIS by October 1 each school year. 4. Principals must approve the selected play before entry is fin alized. B. Eligible Participants: 1. Only eligible students may appear on stage during the pe rformance . 2. Ineligible individuals may assist only as outlined in Section G C. Schools may perform a play or musical. 1. The performance may be an excerpt or abridgement of a longer work if approval is granted by the publisher . 2. Schools may not compete with a production that was performed or work-shopped during the previous school year or the previous two summers. 3. Musical entries must use licensed, non-vocal accompaniment tra cks; soundtracks from original productions may not be used . 4. If live musicians are used the following rules apply: a. Eligible student musicians may appear on stage, inside the go-lines. b. Musicians that are ineligible individuals must be placed o utside the go-lines. 5. Schools are responsible for the following: a. Paying any royalties associated with the performance. b. Obtaining written permission for cuts and or edits to cop yrighted works. c. Obtaining written permission from their administration and host administration to use simulated weapons. d. Confirming royalty responsibility and uploading permission to edit documentation and simulated weapons approval into GHSA MIS during the notification of entry p rocess. JUDGES AND OFFICIALS: A. Each competition (Region and State) shall include thre e GHSA-certified judges 1. Regions shall share their process for selecting judges wi th the participating schools. 2. Judges shall score and rank each play using the official GHSA sco ring rubric. 3. Final placements are determined by combining the two be st ranks for each play; the lowest rank for each play is dropped. a. Points are used to break ties in the combined rankings. i. If the combined rankings are tied, use the scores from the two best ranks for each school to break the tie. ii. If the tie is not broken, add the points from the 3rd judge. 86 4. Judges shall not discuss scores or performances until all score sh eets have been submitted to the tabulator. 5. Judges may discuss possible All-Star cast considerations between pe rformances. 6. Judges shall avoid contact with participating directors a nd students on competition day. 7. At each competition (Region and State) the event coord inator shall appoint one lead judge to resolve rules questions or concerns during the contest. B. Each competition (Region and State) shall include an adul t timekeeper who will keep the official time for each production and report the times to the tabulato r . 1. There shall be four timed elements: a. Five minutes (5:00) to move materials into the wings b. Fifteen minutes (15:00) for the pre-performance walk-t hrough c. Fifty-five minutes (55:00) for the set-up, performance, and strike d. Five minutes (5:00) to remove materials from the wings C. Each competition (Region and State) shall include a tabul ator. The tabulator, with the assistance of the lead ju dge, shall: 1. Apply any time penalties and adjust rankings if necessary. 2. Calculate all ranks and scores using the tabulation tool i n the GHSA MIS portal. 3. Provide a copy of the tabulation sheet to each director af ter the results have been announced. COMPETITION DAY PROCEDURES: A. The Region Secretary (or his or her designee) is respon sible for coordinating the Region competition. B. The GHSA, in conjunction with each host school, is responsi ble for coordinating the State competition. C. Plays should be announced by performance order number a nd title only. School names should not be announced. 1. Performance order should be established in advance of co mpetition day, using a method agreed upon by the participating schools in each Region. 2. At the State competition, performance order is determ ined by a standard yearly rotation. D. Each school shall be granted a 15-minute walk-through immediately before their performance time. 1. During the walk-through period, schools may walk the st age, check sound and light levels, rehearse set-up and strike, and place spike tape. 2. All materials must be behind the go-lines when the w alk-through ends. 3. If items are still being moved when the time expires, the official 55-minute performance time will begin immediately E. The following timing rules apply to all participant s: 1. Each school has up to 5 minutes to move their materials from the designated storage area into the backstage area behind the go-lines. 2. Each school has 15 minutes for walk-through preparation , returning all materials behind the go-lines before the end of the 15-minute period. Spike tape may be placed d uring this time. 3. Each school has 55 minutes to set the stage (starting fro m behind the go-lines), perform their play, and strike the stage (returning all materials to behind the go-l ines and clearing the stage of any debris or spike tape). a. Note: Timing does not stop until all actors, set piece s, props, debris, and spike tape have been fully removed from the playing area. 4. Each school has up to 5 minutes to clear the backstage are a following their performance. F. Schools are penalized 2 points per judge for every 15 se conds or portion thereof beyond the established times list ed above. 1. The timekeeper will time each element and record time used. 2. The tabulator will apply any penalties to the judges’ sco res and adjust rankings accordingly. If the adjusted rankings result in a tie, the school in violation of the timing rule would take the lower rank. G. Stage & Technical Rules 1. The site host must tape go-lines at the stage right wing , the stage left wing, mid-stage, and upstage. a. Directors will choose which line (mid-stage or upstage) de signates their starting and ending location. b. All set pieces must be inside the go-lines while they are b eing used in the production. If set pieces remain outside the go-lines while being used during the perfo rmance, the performance may not be ranked in the Top 4. 2. The host school should provide, at a minimum, a standard festival lighting plot with 9 distinct acting areas: down left, center, and right; mid left, center, and r ight; and up left, center, and right. The areas should be clearly labeled on the light board. a. Participating schools (including the host school) cannot use p re-programmed light cues on the host lighting board. b. Host schools may provide but are not required to provide cyc lighting or follow spots. c. Competing schools may bring their own lighting and othe r specials (such as projectors, instruments), but 87 they must be able to operate them independently of the host school’s systems and set and strike the equipment within the allotted times. They can only be m oved into position for performance and plugged in during the 15-minute walk-through. 3. The host school should provide a basic system for sound playback that is accessible to all schools. a. Competing schools, including the host, that wish to use mi crophones must provide their own sound set-up that can be operated independently of the host facility’ s sound board. (This set-up, as allowed by the host, may be patched into the host facility’s sound board.) b. Sound equipment may be moved into position for performa nce and plugged in during the 15-minute walk- through. 4. The host facility should provide a dressing room schedule at least two weeks prior to the competition. 5. Only free-standing set pieces may be used. a. Nothing may be attached to the curtains, walls, draperie s, or any other equipment of the host school. b. Sets should be designed to allow for smooth transitions be tween plays. 6. Schools must provide their own props, costumes, and any other special effects. a. No flame of any kind may be used. b. Simulated weapons may be used provided the school has permi ssion from their administration and permission from the host facility/school administration. i. Each school must upload their simulated weapons permission l etters during the initial registration process. ii. Host facilities should inform all participants of their si te’s simulated weapons policy in advance of competition day so that schools can plan accordingly. 7. Ineligible individuals, including directors, MAY NOT assist i nside the go lines with setup, performance and strike. 8. Ineligible individuals, including directors, may assist only in the backstage area or in the light/sound booth during the 55-minute performance time. 9. Ineligible individuals, including directors, may assist insid e the go-lines during the 15-minute walk-through time . 10. Ineligible individuals, including directors, may assist insid e the go-lines with load in and load out, before and after the timed performance. AWARDS: A. The following awards shall be presented at the Regi on and State competitions: 1. Recognition determined by judges’ ranks and scores: 1. 4th Place, 3rd Place, Runner Up and Champion 2. Awards determined by judges’ deliberation : 1. All-Star Cast (up to 2 per school) 2. Technical Excellence (up to 3 per competition) 3. Outstanding Performers (up to 2 per competition) B. The State schedule for All Classes shall be: Region 7: 8:40 - Move to wings 9:00 - Curtain Region 8: 10:00 - Move to wings 10:20 - Curtain Region 1: 11:20 - Move to wings 11:40 - Curtain Region 2: 12:40 - Move to wings 1:00 - Curtain BREAK Region 3: 2:25 - Move to wings 2:45 - Curtain Region 4: 3:45 - Move to wings 4:05 - Curtain Region 5: 5:05 - Move to wings 5:25 - Curtain Region 6: 6:25 - Move to wings 6:45 - Curtain 88 89 RIFLERY GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Air riflery is a state championship co-ed event open to GHSA schools of all classifications. 1. Each school desiring to participate in riflery must file its intent by March 1, of the preceding school year by fil ing the form found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). 2. Following notification of entry, each school will be assigned to an Area for competition that will be overseen by an Area chairperson. Teams will be notified of Area assign ments when the total number of teams entering is determined. 3. Contestants in riflery must be certified as being elig ible through the GHSA Office. All rifle team athletes mu st have a sports physical on file at the school. 4. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on can be found at the front of this publication. 5. GHSA Riflery team members may be used by JROTC programs i n JROTC program competitive events. Athletes used by both GHSA Riflery programs and JROTC progra m competitive events must be currently enrolled in JROTC and be entered as a JROTC unit and n ot as a school team. They may not enter competitions or tournaments unless there is a JROTC competi tion category. 6. All rifle coaches must complete the GHSA online rules clin ic for riflery or the school will be fined. Dates for th e clinic may be found on the GHSA website. B. Competitions will be Open Class, which permits use of Precision or Sporter Class equipment using Precision air rifl e rules. The latest edition of the “NATIONAL STANDARD THREE-POSI TION AIR RIFLE RULES” (published by the National Three-Position Air Rifle Council, Camp Perry, P. O. Box 576, Port Clinton, OH 43452 - also available on website: http://thecmp.org/air/national-standard-three -position-air-rifle-rules/) will govern all GHSA matches e xcept the following: 1. The regular season, Sectional, and Semifinal course of fire will be the team event 4x3x10. Matches should be shoulder to shoulder.Teams may compete in up to two (2) regular season postal matches if extenuating circumstances prevent a should to shoulder match. The Area cha ir must be notified and approve the postal match before it is shot. Area chairs will notify the Associate Director. Team members will be distributed equally between relays if more than one relay is used. Teams may p etition for additional postal matches if the underlying or additional extenuating circumstance continue . The Area chairperson must be notified and report the request to the Associate Director who will determine if the additional request will be granted. 2. Except at the State Championship, Sectional, Semifinal a nd tie-breaker competitions, the coach may assist team members (without disturbing other athletes), duri ng preparation, changeover and sighting periods, but may not physically assist the athletes in loading, cocking or a djusting the sights. After each of these periods, the coach must be behind the firing point. 3. The "two scorers" referred to in National Standard R ule 8.5 will consist of a scorer from each team if outside scorers with no interest in the outcome are not used. 4. The amount of protest period time (Rule 8.2) shoul d be established by each Rifle Area prior to start of seaso n or agreed upon by both coaches prior to the beginning o f the match. 5. The following safety regulations are mandatory for AL L competitions, training and practices: An adult, approved by the school, must be present at all times that students h ave access to rifles. Clear Barrel Indicators (CBIs) will be in all rifles when not firing. They will be i nserted in the rifle when taken out of storage or cases. The CBI must visibly extend beyond both ends of the barrel when in stalled. The CBIs may be removed only during preparation and sighting, record firing, changeover (af ter athlete is in a firing position), and sighting tim es. They will be reinserted after each position stage and the ri fle must be grounded. CBIs must be inserted anytime someone goes forward of the firing line or removes thei r rifle from the firing line. CBIs may be removed after the Range Officer gives the “You may discharge air downrange” command, then must be inserted after discharging air and left inserted until air rifles are placed in g un cases. 6. Approved scoring methods are manual or electronic as list ed in the National Three Position Air Rifle Rules. The host school determines which to use. C. Each Area shall draw up schedules for each team in the Ar ea. 1. Each Area schedule must be filed with the GHSA Office. 2. The home or host schools should fax or e-mail team and individual scores to the area chairperson by the beginning of the next day (noon or earlier) after comp letion of the match. 3. Four competitors’ scores comprise a team’s score. Five may b e used in post-season GHSA competition with the top four (4) scores counting as the team score. Areas ma y organize regular-season competitions as they elect in regard to the number of team members involved as long as only the top four (4) scores count as the school’s team score. The four (4) competitors whose scores shal l make up the 'counting scores' should be selected prior to the start of the match. Five athletes m ay also be chosen with the top four scores counting towards total score. 4. If a team has less than four competitors, it must forf eit the match (receiving a loss and the other team receivi ng a win). If both schools agree to compete with the forfe iture in place, the team scores do not count, but the 90 individual scores from both teams will count as GHSA official individual scores and there will be no additional penalty besides the forfeiture. Forfeitures must be commu nicated with the opposing team before the scheduled match start. Forfeitures without extenuating circumstances w ill result in fines, with the fines increasing for each forfeiture without extenuating circumstances. The GHSA will decide if extenuating circumstances warrant no fine. Decisions may be appealed to the Executive Director. 5. Standings will be determined by won-loss results. A team may compete against only one other team in a given regular season match. Ties will be broken using National Standard Rule 8.6. If tie breaking rules are exhausted and the match is still tied, the match will be scored as a tie and each team credited with one-half win and one - half loss. In cases of identical won-loss records, the results of their season competition against each other will determine standings. If still tied then a shoot-off mat ch will be held. 6. Before the start of the regular season, each Area will establish structure for determining Area winners and Sectional seedings. The Area will also appoint an appeals committee to handle protests and appeals in area competitions. NOTE: Decisions by the Area Appeals Committee m ay be appealed to the Associate Director for Riflery when it is believed that Area procedures have been violated. Desisions of the Associate Director may be appealed to the Executive Director. 7. Area competition must be completed by February 11, 202 7. Final Area standings must be reported to the Associate Director no later than noon on February 12, 2027. RESULTS REPORTING: A. Area chairpersons should enter weekly results in regular season and Sectionals into MIS by noon Monday of the following week. B. Results of Semifinals and tie-breakers (if required to determine the two invitational Championship teams) mu st be entered into MIS by the day following the competition. SECTIONAL COMPETITION: A. The first top six teams in each Area will advance to the Sectionals to be fired on February 25, 2027, or earlier if agreed upon by both Area chairpersons involved. The higher -seeded team will host.The Area chairperson of the top three seeded teams in his/her area will coordinate the matches and enter the results into MIS the not later tha n noon February 26, 2027. Sectional and Semifinal brackets can be found in Appendix B. SEMIFINAL COMPETITION: A. The thirty (30) teams winning the Sectional competiti on will advance to the State Semifinal competitions to be fired on March 4, 2027 or earlier if agreed upon by both Area chairpersons involved. The hi gher-seeded team will host. The Area chairpersons will coordinate the matches. All chair persons will report enter the results into MIS no later than noon March 5, 2027. B. Area chairpersons will submit a list of individual qual ifiers at this time. Qualifying scores include individual a thletes during the regular season, sectionals, or semifinals. An at hlete does not have to be a counting member of a team provided the qualifying score (292) was shot during a qua lifying regular season match. C. Only athletes who are part of the five-member team during sectionals and semifinals may qualify as an individua l. D. TEAMS AND ALL QUALIFYING INDIVIDUALS MUST BE REPORTED FOR THEM TO COMPETE IN THE STATE CHAMPIONSHIP. STATE COMPETITION: A. The fifteen (15) teams winning the Semifinal compet itions and the two (2) teams with the highest losing scor es in the Semifinals qualify to compete at the State Championship. Any ties to determine the two additional teams to advance to the championship (identical high losing scores) will be broken with another match to be fired on March 10, 20 27 or earlier if agreed upon by Area chairpersons involved. The higher- seeded team will host. If teams have the same seeding, a coin toss will determine the host site. Area cha irpersons must report results of these tie-breaking matches to the State Coordinator and to the GHSA office not lat er than noon March 11, 2027. B. Competing team members at the Championship also comp ete for the individual competition. All other GHSA competitors firing 292 or better in a regular season GH SA Area match or in the Sectionals, Semifinals or tie-breaker also qualify for the state individual competition if the ir team does not qualify. Schools with more than five comp etitors with the 292 or better qualification may use five of th ese competitors as a team plus their additional qualifie rs may compete for the individual championship. Finals procedure s will be used in determining the state individual stand ings, but will have no effect on team standings. C. The State Riflery Championship will be held on March 20, 2027. The GHSA Associate Director for Riflery is Kent Morrow - 678-471-9359; email: kent.morrow@ghsa.net. 91 SOCCER GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Soccer is a state championship event for boys and girls pla yed in the Spring season. Schools in classes 2A through 7A are aligned in Regions. Class A will be an Area sport i n soccer. B. All soccer matches will be played according to the rules p ublished by the National Federation, and all National Federation recommendations for “State Adoption” have bee n adopted by the GHSA. Sub-varsity matches are limited to 35-minute halves. C. The number of soccer matches allowed (not including sta te tournaments) shall be eighteen (18) and the PSR minimum number of games to qualify is fourteen (14) . Please refer to the PSR Appendix for additional informati on. If a region chooses to play a region tournament, those match es must be included as part of the 18-game total allowe d. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication. D. All GHSA varsity soccer matches shall be played with one or m ore officially-dressed officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials. E. The use of WBGT for ALL Contests is mandated as follows: 1. WBGT must be measured 15 minutes prior to start of con test, coaches and officials must be notified. 2. If WBGT is equal or above 86.0 F, an ice immersion tu b must be present and ready for use. 3. If WBGT is equal or above 88.0 F, Referees will take a 3-minute hydration break at or near the midway point of each half (ball out of bounds/foul assessed or goal scored) . Teams to the bench area during hydration break, no coaches permitted on field. F. Teams arriving late for a contest by thirty (30) minut es or more shall forfeit the match, and shall pay the of ficials unless prior arrangements are made in a timely manner, and both teams agree to start the game late or reschedu le it. Consideration will also be given to emergency situati ons over which the traveling school has no control. The host school has the responsibility of notifying the officials of these changes. G. A student may not participate in more than three (3) halves of soccer per day except in a tournament setting, wh en a player may play two full matches in a calendar day. H. All soccer matches, regardless of classification(s) must be played to completion with no ties. For all region and post season matches, the overtime procedure described in item "E" later in this section will be invoked. For all non-regi on regular season matches that end in a tie after 80 minut es of regulation, these matches will go straight to pena lty kicks. For this, start at sub-letter "C" under section "E" of the Overtime Procedure. I. In accordance with the National Federation allowance for a state adoption (Rule 7-1-5), when there is a co mpetitive imbalance between the teams, the match will be shortene d as follows: 1. If a team is seven (7) or more goals down at the mid point of the first half, that will be considered the e nd of the half, and the teams will play a twenty (20) minute secon d half. 2. If a team is seven (7) or more goals behind at halft ime, the second half will be restricted to twenty (20) m inutes. 3. When a team trails by ten (10) or more goals at hal ftime, the game will be terminated. J. Matches that are interrupted by weather or mechanical difficulties will be replayed from the point of interr uption unless the team that is behind chooses not to complete the match. K. In accordance with GHSA By-Laws, soccer coaches will be requir ed to attend a GHSA rules clinic. Failure to do so will result in a fine for the school for each coach who d oes not attend. L. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/ meet results during the season on the GHSA MIS System and be responsible for updates as needed. Deadlines for submitting information must met. All schools, regardless of classification, are REQUIRED to enter all gam e results into the GHSA MIS site immediately following their respective contest. This is imperative as it will affe ct all classifications in the Post Season Ranking System. This information will support statewide media, event progra ms, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged to maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. M. Scrimmage (Bylaw 2.62 F) -One interscholastic scrimmage (t wo teams meeting head-to-head) is allowed in the sports of Baseball, Basketball, Football, Flag Football, L acrosse, Soccer, Softball, Volleyball and Wrestling (tri match allowed on days preceding school or quad match on days not preceding a school day). 1. This scrimmage may be scheduled anytime between the beg inning of practice as set by the GHSA and the first regular season game for each team. 2. This scrimmage is for varsity teams only, and shall be pla yed with normal timing and/or scoring rules except as noted in individual sports sections. 3. Officials registered with GHSA must be assigned, and the GHSA “Fee Chart” must be followed. 4. A school may not scrimmage another school that is counting the scrimmage as a regular-season contest. REGION/AREA COMPETITION: A. When a Region/Area has not adopted its own tie-breaker method, the follow ing Tie-Breaking Procedure will be used 92 for seeding purposes: 1. Record against all teams in the Region/Area. 2. Winning team in head-to-head competition between schools that are tied. 3. Goals allowed in head-to-head competition between schools that are tied. 4. Goal differential in head-to-head competition bet ween schools that are tied (maximum of three (3) goals p er game). 5. Goals allowed in all Region/Area games 6. Goal differential in all Region/Area games (maximum of three (3) goals per game). Note: When figuring “ goals allowed” and “goal differential” in matches decided by penalty kicks, the winning team will have one (1) goal added to its game score and the losing team will have no goals added regardless of the number of penalty kicks that were made by either team. 7. In any step of the tie-breaking process if a three-way tie is broken so that all ties are broken, that step determines the placements. If two teams remain tied aft er a step is completed, revert back to head-to-head record to break the tie. If the tie cannot be broken, m ove to the next step. B. If Regions/Areas sub-divide, then the same tie-breaking procedures (A1 through A7) should be used. C. For Region/Area and State competition, if the score i s still tied at the end of the second overtime period, t he penalty kick procedure will be used to determine the winner. D. Financial procedures for all Region/Area playoffs will be determined by the Region/Area. The host school is responsible for payment of officials. The admission fees fo r State playoffs begin immediately after Region/Area winners are determined. E. OVERTIME PROCEDURE : 1. The overtime will consist of two (2) ten-minute peri ods, which will be played to their entirety. 2. A coin toss shall take place to determine which team wil l put the ball in play for the first overtime period. 3. If the score remains tied following the overtime per iods, a “shootout” of penalty kicks will determine the win ner. 4. The head referee shall choose the goal at which the penalty kicks will be taken. 5. Each coach will select any five (5) eligible players (inclu ding goalkeeper) to take the kicks. 6. A coin toss shall be held with the team winning the t oss having the choice of kicking first or last. 7. Teams will alternate kickers, and there is no follow u p on the kicks. 8. The defending team may change goalkeepers prior to e ach kick. 9. Following five kicks from each team, the team with the greater number of successful kicks will be given one (1) point and declared the winner. 10. If the same number of penalty kicks are successful for each team, each coach will select five (5) different eligible players who will kick in a “sudden victory” situatio n. Each team will have an opportunity to kick in each round of the sudden victory procedure. 11. If there is no “sudden victory” winner after five (5) kicks, the process will be repeated until a winner is determined. STATE COMPETITION: A. In all Classes, each Region/Area will determine a Region Champion who will automatically qualify for the post season and host a first round game. 1. In All Classes, the remaining qualifiers (non-Region Ch ampions) for the Post Season will be determined by the Post Season Ranking Formula. Refer to Appendix "PSR" in the GHSA Constitution for detailed information. 2. Region/Area winners must be determined by the date i ndicated on the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the front of this publication. 3. It is the responsibilities of the host team to furnish game balls beyond those furnished by the GHSA 4. In the event that two schools involved cannot agree on the arrangements for the series (dates, times, etc.) the GHSA Executive Director will make a ruling to cover the situat ion. 5. Prior to the final round, the higher PSR ranked team will host, unless the competing teams have the same ranking . In that case, PSR protocol will be followed. 6. All Championship games will be played on the dates in dicated on the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the front of this publication. Admission prices and exact schedule s and sites will be posted on the GHSA web site prior to the finals. 7. At neutral-site games, each participating team is allo wed free admission for a maximum of 25 players and team essential personnel. Coaches will be admitted with a GHSA coaching pass. 8. In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the offi cial GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prio r seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. B. Finances: 1. The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts for a single game and 20% for doubleheaders.. 2. Host schools will pay the Officials Association directly for the first and second rounds of the playoffs. Please see Fee Chart for Playoff Fees. (Please see Soccer Financial F orms) 3. A pre-set amount for game officials fees will be sent to the GHSA office for the Quarterfinal and Semifinal 93 rounds, along with 12% of gross gate receipts, and the G HSA office will be responsible for paying the officials. 4. The visiting team shall be paid $.80 per mile (one way) for travel. 5. After these three expenses are paid the schools involved w ill share the remaining gate receipts equally. 6. The host school is responsible for security, facility fees, maintenance costs, etc., and these expenses shall not be taken out of gate receipts. C. Admission must be charged at all playoff games. Ticket pr ices are posted on the website. D. In order to host a state playoff game, the followin g site requirements must be met: 1. Seating requirements (seats at 24 inches each): Private, A, & 2A: 750 ; 3A: 1,000; 4A: 1,500; 5A, 6A, & 7A: 2,000 2. Adequate restroom facilities must be provided 3. Dressing area must be provided for the visiting team a nd the officials. 4. The playing area must be configured in such a way that spectators must enter through an admission gate. 5. The field must be sufficiently lighted to allow for night play for all semifinal and championship matches. 6. Championships matches will be held at neutral sites. E. In the post-season tournaments, it is necessary to have te am benches located on the same side of the field. This wi ll be true even in situations where fans are kept on opposit e sides of the field. Preferably, fans will be on one sid e of the stadium while Team Benches will be on the opposite si de of the field. 94 SOFTBALL GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Fast Pitch Softball is a state championship event organize d as a Region basis in all classifications. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found a t the front of this publication. B. All softball games will be played by the rules as publi shed by the National Federation of State High School Associations. C. The maximum number of softball games allowed (not i ncluding state tournament games) shall be: thirty (30) g ames either head-to-head competition or in invitational or region tournaments. The PSR minimum number of games to qualify is twenty (20). Please refer to the PSR Appendix fo r additional information. 1. Region tournaments shall be structured so that no schoo l will play more than eight (8) games in that tournament. 2. Schools may not enter any softball tournament other th an the region tournament or state elimination series unless such tournament has been approved by the GHSA Executive D irector. 3. Sub-varsity teams are allowed to play 70 percent of the ir respective varsity team’s regular season games. Sub- varsity teams shall not schedule a tournament after they ha ve reached their 70 percent game restriction. 4. Contracts are required for all GHSA member school fastp itch softball games, including invitational tournaments. D. All varsity softball games shall be played with officiall y-dressed officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials. The assignment of official s for regular-season games, invitational tournaments, and sub- region and region tournaments will be made by the GHSA office. 1. The GHSA will assign one or more associations to each schoo l for their games. 2. The school and the local association(s) will sign a contr act for the games that are assigned. E. The use of WBGT for ALL Fastpitch Softball Contests is ma ndated as follows: 1. WBGT must be measured 15 minutes prior to start of con test, coaches and umpires must be notified. 2. If WBGT is equal or above 86.0 F, an ice immersion tu b must be present and ready for use. 3. If WBGT is equal or above 88.0 F, Umpires will take a 3-minute hydration break at the beginning and mid-po int of inning 3 and continuing until the conclusion of the game. F. The following rule “State Adoptions” have been appro ved for GHSA play in softball: 1. The game will end when: a. a team has completed three turns at bat and is fifte en (15) runs behind. b. a team has completed four turns at bat and is twelve (12) runs behind. c. a team has completed five or more turns at bat and is eight (8) runs behind. 2. The courtesy runner rule has been adopted. NOTE: Parti cipation as a courtesy runner does not constitute entry into the game, and does not count as a game played. 3. The use of a double first base is recommended. 4. The suspended game rule will be used. a. When a game is stopped before it becomes a legal gam e, it is considered to be “no contest” and any replay will begin from the first inning. b. When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can be determined, the game is completed. c. When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can not be determined, any replay will begin from the point of interruption. d. Exception: If a State Tournament game is suspended at a ny point, it shall resume from the point of interruption on the next available date. If that date can not be agreed upon by the competing schools, the GHSA Executive Director shall determine the playing date. 5. Termination of the game due to weather, unplayabl e conditions, or mechanical malfunctions: a. The umpires may halt play for up to two (2) hours wh en conditions do not allow play to continue. i. The two-hour interruption(s) is cumulative ii. The game must be terminated when the two-hour ti me period has elapsed. If the first game of a doubleheader is terminated, the second game will be po stponed. iii. The two-hour period does not include time needed to prepare the field for the resumption of play. b. Umpires must wait for at least 30 minutes before ter minating a game for unplayable field conditions. 6. In any softball game, if a team does not show up wit hin 30 minutes of the scheduled game time, a forfeit sh all be declared unless the delay is unavoidable and the visitin g team notifies the home team. In emergency situations, the game may be started late, or may be resche duled. 7. In order to be used, the tie-breaker procedure shall be agreed upon by both teams during the pregame meet ing with the umpires. If implemented, the procedure shall begin in the 10th inning (and any subsequent half-inni ng). Exception: In Invitational Tournament games with a “time limit” policy, the tie-breaker procedure would start in the subsequent inning after time had expired. All Varsity games must be played until a winner is determined. 8. Only game-essential personnel are permitted within t he confines of the team’s dugout and shall be held to t he 95 same level of accountability as the coaching staff and player s. 9. Sub-varsity games may have a time limit instead of playin g seven innings as long as the guidelines are agreed upon before the start of the game. 10. Varsity games played in invitational tournaments may ha ve time limits as follows: a. No game may be less than five innings regardless of the time limit (4.5 innings if home team is ahead.) b. No time limit may be less than 90 minutes. 11. Host schools are required to post the current USA SOFTBALL list of “Non-Approved” bats in both dugouts during GHSA sanctioned games. G. Teams may have spring try-outs that are limited to a m aximum of five consecutive school days between May 1 and the last day students are in school. Students must be academi cally eligible and enrolled at the school they are trying out for, or be an 8th grader at a feeder school for t hat school. Students currently in the 7th grade (rising 8t h graders) may not participate in spring tryouts. H. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/ meet results during the season in the GHSA MIS System and be responsible for updates as needed. This informati on will support statewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Deadlines for submitting information must met. All schools, regardless of classification, are REQUIRED to enter all gam e results into the GHSA MIS site immediately following their respective contest. This is imperative as it will affe ct all classifications in the Post Season Ranking System. Teams are encouraged to maintain team/individual stati stics on MaxPreps. I. NFHS Pitcher One Way Communication: Pitchers will now join catchers as the only players in high school softball permitted to receive one-way electronic communication from the dugout. 1-9-6 EXCEPTION - One-way electronic communication may be utilized by coache s to communicate from the dugout to the pitcher and/or catcher while the team is on defe nse. Previously, one-way electronic communication was permitted only to the catcher. This change reflects the continued evolution of technology within sport and provides coaches with an additional method to efficiently communicate defensive strategy and ga me management information. By expanding the exception to include the pitcher, coaches can deliver inform ation directly to the two primary defensive leaders on th e field, reducing the need for multiple signals and impr oving the pace and flow of the game. This remains a permissive rule, allowing schools and teams t o determine whether they wish to utilize one-way electronic communication technology. Teams may continue to u se traditional communication methods, such as hand signals, wristbands, and/or play cards. Regardless of the electronic devices capabilities, under thi s exception they must only be utilized for one-way communication from the dugout to the pitcher and/or cat cher. Players are not permitted to use these devices to transmit information back to coaches or other team personn el. All other provisions regarding the use of electronic devices remain in effect. Pitchers may only use wrist devices; ear pieces and communication devices attached to the belt will not be permitted for pitchers. J. Scrimmage (Bylaw 2.62 F) -One interscholastic scrimmage (two teams meeting head-to-head) is allowed in the sports of Baseball, Basketball, Football, Flag Football, L acrosse, Soccer, Softball, Volleyball and Wrestling (tri match allowed on days preceding school or quad match on days not preceding a school day). 1. This scrimmage may be scheduled anytime between the beginn ing of practice as set by the GHSA and the first regular season game for each team. 2. This scrimmage is for varsity teams only, and shall be played with normal timing and/or scoring rules except as noted in individual sports sections. 3. Officials registered with GHSA must be assigned, and the GH SA “Fee Chart” must be followed. 4. A school may not scrimmage another school that is counting th e scrimmage as a regular-season contest. FAST PITCH REGION TOURNAMENTS: A. The dates, times and sites will be determined by each Region and must be submitted to the Region Secretary. B. The final play date is Thursday, October 8 . C. Region post-season games (play-in games, sub-region gam es, region tournament games) must have a minimum of two (2) games played on each field, each day, with the e xception of a championship game. FAST PITCH STATE TOURNAMENT: A. In all Classes, Regions will determine a Region Champio n who will automatically qualify for the post season and host a first round game B. In All Classes, the remaining qualifiers (non-Region Cha mpions) for the Post Season will be determined by the Post 96 Season Ranking Formula. Refer to Appendix "PSR" in the GHSA Constitution for detailed information. C. For the First and Second Rounds, teams will play a best -of-three series at the site of the higher seed. D. Dates for the 1st Round of the State Tournament: October 12 -13 - A, 2A, 3A,& Private October 14 -15 -4A, 5 A, 6A, & 7A Dates for the 2nd Round of the State tournament: October 19 -20 - A, 2A, 3A,& Private October 21 -22 - 4 A, 5A, 6A, & 7A 1. There will be a doubleheader on the first day and an “if” game on the second day. 2. The host team will be the “home” team for the fir st game of the series and the visiting team will be “hom e” team for the second game. The higher-seeded team will be th e home team for a third game, if necessary. 3. Teams that win the Second Round series will advance to the Elite Eight of the State Tournament. E. The Elite Eight of the State Tournament will be a d ouble-elimination tournament held in Columbus, Georg ia on October 28-31, 2026. F. FINANCES: 1. Admission fees must be charged for all post-season games: Fees will be posted on the GHSA website 2. Admission fee for State Championship Series at a neutra l site will be posted on the GHSA web site. NOTE: All First Round, Second Round and and Elite Eight ad mission fees MUST be purchased through GoFan. 3. The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts at all state playoff games. If schools are not able to cover the required costs with gate receipts, this fee will be waived if validated by the GHSA office. 4. In the First and Second Rounds, the umpires will be p aid out of gross receipts (Note: If the gross receipts are not sufficient to pay the umpires, the host school will pa y that cost.) 5. The visiting teams shall be paid $.80 per mile (one way) for travel. 6. During the State Playoffs and Elite Eight, each team is allowed free admission for a maximum of 25 players and team essential personnel. Schools desiring more than this n umber must pay the admission price or submit names on the “Excess Team Entry Form.” Coaches will be admitt ed with their GHSA coaching passes. 7. During the State Playoffs and Elite 8 Tournament in C olumbus, teams are responsible for their own travel and housing expenses. G. All umpires will be assigned by the GHSA. H. Times posted with the brackets are approximate. Teams sh ould be ready to take the field for play at the time indicated for each game. 1. The top team in each bracket uses the first base dugout unless a team is playing consecutive games on the same field. 2. The home team will be determined for each game wi th a coin toss. 3. Lineups should be submitted to the official scorer at least 15 minutes prior to the scheduled starting time. 4. Teams may not use game fields for batting practice. 5. All teams advancing to the Elite Eight of the State Tou rnament are required to be present and in uniform at the Opening Ceremonies. Failure to comply with result in a $250.00 fine to the school. I. The outfield fence will be set at 200’ from home p late for the State Tournament in Columbus. J. Double first base will be used for the State Tournament in Columbus. K. All teams advancing to the Championship Finals shall be required to have all team bats inspected upon check-in at the championship venue. 1. Bats that pass inspection will have an approved sticker pla ced on the bat. 2. Bats that do not pass inspection will be confiscated and available for the Coach to pick up at the conclusion of that team’s final game. 3. Bats found to be used in a game that do not have the approved sticker shall be confiscated and the offending player and head coach shall be restricted to the dugout f or that game. 97 SWIMMING AND DIVING GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Swimming and Diving is a classified event with four (4) state championships (classes 7A, 6A, 5A, and the combined divisions of classes A-4A) . 1. Boys and girls compete for separate championships in each class. 2. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on can be found at the front of this publication. 3. The maximum number of contests for swimming is ten (10 ) exclusive of the state meet. 4. For divers, the maximum number of dual meet competit ions is as follows: a. Six-dive format: ten (10) competitions AND/OR b. Eleven-dive format: five (5) competitions 5. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed com petitions. B. The National Federation Swimming Rules shall be the official rules for all GHSA competitions with the exceptio n of any special regulations found in this section. C. It is the responsibility of each athlete and/or coach t o ensure the backstroke ledge is installed properly for use, and removed after the start to avoid interference with the swimmer during their race. Teams are responsible for the installation, adjustment and removal of the ledge for their swimmers, this will be the responsibility of a coach or teammate. Officials and meet management are not respo nsible for the installation, adjustment and removal of the ledge Consequences of a team’s failure to do this will be the responsibility of that team. D. In those school systems where facilities are limited and one coach is hired to coach more than one high school team , or coaches from several schools use the same facility, the gath ering of these students for practice purposes will not violate GHSA regulations. Competitions between schools duri ng these practice sessions must be avoided unless they are counted within the number of allowable contest s. E. Each school with a participating student(s) must have a sch ool representative present at all GHSA meets. F. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/ meet results during the season on MaxPreps and be responsible for updates as needed. This information will support statewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged t o maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. G. ORDER OF EVENTS: (boys events precede girls events) 1. 200-yard Medley Relay 7. 100-yard Freestyle 2. 200-yard Freestyle 8. 500-yard Freestyle 3. 200-yard Individual Medley 9. 200-yard Freestyle Relay 4. 50-yard Freestyle 10. 100-yard Backstroke 5. 1 Meter Diving 11. 100-yard Breaststroke 6. 100-yard Butterfly 12. 400-yard Freestyle Relay STATE MEET (GENERAL INFORMATION): A. In order to participate in the State Swimming and D iving Meet: 1. A participant must qualify at a meet governed by Natio nal Federation and GHSA rules. 2. Qualifying times are listed at the end of this section , and entry deadlines must be met. 3. Proof of Performance (POP) for swimming events must be ver ified by two GHSA coaches who are in attendance at that meet 4. Participating schools will be required to pay $30.00 p er entrant. a. fees are payable to Atlanta Swimming. b. fees are due on the first day of swimming competition . c. Fees not paid within one week are subject to 100% lat e fee. B. All eligible relay swimmers must be listed on the entr y form. It shall not count as an entry unless the competito r actually competes in the event. Any individual listed on the entry form may swim in the prelims, swim-offs, and/or finals provided he does not exceed the permitted entry li mit for the meet. C. Qualifying standards for the State Meet will be estab lished by the GHSA Executive Director. D. A coaches’ meeting will be held at the site preceding the diving competition. E. Only the coaches/faculty members listed on the entry form will have access to the pool deck. F. Rules and Restrictions for Meet Entries: 1. A school may enter only one (1) relay team per event. 2. A school may not have more than four (4) entries in an event in which the contestants compete as individuals. 3. A contestant may enter a maximum of four (4) events, no more than two (2) of which are individual events. 98 G. No team points will be allowed to a swimmer or rel ay team if the qualifying standard for that event is not met or bettered in either the prelims or the finals. No team points will be awarded to divers if they do not equal or better the qualifying point total for six (6) dives. H. Reservation of seating space for spectators is not allowe d. I. The State Diving Championships will be held at The M arist School, while the State Swimming Championships will be held at the Campus Recreation Center on the campus of t he Georgia Institute of Technology on dates listed in th e Beginning and Ending Dates Chart found at the front of this publication. The schedule for competition will be published on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). J. Team championships will be determined by scoring twenty (20) places as noted in the National Federation Swimmin g Rule Book. The top ten (1-10) qualifiers will compete i n the championship heat, and the next ten (11-20) will compete in consolation heat “B.” K. The lead-off 50-yard Freestyle split in the 200-yard Freestyle Relay, and the lead-off 100-yard Freestyle split in the 400-yard Freestyle Relay will be considered for State recor ds in their respective events. NOTE: If the relay team is disqualified for any reason, the lead-off time will no t count for qualifying or for a state record. L. Admission fee for the GHSA State Swimming and Diving Cha mpionship will be published on the GHSA website . Free admission will be allowed for the following: 1. Swimmers and divers qualified and entered in the Stat e Meet; 2. Coaches that are listed on the Swimming and Diving C oaches list; 3. Four girls and four boys designated as substitutes by th e coach on the team list; 4. Two team attendants or trainers as listed on the te am roster; 5. Those normally allowed free admission, such as with GHSA passes, will continue to be admitted by signing the pass list. STATE MEET (ELIGIBILITY/PROCEDURES): DIVING A. A diver may become eligible for the State Meet using a 6-dive sheet or an 11-dive sheet. 1. 6-DIVE FORMAT: This format is slightly different than t he normal 6-dive dual meet format as defined in the NFHS Rules Book. If the 6-dive format is utilized and submi tted, the first dive will continue to be from the grou p as specified by the NFHS and in the NFHS Rules Book. The fir st dive will maintain its assigned degree of difficulty, unless it is more than 1.8, in which case it wi ll receive no more than 1.8 degree of difficulty. Dives 2 -6 shall be one dive from each of the five (5) groups (forw ard, backward, reverse, inward, and twisting). The degree of difficulty of dives 1-6 when totaled shall be equal to or greater than 11.5 for girls and 12.0 for boys. The score to be achieved must be 190 points or more for b oth boys and girls. 2. 11-DIVE FORMAT: If the 11-dive format is utilized and submitted, it shall be on the official 11-dive sheet. Fo r girls, the minimum degree of difficulty for optional d ives shall be 11.5 when totaled, and the score to be achieved must be 300 points or greater. For boys, the min imum degree of difficulty for optional dives shall be 12.0 when totaled, and the score to be achieved must be 300 points or greater. NOTE: The official 11-dive Checklist as well as the 6-Dive and 11-Dive Forms can be fou nd on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). B. In both the 6-dive and 11-dive formats, the meet mu st be scored by at least, but not limited to, three (3) judges. The official dive sheet that is submitted must be completed wi th all necessary signatures and information provided, such as phone, and e-mail information for the coach and dive r, within one (1) week of the performance. C. Proof of Performance: 1. Only one Proof of Performance (POP) dive sheet per diver may be submitted by uploading it onto the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). The deadline date for submissio n may be found on a chart later in this section. 2. If the diver’s POP is accepted and approved, the coach wil l be notified at the email address provided when uploading the sheet. If the POP dive sheet is in any way in correct, the coach will be notified and one (1) additional POP may be submitted, if desired. 3. Dive sheets with electronically generated scores will not be accepted unless submitted from www.DiveMeets.com. D. State Meet Dive Sheets: 1. The format and criteria required for the state dive sheet is slightly different than that listed in Section 4 - Choice of Dives that is detailed in the current NFHS Rules Book fo r championship meets. Divers will compete in a 6- Dive meet format at the State Championship meet with t he following requirements: a. One (1) voluntary dive of the diver’s choice with its tr ue degree of difficulty followed by five (5) optional dives, one from each of the five (5) groups. The degree of difficulty of dives 1-6 when totaled shall be equal to or greater than 11.5 for girls and 12.0 for boys. The minimum score total to be achieved to earn points for the team must be 190 points or more after si x (6) dives for both boys and girls. b. The 10 highest-scoring finishers from the preliminary event will move on to the finals and perform their six (6) dives again. Divers will be permitted to change dives, not dive order, for the finals so long as all sheet requirements are met. c. Scores from the preliminaries and finals will be cumula tive. 2. A diver will be automatically entered in the State Me et upon submission of the actual dive sheet on 99 www.DiveMeets.com by the deadline and approval of the di ve sheet by the GHSA. 3. The deadline for changing a dive sheet may be found on a chart later in this section. E. If a school has more than four (4) divers per gender that have been deemed eligible after official approval of the POP dive sheet, the school may submit a maximum of four (4) an d only four (4) dive sheets per gender by the deadline. F. The Meet Director for the State Diving Meet will ha ve jurisdiction over the method of announcing the diving. G. If possible, the championship venue(s) shall provide two (2) hours of practice time to State Meet participants th e week of the State Meet. H. Boys will dive first in the odd-numbered years, and gir ls will dive first in the even-numbered years. I. For questions or concerns about State Meet eligibility and procedures, contact the State Diving Coordinator, Vicky Sanchez Tuymer, (vtuymer@hotmail.com). J. The diving information found on the GHSA web site supe rsedes all other sources of information. SWIMMING: A. Coaches shall submit all Proof of Performances on the Ge orgia High School Swimming Coaches Association (GHSSCA) web site found at www.ghssca.org . All eligible relay swimmers must be listed on the site. It shall not count as an entry unless the swimmer actually competes in the event . Detailed submission instructions are also available on the site. At the end of the dual meet season, the we b site will be closed to accepting new submissions and time will be given for coaches to make their final entry decisio ns. The coach must make the actual entry for the swimmer to compete in the State Meet on the GHSSCA web site by 4:0 0 p.m., Wednesday, Jan. 27, 2027. B. Qualifying times and Deadlines are as follows: BOYS EVENT GIRLS 1:51.00 200 yard Medley Relay 2:07.00 1:55.00 200 yard Freestyle 2:07.00 2:12.00 200 yard Individual Medley 2:24.00 23.50 50 yard Freestyle 26.50 58.00 100 yard Butterfly 1:05.00 52.00 100 yard Freestyle 58.50 5:20.00 500 yard Freestyle 5:50.00 1:40.00 200 yard Freestyle Relay 1:53.00 1:00.00 100 yard Backstroke 1:06.00 1:07.00 100 yard Breaststroke 1:15.00 3:44.00 400 yard Freestyle Relay 4:12.00 DEADLINES: SUBJECT DATE / TIME Dive - POP Within 1 week of performance Swim - POP Within 1 week of performance Dive - Last POP Tuesday, January 26, 11:59 pm Swim - Last POP Tuesday, January 26, 11:59 pm Dive - Dive sheet for State Wednesday, January 27, 4:00 pm Swim - Actual meet entry Wednesday, January 27, 4:00 pm Dive - Changes on State sheet Wednesday, January 27, 4:00 pm 100 TENNIS GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Tennis is a team state championship sport for boys and g irls that is based on Region play in all classifications. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication. B. All state tournament matches will be 2 of 3 full sets with NO-AD scoring. The difference between NO-AD scoring a nd Regular scoring only occurs when the score of the game becom es “deuce.” At deuce, one game point will be played to decide the winner of the game. The receiver of the serve may decide which side of the court to receive the game - deciding serve. C. All tennis matches will be played according to tennis ru les published by the U.S. Tennis Association (USTA) unless otherwise specified by the Georgia High School Association. 1. The rules of the USTA Handbook relating to lateness fo r a match will apply to GHSA matches. 2. There will be continuous play except that a GHSA certifi ed coach from that school may talk to their player(s) as they change ends of the court after a game, but the pla yer(s) must stay on the court. 3. In regular season play and in the Region tournament , the 8-game Pro Set format is allowed if both coaches ar e in agreement. 8-Game Pro Set: First player to win 8 gam es by a margin of 2 games (ie, 8-5, 8-6, 9-7) wins the set - if score gets to 8-8, the tie-breaker as outlined i n this section is used. In Regular season matches, Regular season Tournaments, and in the Region tournament if bo th coaches agree, Regular Scoring may be used. 4. Any GHSA tennis match that is interrupted, such as by weath er or darkness, and can not be completed that day should be resumed (if it is to be made up) from the exa ct point of interruption at a future date agreed upo n by the competing schools. D. Teams are restricted to no more than eighteen (18) varsity play dates excluding Region and State tournaments. T he 18 play dates are for the complete team (singles and dou bles). There will be no singles tournaments allowed. 1. Each play date of an invitational tournament counts to ward the maximum of 18 play dates. 2. Matches may be played earlier, starting at 1 pm, with a maximum of 4 times per season. 3. No school shall enter any invitational tournament unl ess it has been approved by the GHSA Executive Director. 4. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed pl ay dates. 5. There shall be no interscholastic practices and/or scrimma ges. E. The format for all GHSA tennis matches during the reg ular season, region tournaments and state playoffs shall b e three (3) singles matches and two (2) doubles matches playe d on composition (hard) surfaces unless the competing schools agree to play on a non-composition surface prior to the match. With prior agreement of both coaches, JV squads may use a format of two (2) singles matches and one (1) doubles match. NOTE: No GHSA match at any level may be played where there are fewer than three (3) po ints available and any pre-match forfeitures must take pla ce at the lowest level. No. 1 singles and No. 1 doubles may neve r be forfeited before a match begins. 1. An individual player may play in either one (1) single s match or one (1) doubles match ONLY. 2. Substitution is not permitted once a match is engaged under USTA definition. If any injury occurs during play that prevents a player from completing the match, that p layer defaults and the opponent is awarded the victory. 3. Teams have the option to play a 10-point tiebreaker (see USTA rules for playing process) in lieu of a full thir d set during the regular-season and Region tournament by agreement of the two coaches during the regular- season and by a majority vote of the Region coaches in the Region tournament. Note: All State Playoff matches must be best of three full sets. Note: All State Pla yoff matches must be best of three full sets with NO- AD scoring. 4. Teams may play up to three (3) matches in a day IF a 1 0-point tiebreaker is used in lieu of a full third set in all three matches. F. 7-Point Tie-Breaker for Singles (Team A vs B) 1. This is used when the score is tied 6-6 (or 8-8 in Pro- Set) in any set (1st, 2nd, or 3rd). 2. Player A serves the first point from the right service are a. 3. Player B serves the second and third points from the left and right service areas respectively. 4. Player A serves the fourth and fifth points - again alt ernating the service areas. 5. Player B serves the next two points and ends of the court are changed between these two points. 6. Player A serves the eighth and ninth points. 7. After this, the serve is alternated on every two points. 8. If the tie-breaker ends with a 6-6 score, the players change ends of the court and alternate serves until one player is ahead by two (2) points - which gives that player a set victory of 7-6. 9. Players switch ends of the court after every six (6) points and at the end of the tie-breaker. G. F. 7-Point Tie-Breaker for Doubles (Team A & B vs C & D) 1. Player A serves the first point from the right service are a. 2. Player C serves the second and third points - alternatin g the service areas. 3. Player B serves the fourth and fifth points. 4. Player D serves the sixth and seventh points, and ends of t he court are changed between the points. 102 5. After this, play continues with the same service rotation until one team has either won seven (7) of the first twelve (12) points, or a team established a two-point m argin after twelve (12) points have been played. 6. Teams change ends of court after every six (6) points and at the end of the tie-breaker. H. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/ meet results during the season on MaxPreps and be responsible for updates as needed. This information will support statewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged t o maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. REGION COMPETITION: A. Playoff Qualifiers and Seedings will be determined by the GHSA Post Season Ranking Formula (PSRF). Refer to Appendix PSR in the Constitution and By -Laws for formulas, explanations and examples. 1. The top 4 Region representatives shall be determined no later than April 16, 2027. 2. The top four Region teams must be submitted to the GHSA no later than 9:00 a.m., on April 17, 2027. 3. Five percent (5%) of the gross gate receipts (if admissi on is charged) will be sent to the GHSA, and then the Region will decide how to handle expenses and disbursemen ts. B. At the end of the regular season and prior to any po st-season play, each coach will submit to the Region tourna ment director and enter electronically on the GHSA MIS web site an official playoff roster listing the singles players as No s. 1, 2, and 3 and the doubles teams as Nos. 1 and 2, in p roper order of ability (based on the integrity of the coach). This roster will be the lineup used in ALL tournament p lay thereafter, unless an alternate is used under the restrictions listed below. NOTE: If no Region tournament is held, the official playoff roster must be entered electronically at the end of the regular season and prio r to the start of the state tournament. 1. Stacking of one’s lineup is strictly prohibited in any re gular-season match, invitational tournament or state tournament match. An obvious attempt to stack a lineup (i. e., use a player or doubles team below their relative ability level on the team) may result in the immediate disqualification of the entire team. a. For each regular-season match, the coach will choose thr ee players (A, B & C) to play singles and two pairs of players (D1 & D2) to play doubles that day. The b est player of A, B and C must play the No. 1 position in singles and the weakest must play No. 3 singles. The best doubles team of D1 and D2 must play No. 1 doubles (Note: Points may only be forfeited be ginning with the lower positions and working upward unless an injury or illness occurs after a match has b egun). b. It is not stacking to alternate from match to match du ring the regular season the positions of A and B, B and C, and even A and C if the playes are of relatively e qual ability. Likewise, D1 and D2 could alternate if these teams are of relatively equal ability. (c) It is not stacking if players alternate from singles to doubles, and vice versa, from match to match during the re gular season as long as the singles players being used that day are listed from No. 1 to No. 3 accor ding to relative ability, and the best doubles team being used that day plays at No. 1 doubles. 2. Designate up to six (6) alternates on the official pl ayoff roster to be used under the following conditions: a. Alternates should not be better in ability than ANY of the players listed on the playoff roster in the positions of Nos. 1, 2, or 3 singles OR Nos. 1 or 2 doubl es. b. Alternates may be used in either singles or doubles comp etitions, but the same player may not be used for both in the same round of competition. c. Substitutions made after the official playoff roster ha s been submitted must be made at the lowest level of singles play with all others moving to the higher level o f competition. In doubles competition, the coach has the option to place the alternate in the open slot or to place the alternate on the No. 2 doubles team and move a player from the No. 2 doubles team to the N o. 1 doubles team, if the original vacancy is on the No. 1 team. A player may never be used in a position lower than his original position. NOTE: A substitution violation results in the loss of that line an d not the forfeiture of the entire team match. d. If the original contestant(s) resumes play, everyone move s back to their original positions listed on the submitted playoff roster. e. A player listed as a singles player on the official playo ff roster shall not switch over to doubles competitions in any later round, or vice-versa. 3. A serious injury, illness, suspension or other conflict MAY warrant a waiver of the anti-stacking restrictions listed above. Such waivers will be considered on a case-by-case basis upon receipt of proper documentation to the GHSA office, including a letter signed by the school's p rincipal. 4. A school objecting to an opponent’s lineup must provide documentation (newspaper articles, scorebooks, and written confirmation from other coaches) of any stacking vio lations. STATE TOURNAMENT: A. The State Tournament is considered a continuation of the Region Tournament. 1. Tournaments will be held for both boys teams and gir ls teams in each classification. 2. Trophies shall be presented to the champions and runn ers-up in each classification - both boys and girls. 3. In order to host a State Tournament match beyond the region level, the host school must have available a minimum of two (2) courts. Four (4) courts is preferable . 4. The First 3 Rounds of the State Tournament will take place on the “home” courts of the higher seeded teams. The First Round must be completed no later than April 2 2, 2027 the Second no later than April 28, 2027 and 103 Third Round by May 4, 2027. 5. In each round of the state playoffs, the following w ill apply: a. Coaches will contact each other and set up a mutually a greeable time and date. b. If an agreement on time and date cannot be reached , the Executive Director will set the time and date. c. In situations where fewer than five (5) courts are avai lable per team match, the order of play must be as follows: No. 1 singles, No. 1 doubles, No. 2 singles, No. 2 doubles, No. 3 singles. d. The home team is responsible for reporting the winn ers and scores to the GHSA office by 9:00 a.m., the day after the match. 6. The State Semi-Finals will be held for both boys and girls in all classifications will be held at the location of the team with the higher seed. ALL home teams must charge fo r admission, at $15.00 per person. The finals will also charge admission at $18.00 per person, conducted by th e GHSA office. The finals for classifications A, AA and AAA will be held at the John Drew Smith Tennis Center in Macon on May 12, 2027 with a rain make up day on May 13. The finals for classes 4A, 5A, 6A, 7A and Private wi ll remain at Rome Tennis Center at Berry College on May 12, 2027. The exact schedule will be poste d on the GHSA web site prior to the tournament. Rain Make-up is scheduled to be May 13, 2027. B. All team matches shall be the best three of five (3 sin gles/2 doubles) lines. The scoring for each line shall be 2 of 3 full sets with NO-AD scoring. 1. A team winning three (3) of the five matches (3 singl es/2 doubles) shall be the winner. 2. A team match is concluded as soon as three (3) points have been won, unless both coaches agree to finish all five lines. C. Each team shall furnish five (5) cans of high-quality, h eavy-duty tennis balls in the First 3 Rounds of the State Tournament. 1. New balls will be used in the first team match. 2. After the team match, the losing team will keep the balls used in that match, and the winning team takes the unopened cans of balls to the next round of competition. 3. At the State Finals, the GHSA will supply the tennis bal ls. D. In the First 3 Rounds of the State Playoffs, the host sch ool shall provide a designated “site manager” to make ru lings concerning sportsmanship, lateness, or other rules violation s that might occur during the match. This person should be a certified USTA official, when possible, hired and pa id for by the host school. In instances where a USTA official cannot be secured, a school administrator must be the repl acement. For the Semifinals and Finals The GHSA will provide the site managers and officials. 104 TRACK AND FIELD GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Track and Field is a team championship event for boys an d girls that is based on Region and Area competitions. 2A- 4A Private schools will compete in Areas to qualify for Sectional s. There will be separate Sectionals, and a State division for 2A-4A Private schools. Beginning and ending dates for practice an d competition can be found at the front of this publication. B. All GHSA Track and Field meets will be run in accordance with the rules published in the National Federation T rack and Field and Cross Country Rule Book with any exceptions an d/or adoptions noted in this section. (NOTE: Knowledge of and compliance to all exceptions is the respon sibility of the head coach.) C. Track and Field meet requirements: 1. There will be no interscholastic practices or exhibition meets in Track and Field. 2. The maximum number of meets that may be scheduled is t welve (12), but no individual student may compete in more than ten (10) meets (excluding the Region/Area, Sectional and State Meets). 3. Track and Field teams may compete in one (1) indoor m eet, and this meet will not count as a part of the ten (10) meets allowed per athlete provided the meet is af ter the date for practice to begin and prior to the d ate to begin regular competition. 4. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed com petitions. D. Any meet involving eight (8) or more schools must be app roved by the GHSA Executive Director in accordance with the process described in By-Law 2.64. E. A competitor shall not compete in more than four (4) events, including relays. Contestants officially become competitors when they report to the clerk of the course or field-event judge for an event in which they are enter ed. A contestant shall not be entered in more than four event s, excluding relays. If a contestant is entered in more tha n the allowable number of events, meet management shall scratch the contestant from the excess event(s) by following the listed Order of Events. A contestant may officially participate in: 1. Four individual events - May be listed on any number of relay events but compete in NO Relay events. 2. Three individual events - May be listed on any number of relay events but compete in only one relay event. 3. Two individual events - May be listed on any number of relay events but compete in only two relay events. 4. One individual event - May be listed on any number of relay events but compete in only three relay events. 5. NO individual events - May be listed on any number of relay events and compete in all four relay events. F. The following regulations apply to the Pole Vault eve nt: 1. All GHSA schools competing in the pole vault event must me et the minimum NFHS regulations on the vaulting area, the plant box, the vault box collar, the vaulting standards and padding, the crossbar and the landing pads and padding on any hard surfaces. Schools not able to meet these regulations are not allowed to practice or compete in the pole vault event at the non-complying site 2. Those schools wishing to host a pole vault competition m ust file annually the “Pole Vault Facility Certification” form found on the GHSA MIS site. A listing of approved schoo ls will then automatically post to the GHSA web site. 3. In compliance with NFHS rules, school administrators and coaches must verify that all vaulters and poles meet event requirements. A “Pole Vault Verification Form” (foun d on the GHSA web site) is to be submitted before each competition. G. The GHSA will fully comply with the NFHS Rule 4-3-1. Al l competitors shall have legal uniforms. The top and bottom, or one-piece uniform, must be a school-issued or school-app roved Track and Field uniform. Team uniforms must clearly identify the competitors, at a glance, as being a member of a certain team. All relay teams must wear uniforms clearly indicating through predominant color, sch ool logo and color combination of all outer garments w orn as a uniform, that members are from the same team. Not e: The official should be able to observe that all memb ers are from the same team. The ultimate responsibility for uniforms compliance lies w ith the coach. Coaches should inspect any/all garments competitors wear to make sure they are in compliance with GHSA and NFHS uniforms rules. H. Electronic devices may only be used in unrestricted areas an d coaching boxes, providing the location does not interfere with progress of the meet as determined by th e meet referee. 1. Electronic devices shall not be used to transmit informat ion to the competitor during the race or trial. 2. Electronic devices shall not be used for any review of an official's decision. I. Athletes are not permitted to wear any type of audio or video recording devices during a race, trial or while in restricted areas. J. In the Region/Area and State meets, eight (8) places sh all be scored, with point totals counting as follows: First Place = 10 points Second Place = 8 points 105 Third place = 6 points Fourth Place = 5 points Fifth Place = 4 points Sixth Place = 3 points Seventh Place = 2 points Eighth Place = 1 point NOTE: When there is a tie, the points will be divided e qually among the contestants who are tied. REGION/AREA COMPETITION: A. Deadlines for posting the Region/Area list of entrie s will be a Region/Area decision. 1. All entries must be submitted on MileSplit GA. 2. Posting entries on sites other than MileSplit GA does NO T fulfill the GHSA requirement for electronic submission. 3. Coaches may alter the list of entries until the deadl ine established by each Region/Area for their meet. 4. All Region Secretaries/Area Coordinators should communicate their deadline for entries before th e “Scratch Meeting” that precedes the Region/Area Meet. B. The time schedule for the Region/Area Meet shall be given to each competing school prior to the start of the meet. 1. Events to be contested for Boys and Girls Track (18 events): RUNNING EVENTS FIELD EVENTS 4x800m Relay Girls 100m Hurdles (33”)/Boys 110m Hurdles (39”) 100m Dash 4x200m Relay 1600m Run 4x100m Relay 400m Dash 300m Hurdles (Girls 30” / Boys 36”) 800m Run 200m Dash 3200m Run 4x400m Relay Discus (Girls 2.20 lb./1kg.) (Boys 3.53 lb./1.6 kg.) High Jump Long Jump Pole Vault Shot Put (Girls 8.81 lb./4 kg.) (Boys 12 lb./5.443 kg.) Triple Jump 2. Each school may have three (3) entries in each individual event and one (1) entry in each relay event. 3. Relay teams entered in the Region/Area Meet may list a maximum of eight (8) runners. a. The relay names remain the SAME throughout the State M eet Series (Region/Area/Sectional/State Meets) and are the ONLY eligible participants for quali fying relay teams throughout the State Meet Series. b. NO replacements may be made in the Relay list of runn ers advancing from the Region/Area Meet to the Sectional Meet to the State Meet. c. Any four (4) competitors listed on a Region/Area Meet r elay event entry may run in that event in any round of advancement (Region/Area, Sectionals, State Meet Semifinals and Finals), and in any order desired. 4. In Shot Put, Discus, Long Jump, and Triple Jump, the gi ving of qualifying and final trials is optional. NOTE: T he Region/Area Games Committee may institute a process in whi ch each contestant has four (4) attempts and only the best attempt counts. 5. It is recommended that all Regions/Areas conduct the bo ys and girls competitions on the same dates in order to comply with the GHSA deadline for completion of Regio n/Area competitions. C. When there is a tie in any event involving more contest ants than the Region/Area is entitled to enter in the Sectional Meet, the contest must continue or be re-held until the representatives to the Sectional Meet are determined, a nd no points be given for the continued or re-held contest. Fo r possible replacement purposes, all events must determine clear 5th and 6th place finishers in all classes. D. Any awards are the responsibility of the Region or Area . SECTIONAL COMPETITION: A. Basic Information 1. The top four (4) finishers in each event from each Re gion Meet will advance to a Sectional Meet. 2. The top eight (8) finishers in each event from each Ar ea Meet will advance to a Sectional Meet. 3. Boys and Girls Sectionals in each classification will take pl ace on the same date at the same site (see schedule of Sectionals on the GHSA web site). 4. For Running Events, there will be qualifying heats on ly - no running finals will be held. a. There will be two heats in each event, excluding the 800,1600 and 3200 Meter Runs and the 4x800 Meter Relay. The first place finisher in each heat and the next six (6) fastest times from either heat will advance to the State Final. b. For the 800 Meter, 1600 Meter and 3200 Meter Run s and 4x800 Meter Relay, there will be one heat and the top eight (8) finishers in each race will advance to the State Meet . 106 5. Field event competition in the horizontal jumps and throws will be two flights with 4 total jumps and thro ws with no finals. The top eight (8) will advance to the State Meet . 6. Vertical events will only continue until the qualificat ion of the top eight (8) qualifiers. 7. For replacement purposes, ALL events must determine clea r 9th and 10th place finishers. 8. Relay teams competing at the Sectional Meet must have b een listed on the initial roster. a. NO replacements may be made in the relay list of runn ers advancing from the Sectional Meet to the State Final. b. Any four (4) competitors listed on a Sectional Meet rel ay event entry may run in that event in any round of advancement (Sectionals, State Meet), and in any order desi red. B. Sectionals will be conducted approximately one (1) week prior to the earliest State Final. C. All replacements from the Region/Area meets for the Se ctionals must be submitted on MileSplit GA. The Region Secretary, Region Meet Director or Area Meet Director may make confirmed changes and/or corrections. The deadline for all changes is 12:00 noon on Wednesday, Apri l 28, 2027. D. A listing of Sectional Sites may be found on the Track an d Field page of the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). STATE CHAMPIONSHIP MEETS: A. The State Championship Meets will be held on the da tes listed in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at th e front of this publication. Exact sites and schedules will be posted on the GHSA web site prior to the event. 1. If weather conditions alter the schedule, night session s may be held. B. The top finishers as described from each Sectional Meet will qualify for the State Meet in all classes. 1. When a qualifier cannot compete in the State Meet, the next competitor in the order of finish will be sele cted as a replacement. 2. All replacements for the State Meet must be submitted on MileSplit GA. The Sectional Meet Director may make changes/corrections to the list of State Meet Qualifiers. T he deadline for all changes is 12:00 noon on Tuesday , May 4, 2027. 3. It is the responsibility of EACH COACH to review the schoo l’s entries on MileSplit GA and immediately notify the Sectional Meet Director if corrections need to be mad e. C. Each contestant is requested to bring his/her own shot a nd discus. 1. Any contestant may use any shot or discus after it has been checked for weight and legality at the field. 2. Rings for the shot and discus are concrete; therefore, rubber soled shoes must be worn. 3. The NFHS Track and Field Rule Book will be strictly enfo rced in regard to the time between jumps and throws. D. At the State Meets (boys and girls), 34.92-degree thro wing sectors will be used. Schools, Region/Area hosts and Sectionals hosts must have the 34.92-degree sectors in place f or the Region/Area and Sectionals meets. E. The tracks and runways that are used for all State Meet s shall be all-weather tracks. 1. Spikes on track shoes must not exceed the specified length(s) at each State Meet: NOTE: Shoes may be inspected before contestants are allowed on the track. 2. Spikes that have been cut off by individuals must be file d to a sharp point. Blunt spikes will not be allowed. 3. Only the starting blocks furnished at the track may be use d in the State Meets. F. Admission price for each of the State Meets may be found on the GHSA web site. ADAPTED DIVISION WHEELCHAIR TRACK & FIELD: 1. All high school students with a permanent, physical disab ility may be eligible to participate on their school’s Tr ack & Field team. These students will have the opportunity to compete in the 200, 400 and 800 meter wheelchair races and shot put and discus . There will be 2 classes in discus and 2 classes in shot put based upon the disability. 2. Students who participate must meet all GHSA eligibilit y requirements. 3. All athletes qualified for the wheelchair competitio n must compete in either a standard wheelchair, a throw ing chair or a specially designed racing chair. 4. Students will be members of the school's Track & Field te am and may compete at all the school’s meets, including Sectionals (regardless of the number of wheelchair competi tors). The athletes must compete in their school’s team uniform. 5. The top eight (8) qualifiers over the entire season in each event, including Sectionals, will advance to compete at the State Track & Field Meet. 6. Wheelchair racers must use a racing wheelchair, gloves an d a bicycle helmet that meets ANSI standards. 7. In Shot Put, Boys Class 1 will use an 8.81lb./4.0 kg. shot while boys Class 2 will use a 6 lb. shot. Girls in Classes 1 and 2 will use a 6 lb. shot. 8. In Discus, Boys and Girls Class 1 will use a 1 kg. discus while Bo ys and Girls Class 2 will use a .75 kg. discus . 9. Coaches must complete a required training course conduct ed by AAASP. 10. All times and distances are to be reported to resultsg a@adaptedsports.org by the coaches. 11. For more information, contact Robyn Hootselle at 67 8-283-4424 or see the AAASP web site www.adaptedsports.org. 12. Information about all AdaptED Sports programs may be found on the ghsa.net web site by entering this link: 107 ghsa.net/adapted-team-sports-information AMBULATORY TRACK & FIELD 1. An ambulatory student-athlete must have a permanent o rthopedic, neuromuscular, visual, or other physical disabili ty. Permanent orthopedic impairment and/or visual impairmen t shall be verified by a licensed physician and maintained on permanent file at the school. 2. All high school students with a permanent, physical disab ility may be eligible to participate on their school’s Tr ack & Field team. 3. Students who participate must meet all GHSA eligibilit y requirements. 4. Students shall be members of the school’s Track & Field te am and shall have the opportunity to compete at the school’s regular season meets (regardless of the number of adapted competitors). The athletes must compete in their school’s team uniform. 5. There are two (2) divisions of competition in Ambulatory Track & Field events: Boys and Girls . The Track events are 100m, 200m and 400m. Field events are shot put and discus. 6. The top eight (8) qualifiers over the entire track se ason (including Sectionals) in each event will advance to com pete at the State Track & Field Meet and must meet standards li sted below. Maximum number to qualify per class (division), per event shall not exceed the number of qual ifiers allowed for non-adapted athletes - eight (8). Number of events allowed is five (5). 7. Ambulatory Division Qualification Standards: Event Boys Girls 100 :25 :30 200 :55 1:10 400 2:00 2:10 Shot Put: Boys- 4M-4K; Girls- 4.4M-6lbs Discus : Boys- 19M-1.5K; Girls- 10M-1K 8. All times and distances are to be reported to resultsga @adaptedsports.org by athletes’ coaches. 9. For more information, contact Robyn Hootselle at 678 -283-4424 or see the AAASP web site www.adaptedsports.org . 108 VOLLEYBALL REGULAR SEASON: A. Volleyball is organized on a Region or Area basis with seven (7) state championships. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication. B. The National Federation Volleyball rules committee h as given each state its option about the number of games that determine a match. 1. Region/Area matches shall be best-of-three unless ALL te ams in the Region/Area agree (prior to the start of the season) to play best-of-five. Championship matches in t he Region/Area Tournament may be best-of-five, and all post-season play after Region/Area Tournaments sha ll be best-of-five. 2. In all competitions, the deciding set shall be played to fifteen (15) points. C. Notification of entry in Volleyball must be filed in writing with the GHSA State Office no later than March 1 , for the next school year. Schools will be assigned by the GHSA Executive Di rector to a region or geographic area for competition, and then will be notified of that assignm ent. D. Schools must enter team schedules, rosters and weekly game/ meet results during the season on MaxPreps and be responsible for updates as needed. This information will support statewide media, event programs, broadcasts partners and GHSA Region Standings. Teams are encouraged t o maintain team/individual statistics on MaxPreps. E. Playing dates: 1. Schools have a maximum of 18 playing dates regardless of whether or not it is a tournament format or head-to- head competition (each day of a tournament equals one p laying date). Region/Area and State playoffs are not counted as part of the allotted playing dates. 2. An invitational tournament is defined as five (5) or more schools competing in a single or double elimination format that leads to a champion being declared. The use of pool play is acceptable. 3. The maximum number of days for an invitational tourn ament is two (2) days. 4. No school shall enter any tournament unless it has been approved by the GHSA Executive Director. F. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION: 1. In accordance with National Federation rules, the use of artificial noisemakers shall be prohibited. 2. Display of signs (larger than 8.5 x 11 inches) in the st ands is not allowed during regular season or post season competition. 3. Competitors must stay in uniform while in the competi tive area. 4. All varsity Region/Area Volleyball matches shall be officia ted by at least two (2) officially-dressed volleyball official who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials. a. The host school must provide certified Line Judges (18 ye ars old or older) who have completed the Line Judge Course at learn.ghsa.net at all Region/Area varsity matches. b. The host school must provide an adult (21 years old or older) to maintain the official scorebook and libero tracker sheet at all Region/Area varsity matches, who have com pleted the scorekeeper and libero tracker course at learn.ghsa.net. 5. Each school will have a contract with an officials associati on for regular season matches, play days and invitational tournaments. The host school will be billed by the official’s association for all of the officiating fees for these games, including travel. 6. In accordance with National Federation rules, teams m ay use multi-colored balls in the regular season and post-season competitions. 7. One coach (head or assistant) may stand in the libero r eplacement zone to coach his/her team during play. 8. Schools may have tryouts that are limited to a maximum o f five consecutive school days between May 1 and the last day students are in school. Students participating must be academically eligible and enrolled at that school or an 8th grader at a feeder school for that schoo l. REGION/AREA INFORMATION: Each Region/Area may determine its procedure for selecting their champion. Each Region/Area champion will be guaranteed a top-16 seed and will host a first round p layoff match . The Region/Area may use regular season records and not have a Region/Area Tournament. The Region/Area may choose to have either a single-elimination (best 3 of 5) or a double-elimination (best 2 of 3) tournament with schoo ls seeded on the basis of their Region/Area records - or m ay allow schools to play a non-Region/Area schedule and then be seed ed into the Region/Area Tournament. That choice must be submitted to the Region or GHSA Volleyball Area Coordinat ors before the first competition date of the regular se ason. 1. All finances (including officials’ game fees and travel) will be the responsibility of the Region/Area. 2. Region ticket prices are set by the Region. Area ticket p rices are to be set at $6.00. 3. The GHSA will receive 5% of the gross gate receipts. 4. Results of each Region/Area Tournament must be entere d in the GHSA MIS system within 24 hours of the completion of the event, but no later than 9:00 a.m., Monday immediately following the Region/Area Tourname nt. 108 STATE PLAYOFFS: The State Volleyball playoffs will consist of five (5) round s of dual matches. The first three (3) rounds will be he ld at the site of the higher-seeded team, with the semifinals and cham pionships to be held at neutral sites. 1. All playoff matches will be a best-of-five, single-elim ination format and played on: a. A full court that is free of overhead obstructions (incl uding an overhead scoreboard). b. A court that is equitable in spacing on both sidelines and endlines. c. A court that is free of obstructions coming into play such as walls, bleachers, benches, etc. d. A court that provides adequate lighting. 2. The seeding for the playoffs will be based upon the results of the PSR formula. 3. Finances for all classes through the Quarterfinal Roun d will be handled as follows: a. Ticket prices are TBD and will be published on the GHSA web site . b. The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts. c. Officials’ fees will be taken from the gross gate receip ts and paid by the host school. d. The visiting team will be paid mileage at the GHSA-a pproved rate. e. Any residual funds will be split between the teams. f. The host school will be entitled to all concession fund s. 4. Finances for the Semifinal and Championship matches sha ll be handled as follows: a. Ticket prices are TBD and will be published on the GHSA web site. b. The gate receipts will be sent to the GHSA office. 1. GHSA will retain 12% of the gross receipts. 2. GHSA will pay the officials. 3. Any funds remaining will be disbursed to the competing teams. 5. The number of free admissions for “traveling parties” of participating teams at playoff contests shall be a maxi mum of 20 players and team essential personnel. Coaches will be a dmitted with GHSA coaching passes. 6. Line Judges will be supplied by the various officials’ a ssociations for all post-season matches. 7. Pep bands with a maximum of 15 members and one (1) a dult school personnel member may be allowed. If the hom e team allows its pep band to attend, it shall also allow the visiting team’s pep band to attend. 8. A maximum of twenty (20) cheerleaders in uniform will be allowed. 109 WRESTLING GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Wrestling will be a state open meet with 7 Classificatio ns 1 through 7 for Dual Meet State Competition for Boys. The Girls will be divided into two Divisions for Dual Meet St ate Level Competition. Each Classification for Boys and Division for Girls will be divided into 8 Regions (Boys) 1A through 7A and Areas (Girls) Divisions 1 and 2. Divisions 1 through 5 for Boys and Girls Divisions 1 and 2 for Traditi onal competitions. The five Divisions for Boys and two Divisions for Girls Traditional wrestling teams will be d ivided into 8 Areas to compete in Area Tournaments. Areas each, while classes 3A through 6A will be divided into eigh t (8) Regions each), a State Traditional Tournament an d the State Traditional Finals. There will also be separa te competitions in Team Dual Wrestling. Beginning and e nding dates for practice and competition can be found at the f ront of this publication. B. The National Federation Wrestling Rules shall be th e official rules for Georgia schools with the exception of any special regulations found in this section. C. Notification of entry in Wrestling must be filed wit h the GHSA office no later than March 1 for the next schoo l year. Schools in Classes A and 2A will be assigned to a geographic a rea by the GHSA Executive Director, and then will be notified of that assignment. Schools in Classes 3A through 6 A will compete in their assigned Regions. D. Free Style and Greco Roman wrestling are considered to be the same sport as Folk Style (high school) wrestling and are subject to GHSA rules concerning illegal practices. E. A school may enter its wrestling team in competition fo r twenty (20) playing dates, not including post-season competition. A school may enter its girls wrestling team in competition for twenty (20) playing dates, not includin g post-season competition. Wrestling is a Dual Gender sport. NOTE: After December 31, no new wrestling competitions may be scheduled unless approved by the GHSA Executi ve Director. 1. An invitational tournament is defined as five (5) or more schools competing in a single or double elimination format that leads to a champion being declared. The use of pool play is acceptable. The maximum number of days for an invitational tournament is two (2) dates. 2. A student may not wrestle more than six (6) matches per day. No student shall wrestle in more than 10 matches in a period of two consecutive days. Forfeits do not count toward the match limit. 3. Contestants must have 30 minutes rest between matches. 4. A wrestler may wrestle in both a varsity and a sub-varsity match on the same day as long as that wrestler does not exceed the maximum number of matches allowed for tha t day. 5. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed com petitions. 6. All girls vs. girls Dual and Traditional results should be entered into TrackWrestling. F. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competiti on can be found at the front of this publication. 1. A school shall not allow its team to engage in any int erscholastic exhibition, practice, and/or scrimmage match, except for one (1) interscholastic scrimmage consisting of a T ri-match on a school night or a Quad-match on a non-school night format with officials registered with t he GHSA. 2. A practice shall involve only eligible students in the me mber school and their approved coaches. Participation by outside individuals constitutes an illegal practice. 3. Wrestling matches in practice must be conducted in adher ence with National Federation and GHSA rules, and will involve only eligible team members. 4. Schools having contestants in the State Tournament may pr ovide a teammate of comparable size to practice for the State Tournament. 5. There will be no Spring practice for Wrestling. G. Weight classifications shall be as follows: 106 lbs. 132 lbs. 157 lbs. 190 lbs. 113 lbs. 138 lbs. 165 lbs. 215 lbs. 120 lbs. 144 lbs. 175 lbs. 285 lbs. 126 lbs. 150 lbs. Girls weight classes when girls are wrestling girls shall be as follows: 100 lbs. 120 lbs. 140 lbs. 170 lbs. 105 lbs. 125 lbs. 145 lbs. 190 lbs. 110 lbs. 130 lbs. 155 lbs. 235 lbs. 115 lbs. 135 lbs. 1. When there are consecutive days of team competition, th ere shall be a one (1) pound additional allowance granted each day for all wrestlers (up to a maximum of t wo (2) pounds for any weigh-in). In order to be grant ed this one (1) pound additional allowance, a minimum of 48 hours advance notice is required for the opponent(s). NOTE: There shall be no consecutive day weight allowance gr anted for teams/athletes which compete the day before any post-season championship series tournament. 110 2. The GHSA does not approve any practice that endangers th e health and safety of wrestlers. Crash dieting, the use of diuretics and other drugs for rapid weight reduct ion, the use of a sweat box, any type of vinyl or plastic sweat suit or bag, hot showers, whirlpool, or any other type of artificial heat device for rapid weight reductio n is prohibited. 3. Effective for ALL weekday meets and tournaments, all wei gh-in procedures of the National Federation (Rule 4- 5) will apply. 4. In tournament competitions (regular season dual and invitational, and the State Championship series), wrestle rs shall not have an option to weigh-out at the conclusion of the first day of competition. All weigh-ins shall take place prior to the start of competition each day. 5. All contestants may engage in legal weight loss activitie s on site until weigh-ins begin. Once weigh-ins begin, activities that promote weight loss/dehydration or weight gain are prohibited. Contestants shall not leave the designated weigh-in area unless permission is granted by t he school administrator or meet director. 6. Only two (2) certified coaches (affiliated with the sch ool of the athlete on the mat) will be allowed at m at side during regular season tournaments and at the Region/Are a Tournament, State Tournament and State Finals. H. Coaching requirements: 1. All coaches are required to complete the GHSA/NFHS Wrestl ing Rules Clinic which includes the policies and procedures for the “Wrestling Weight Management Program ” presented online via the GHSA web site. 2. Failure to abide by the above requirements will resu lt in fines assessed against the school. 3. Prior to all competitions, coaches must present a proper ly-dated weigh-in roster (created no more than three ( 3) calendar days prior to the event) to the head official, demonstrating that the Weight Management Program is being followed. I. All wrestling matches shall be held with officially-dre ssed wrestling officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials. 1. Before each meet, the referee shall perform skin checks a nd sign a verification form. 2. The referee shall also check for items outlined as pre- meet duties for officials in the NFHS Wrestling Rules Book. J. Appropriate health-care professionals shall be available at all wrestling tournaments. K. Communicable Skin Disorders: 1. The GHSA strongly recommends that wrestling mats be left unrolled during the competitive season, and be disinfected a minimum of three (3) times per week with a medically-approved cleansing solution. 2. In the event an athlete develops a skin disorder or skin lesion that is considered contagious, the school must complete and provide the “Physician's Release for Wrestler t o Participate” form. No other form of documentation will be accepted at the site of the compet ition. The release form is to be presented by the coach at the weigh-in or prior to competition. NOTE: The fo rm and information can be found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). L. When a coach is charged with a flagrant misconduct pena lty, that individual must go to a location outside the “ sight and sound” of the competitive area, and can have no inte ractions with wrestlers or any other team personnel (removal from premises). WEIGHT MANAGEMENT PROGRAM: A. All GHSA wrestling schools will participate in the manda tory and binding “Weight Management Program.” B. Schools must enter weigh-in results in the computerized weight management program (OPC) within 48 hours of ea ch weigh-in or before the next scheduled contest (whichever co mes first). An athlete’s weight descent plan ends on the Last Play Date indicated on the Beginning and Ending Date s table at the front of this publication; it is not nece ssary to enter Region/Area Traditional tournament weights i nto the OPC. C. The “Wrestling Weight Management Coaches Handbook,” which contains details of program guidelines and forms, will be posted on the GHSA web site. D. Schools must have all scales used for wrestling weigh-ins ce rtified annually by the Georgia Department of Agricultu re (Fuels and Measures; 404-656-3605). TEAM DUAL WRESTLING All Dual Meet results MUST be entered in Maxpreps for end of season seeding GENERAL INFORMATION A. Team Dual Wrestling will be a state open meet with separate competitions in all six classifications and two Gir ls Divisions (D1 and D2). NOTE: The seeding/bracketing committ ee will seed/bracket teams before the State Dual Championship. B. National Federation and GHSA rules governing Traditi onal wrestling are in effect for Team Dual Wrestling. C. GHSA weight certification policies will apply to Team D ual Wrestling. D. Athletes may not wrestle at a weight class lower than a llowed by the “Weight Loss Plan” of the GHSA Weight Management Program for that date. E. All wrestlers must weigh-in at each weigh-in of a mul tiple-day event, and they must weigh-in at the same weig ht 111 class each time. 1. A wrestler is only eligible for two weight classes durin g a multiple-day team advancement tournament. 2. The weight classes for which a wrestler is eligible to compete are determined on the first day’s weigh-in, and cannot change during the remainder of the event. F. Teams may weigh-in all eligible and weight class-certi fied wrestlers. REGION/AREA TOURNAMENTS: A. A school must have a minimum of eight (8) wrestlers and have seven (7) weight classes covered to participate in a Region/Area Dual Tournament. B. Each Region/Area may determine its procedure for selecti ng and ranking its top two (2) teams for the state playo ffs by the date indicated in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the front of this publication. C. Girls D1 and D2 will have wrestle a preliminary meet to determine the State Dual Tournament participants. D. Schools which do not qualify for the State Dual Tourna ment may schedule individual matches and/or tournaments on the dates of the State Duals Championships. STATE TOURNAMENTS: A. Two (2) teams from each Region/Area will advance to t he double-elimination Team Dual State Tournament. Th e Team Dual State Championships for all classes and Girls wil l be held at a site or sites to be determined on the d ates indicated in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at th e front of this publication. (See the GHSA web site for f inal information). B. The teams advancing to the state tournament must be d esignated to the GHSA office immediately after the Region/Area has determined the teams, but all must be d esignated by the date indicated in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the front of this publication. C. The GHSA will assign and pay all officials for State Cha mpionships. D. Trophies and medals will be provided by the GHSA and w ill be presented to the State Champion and the Runner -up in each classification. E. Each school participating in the State Dual Championshi p will be allowed free admission for a maximum of 28 wrestlers and team essential personnel. Coaches will be ad mitted with a GHSA coaching pass. F. Admission fee for State Tournaments and State Champion ships at all sites will be posted on the GHSA web site. G. In the event the State Dual Tournament ends in a ti e, the winner shall be determined using the National Federation tie-breaking system published in the Wrestling Rules Book (r ule 9-2-2). H. All weigh-ins for the State Dual Tournament will be in accordance with the NFHS Rule 4-5. Exact times will be determined by tournament administration. TRADITIONAL WRESTLING REGION/AREA TOURNAMENTS: A. Region/Area tournaments in classes A through 6A and Girl s may be held on the dates indicated in the Beginning an d Ending Dates table at the front of this publication. Th ose hosting Region/Area Tournaments are encouraged to ho ld a one-day tournament whenever possible. NOTE: Hosts are requ ired to run the tournament through TrackWrestling. B. Classes A through 2A and Girls will be divided into Area s with consideration to geographic proximity and to the number of schools involved. The top four (4) wrestlers in each weight class from each Region/Area Tournament (classes A through 6A) and the top four (4) wrestlers in ea ch weight class from each Girls Area will advance to the State Tournament. C. A listing of all traditional Region/Area Tournament sites can be found on the GHSA web site. D. Officials are to be secured and paid by the Region/Are a. E. All finances will be handled by the Region/Area, inclu ding all expenses, payment of officials and distribution o f receipts. F. Region ticket prices are set by the Region. Area ticket p rices are $10.00 per day, or a total tournament ticket f or two- day events may be sold for $17.00. The GHSA will receive 5% of the gross gate receipts. G. Scoring for wrestlers failing to report, failing skin checks, not weighing in or not making weight will follow NFHS guidelines for forfeitures. H. JV Region/Area Tournaments may be held as long as they a re completed by the last play date of the season. The JV tournament date(s) will count toward the maximum numbe r of playing dates allowed. JV Region/Area tournaments do not need GHSA sanctioning. STATE TOURNAMENTS: A. All State Tournaments will be held on the dates indi cated in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the fr ont of this publication. B. Schools in all classifications and Girls will be assigned t o State Tournament sites. A listing of all State Tourname nt sites can be found on the GHSA web site. C. The top eight (8) wrestlers in each weight class in bo ys and top four (4) wrestlers in each weight class in girls from 112 each State Tournament will advance to the State Champion ship Finals. NOTE: The State Tournaments are qualifying tournaments only, therefore no team scoring w ill be used. However, penalties which normally result in team point assessments will have the team point(s) deducted at t he start of the State Championship Finals. D. Officials in all classes and Girls will be assigned and p aid by the GHSA. E. All replacements for wrestlers who qualified for the Sectional Tournaments and State Tournaments should be reported to the GHSA office by noon on the Wednesday imme diately following the Region/Area Tournament and Sectional Tournaments. F. Admission fee for State Tournaments at all site will b e posted on the GHSA web site. STATE CHAMPIONSHIP FINALS: A. The Traditional State Finals will be held at the Ar ena at Southlake on the dates indicated in the Beginning and Ending Dates table at the front of this publication. B. Reports of wrestlers advancing to the State Finals must be transmitted electronically to Track Wrestling no later than 10:00 p.m., on the date the State Tournament is comple ted. Specific reporting instructions will be forwarded to each State Tournament Director. C. All replacements for wrestlers who qualified for the State Finals should be reported to the GHSA office by noon on the Wednesday immediately following the State Tournamen t. A wrestler who cannot wrestle (for any reason) at the State Tournament may be replaced by an alternate (from the same State Tournament) prior to the Wednesday preceding the State Finals. D. Wrestlers must wrestle in the Region/Area and State To urnaments at the weight certified in accordance with all provisions of the GHSA Wrestling Weight Management Program . 1. All weigh-ins for the State Championship Finals will be in accordance with the NFHS Rule 4-5. 2. Exact weigh-in times will be determined by tournament administration. E. Admission fee for State Championship site will be poste d on the GHSA web site. F. Each school participating in the State Finals will be a llowed free admission for all wrestlers who qualify for the tournament and any wrestlers and wrestlerettes who volunt eer to work the tables at the State Championships. G. Schools having athletes qualified for the State Finals must electronically submit the “Roster of Admissions Form” found on the GHSA MIS website. The deadline to submit th is form is noon on the Tuesday immediately following the State Tournament. Only persons listed on this form will b e admitted without charge. H. The State Finals will be scored to co-fifth (5th) pla ces. I. Full wrestlebacks (double elimination) will be allow ed in all classifications. Cross-bracketing shall be used for wrestlebacks. J. Each school will be assessed $10.00 per participating wrest ler to cover the rental and cleaning of the state championship site. 113 APPENDIX ‘A’ ALLIANCE OF GEORGIA HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATION AND AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF ADAPTED SPORTS PROGRAMS Since 2001, the GHSA has been involved in an alliance wi th the American Association of Adapted Sports Programs. T his is a growing relationship in which both organizations ar e working together for the benefit of physically disabled and visually impaired students. The Georgia High School Association and the National Fe deration of State High School Associations have long held the philosophy that participation in competitive activities is a n integral part of the educational experiences of high school students. While the GHSA has accommodated participation of disable d students in several sports and activities, we have not ventured into the area of facilitating participation o f physically disabled students in adapted sports. The GHSA recognizes that AAASP is the premier organizati on administering adapted sports, and the GHSA wishes to partner with AAASP by providing competitive activities for our physically disabled students in addition to lending o ur resources to their endeavors. Under the leadership of Tom mie Storms and Robyn Hootselle, this organization provide s tremendous opportunities in the area of adapted sports . AAASP oversees competitions in wheelchair basketball, wheel chair track, wheelchair handball, power hockey, wheelchair football and beep baseball throughout the state of Ge orgia. Additionally, AAASP personnel travel throughout the United States helping schools establish and maintain athletic pro grams for physically disabled students. It is important for school personnel to understand the o pportunities available for disabled athletes, and to sha re that understanding with students in their schools. It is also im portant that coaches appreciate the value of athletics in the lives of disabled students, and the particular techniques involv ed in coaching disabled athletes. AAASP stands ready to assist school personnel in their endea vors. For more information, please use the following contacts: AAASP P.O. Box 451047 Atlanta, GA 31145 Phone (404) 294-0070 Website www.adaptedsports.org Information about all Adapted Sports programs may be f ound on the ghsa.net web site by going to the followin g link: ghsa.net/adapted-team-sports-information Appendix B - State Playoff Brackets Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private State Baseball Championship In the first four rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In any round where both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team for Game One in a neutral-site final). Exceptions to the scheduled dates may be made with the approval of the Executive Director. May 3-6 May 3-6May 10-11 May 10-11May 15, 17 May 15, 17May 22, 24 May 22, 24 May 28-29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private Boys State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private Girls State Basketball Championship In the first three rounds, the higher seeded team will host. In the Quarterfinals, if both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. In the Semifinal and Final rounds, when playing at a neutral site, the team on the TOP of the bracket will be designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys. Feb 23-24 Feb 23-24Feb 26-27 Feb 26-27Mar 2-3 Mar 2-3Mar 5-6 Mar 5-6 Mar 10-13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 1 State Flag Football Championship In the first three (3) rounds, the higher seed in each of the four-team quadrants will host two games to be played on the same date. A universal coin toss will determine the host schools for the second or quarterfinal rounds when teams of equal seeds are left in the same quadrant. Nov 18 Nov 18Nov 18 Nov 18Dec 1 Dec 1Dec 3 Dec 3 Dec 8 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 2 State Flag Football Championship In the first three (3) rounds, the higher seed in each of the four-team quadrants will host two games to be played on the same date. A universal coin toss will determine the host schools for the second or quarterfinal rounds when teams of equal seeds are left in the same quadrant. Nov 18 Nov 18Nov 18 Nov 18Dec 1 Dec 1Dec 3 Dec 3 Dec 8 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 3 State Flag Football Championship In the first three (3) rounds, the higher seed in each of the four-team quadrants will host two games to be played on the same date. A universal coin toss will determine the host schools for the second or quarterfinal rounds when teams of equal seeds are left in the same quadrant. Nov 18 Nov 18Nov 18 Nov 18Dec 1 Dec 1Dec 3 Dec 3 Dec 8 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 4 State Flag Football Championship In the first three (3) rounds, the higher seed in each of the four-team quadrants will host two games to be played on the same date. A universal coin toss will determine the host schools for the second or quarterfinal rounds when teams of equal seeds are left in the same quadrant. Nov 18 Nov 18Nov 18 Nov 18Dec 1 Dec 1Dec 3 Dec 3 Dec 8 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 5 State Flag Football Championship In the first three (3) rounds, the higher seed in each of the four-team quadrants will host two games to be played on the same date. A universal coin toss will determine the host schools for the second or quarterfinal rounds when teams of equal seeds are left in the same quadrant. Nov 18 Nov 18Nov 18 Nov 18Dec 1 Dec 1Dec 3 Dec 3 Dec 8 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private State Football Championship The State Championships are played at the Mercedes Benz Stadium. Therefore, it is a neutral site. The HOME TEAM (Dark Jerseys) is predetermined as the team in the BOTTOM of the Bracket. The VISITING TEAM (White Jerseys) is the team in the UPPER part of the Bracket. Nov 13 Nov 13Nov 20 Nov 20Nov 27 Nov 27Dec 4 Dec 4 Dec 14-16 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 1 Boys State Lacrosse Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Apr 27-28 Apr 27-28Apr 30-May 1 Apr 30-May 1May 5-6 May 5-6May 7-8 May 7-8 May 13-15 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 2 Boys State Lacrosse Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Apr 27-28 Apr 27-28Apr 30-May 1 Apr 30-May 1May 5-6 May 5-6May 7-8 May 7-8 May 13-15 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 3 Boys State Lacrosse Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Apr 27-28 Apr 27-28Apr 30-May 1 Apr 30-May 1May 5-6 May 5-6May 7-8 May 7-8 May 13-15 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 1 Girls State Lacrosse Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Apr 27-28 Apr 27-28Apr 30-May 1 Apr 30-May 1May 5-6 May 5-6May 7-8 May 7-8 May 13-15 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 2 Girls State Lacrosse Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Apr 27-28 Apr 27-28Apr 30-May 1 Apr 30-May 1May 5-6 May 5-6May 7-8 May 7-8 May 13-15 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Division 3 Girls State Lacrosse Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Apr 27-28 Apr 27-28Apr 30-May 1 Apr 30-May 1May 5-6 May 5-6May 7-8 May 7-8 May 13-15 Area 9 - Team 6 Area 1 - Team 1 Area 6 - Team 5 Area 3 - Team 2 Area 5 - Team 4 Area 4 - Team 3 Area 8 - Team 6 Area 10 - Team 1 Area 2 - Team 5 Area 7 - Team 2 Area 1 - Team 4 Area 9 - Team 3 Area 3 - Team 4 Area 6 - Team 3 Area 10 - Team 6 Area 8 - Team 1 Area 7 - Team 6 Area 2 - Team 1 Area 9 - Team 4 Area 1 - Team 3 Area 6 - Team 4 Area 3 - Team 3 Area 5 - Team 1 Area 4 - Team 6 Area 10 - Team 5 Area 8 - Team 2 Area 2 - Team 4 Area 7 - Team 3 Area 1 - Team 5 Area 9 - Team 2 Area 5 - Team 6 Area 4 - Team 1 Area 8 - Team 5 Area 10 - Team 2 Area 7 - Team 4 Area 2 - Team 3 Area 9 - Team 5 Area 1 - Team 2 Area 6 - Team 6 Area 3 - Team 1 Area 4 - Team 5 Area 5 - Team 2 Area 10 - Team 4 Area 8 - Team 3 Area 2 - Team 6 Area 7 - Team 1 Area 3 - Team 5 Area 6 - Team 2 Area 4 - Team 2 Area 5 - Team 5 Area 8 - Team 4 Area 10 - Team 3 Area 7 - Team 5 Area 2 - Team 2 Area 1 - Team 6 Area 9 - Team 1 Area 3 - Team 6 Area 6 - Team 1 Area 4 - Team 4 Area 5 - Team 3 1st Highest Losing Semifinalist 2nd Highest Losing Semifinalist 2026-2027 GHSA State Riflery Playoffs State Championship March 20, 2027 The higher seeded team will host. If teams in the Semifinals are equal seeds, the highest Sectional score will host. Sectionals - Feb 25 Sectionals - Feb 25Semifinals - March 4 Semifinals - March 4 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private Boys State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private Girls State Soccer Championship In ALL Rounds (except neutral-site Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). In the Finals, the team on the bottom of the official GHSA bracket will be the designated “home” team for purposes of uniform requirements only. Regardless of prior seeding, the team on the bottom of the bracket shall wear dark jerseys and socks for the game. Apr 20-23 Apr 20-23Apr 27-30 Apr 27-30May 3-4 May 3-4May 6-7 May 6-7 May 11-14 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Class A State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 12-13 Oct. 12-13Oct. 19-20 Oct. 19-20 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 12-13 Oct. 12-13Oct. 19-20 Oct. 19-20 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 12-13 Oct. 12-13Oct. 19-20 Oct. 19-20 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 14-15 Oct. 14-15Oct. 21-22 Oct. 21-22 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 14-15 Oct. 14-15Oct. 21-22 Oct. 21-22 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 14-15 Oct. 14-15Oct. 21-22 Oct. 21-22 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 14-15 Oct. 14-15Oct. 21-22 Oct. 21-22 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Position A Position E Position C Position G Position B Position F Position D Position H 2026-2027 GHSA Private State Fast Pitch Softball Playoffs STATE TOURNAMENT Oct. 28 - 31 Columbus FIRST & SECOND ROUND INFORMATION: Higher-seeded team will host best-of-three format. Oct. 12-13 Oct. 12-13Oct. 19-20 Oct. 19-20 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team A #1 Team B Team C #2 Team D Team E #3 Team F Team G #4 Team H #5 #6 #11 Loser 1 #7 Loser 2 Loser 3 #8 Loser 4 Loser 6 #9 Loser 5 #10 #12 Loser 11 #13 #14 #15 Loser 14, if first loss Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private State Fast Pitch Softball Tournament Columbus Softball Complex, Oct. 28 -31, 2026 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private Boys State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AA Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private Girls State Tennis Championship In the first three rounds, the higher-seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school. Apr 23 Apr 23Apr 29 Apr 29May 4 May 4May 8 May 8 May 13 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class A/AA State Volleyball Championship In all rounds (except neutral-site Semifinals and Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Oct 17 Oct 17Oct 20-21 Oct 20-21Oct 24 Oct 24Oct 27-28 Oct 27-28 Oct 29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAA State Volleyball Championship In all rounds (except neutral-site Semifinals and Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Oct 17 Oct 17Oct 20-21 Oct 20-21Oct 24 Oct 24Oct 27-28 Oct 27-28 Oct 29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAA State Volleyball Championship In all rounds (except neutral-site Semifinals and Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Oct 17 Oct 17Oct 20-21 Oct 20-21Oct 24 Oct 24Oct 27-28 Oct 27-28 Oct 29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAA State Volleyball Championship In all rounds (except neutral-site Semifinals and Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Oct 17 Oct 17Oct 20-21 Oct 20-21Oct 24 Oct 24Oct 27-28 Oct 27-28 Oct 29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAA State Volleyball Championship In all rounds (except neutral-site Semifinals and Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Oct 17 Oct 17Oct 20-21 Oct 20-21Oct 24 Oct 24Oct 27-28 Oct 27-28 Oct 29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Class AAAAAAA State Volleyball Championship In all rounds (except neutral-site Semifinals and Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Oct 17 Oct 17Oct 20-21 Oct 20-21Oct 24 Oct 24Oct 27-28 Oct 27-28 Oct 29, 31 Team 32 Team 1 Team 17 Team 16 Team 24 Team 9 Team 25 Team 8 Team 30 Team 3 Team 19 Team 14 Team 22 Team 11 Team 27 Team 6 Team 28 Team 5 Team 21 Team 12 Team 20 Team 13 Team 29 Team 4 Team 26 Team 7 Team 23 Team 10 Team 18 Team 15 Team 31 Team 2 Champion Runner-Up 2026-2027 GHSA Private State Volleyball Championship In all rounds (except neutral-site Semifinals and Finals), the higher seeded team will host. If both teams are the same seed, a "universal" GHSA coin flip will determine the host school (or the designated home team in a neutral-site Final). Oct 17 Oct 17Oct 20-21 Oct 20-21Oct 24 Oct 24Oct 27-28 Oct 27-28 Oct 29, 31 APPENDIX ‘C’ GHSA STATE OFFICERS 2026-27 President Jim Finch, Monroe County Schools, Forsyth Vice President Curt Miller, Oconee County High School, Watkinsville Executive Director Tim Scott, GHSA Office, Thomaston Region Region Secretaries 1-AAAAAAA Josh Akers, Lowndes High School, Valdosta 2-AAAAAAA Elizabeth Sanders, Carrollton High, Carrollt on 3-AAAAAAA Jonathan Brown, Hillgrove High School, Powder Springs 4-AAAAAAA Dr. Sam Nichols, Archer High School, Lawrencevil le 5-AAAAAAA Jeremy Adams, Cherokee High School, Canton 6-AAAAAAA Byron Orr, Forsyth County Schools, Cumming 7-AAAAAAA Mike Cammack, Norcross High School, Norcross 8-AAAAAAA Travis Techo, Mill Creek High School, Hoschton 1-AAAAAA Jake Darling, Effingham County High School, Spr ingfield 2-AAAAAA Jody Dean, Houston County School System, Perry 3-AAAAAA Jason Carrera, Mcintosh High School, Peachtree Ci ty 4-AAAAAA P. Blair Barksdale, Midtown High School, Atlan ta 5-AAAAAA Don Corr 6-AAAAAA Tonya Sebring, Ball Ground 7-AAAAAA Ben Sutter, Roswell High School, Roswell 8-AAAAAA Jeff Segars, Loganville High School, Loganville 1-AAAAA Justin Mcdonald, Wayne County High School, Jesup 2-AAAAA Beau Edwards, Henry County Schools, Mcdonough 3-AAAAA Bill Stikes, Griffin-spalding County Schools, Grif fin 4-AAAAA Dwayne Davis, Mundy's Mill High School, Jonesboro 5-AAAAA Reginald Curry, Jackson High School, Atlanta, Atla nta 6-AAAAA Douglas Trey Henson, Centennial High School, Ros well 7-AAAAA John Howard, Woodland High School, Cartersville 8-AAAAA Nathan Turner, Forsyth County School System, Cummi ng 1-AAAA Rex Wade, Iii, Bainbridge High School, Bainbrid ge 2-AAAA Bill Stikes, Griffin-spalding County Schools, Griff in 3-AAAA Jeff Clayton, West Laurens High School, Dexter 4-AAAA Michelle Ahmad, Luella High School, Locust Grove 5-AAAA Alana Allen, Douglass High School, Atlanta 6-AAAA Sam Borg, North Hall High School, Gainesville 7-AAAA Billy Roper, Adairsville High School, Adairsville 8-AAAA Randy Gambrell, Jefferson High School, Jefferson 1-AAA Craig Fitts, Hamilton 2-AAA Eric Woods, Callaway High School, Hogansville 3-AAA Robbie Spires, Pierce County High School, Blackshear 4-AAA Wade Marchman, Burke County High School, Waynesboro 5-AAA Tony Watkins, Holy Innocents', Atlanta 6-AAA Wendy Golston, Carver High School, Atlanta 7-AAA Meredith Barnhill, Paulding County School Distric t, Acworth 8-AAA Cecil Marett, Hart County High School, Hartwell 1-AA Jarrett Luke, Berrien High School, Nashville 2-AA Jeff Clayton, East Laurens High School, East Dublin 3-AA Emma Sharp, Woodville-tompkins High School, Savannah 4-AA Adam Kowalczyk, Davidson Fine Arts Magnet School, Augus ta 5-AA Naomi Thompson, Southwest Atlanta Christian Academy, Atlanta 6-AA Shane Lasseter, Heard County High School, Franklin 7-AA Nic Hann, Gordon Lee High School, Chickamauga 8-AA Randy Gambrell, Jefferson High School, Jefferson 9-AA Andrew Tulowitzky, The Walker School, Marietta 1-A John Pinson, Baconton Charter School, Baconton 2-A Scott Ray, Lanier County High School, Lakeland 3-A Justin Chester, Portal High School, Portal 4-A David Coffey, Hawkinsville High School, Hawkinsville 5-A Mandy Elder, Georgia Military College, Milledgevill e 6-A Gabe Theiss, Schley County High School, Ellaville 7-A Tiffiny Pippins, Elite Scholars Academy, Jonesboro 8-A Chris Ingle, Lake Oconee Academy, Greensboro State Executive Committee 2026-27 Region Committee Member 1-AAAAAAA Cleveland Edwards, Colquitt County High School , Norman Park 2-AAAAAAA Lee Heaberlin, East Coweta High School, Shar psburg 3-AAAAAAA Don Baker, Cobb County Schools, Marietta 4-AAAAAAA Jason Holcombe, Gwinnett County Public Schools, S uwanee 5-AAAAAAA Andy Dorsey, Paulding County High School, Dalla s 6-AAAAAAA Nathan Turner, Forsyth County School System, Cum ming 7-AAAAAAA Jason Dopson, Brookwood High School, Snellville 8-AAAAAAA Daniel Garrett, Dacula High School, Dacula 1-AAAAAA Steve Waters, Glynn County Schools, Brunswick 2-AAAAAA Jason Brett, Houston County High School, Warner Robins 3-AAAAAA Jason Carrera, Mcintosh High School, Peachtree Ci ty 4-AAAAAA Paris Burd, Dekalb County School District, Stone Mountain 5-AAAAAA Jeff Wallace, Hiram High School, Hiram 6-AAAAAA Peter Giles, Kell High School, Marietta 7-AAAAAA Lamarr Glenn, Fulton County Schools, Atlanta 8-AAAAAA Brad Hayes, Jackson County High School, Hoschton 1-AAAAA Marcus Diggs, Evans High School, Evans 2-AAAAA Robert Wilson, Henry County Schools, Mcdonough 3-AAAAA Paul Fitz-simons, Central High School, Carrollto n 4-AAAAA Andre Byrd, Stockbridge High School, Stockbridge 5-AAAAA Myss Jelks, Dekalb County School District, Stone Mounta in 6-AAAAA Derek Waugh, Marist School, Atlanta 7-AAAAA Darrell Demastus, Cartersville City Schools, Carter sville 8-AAAAA Lewis Pulliam, Johnson High School, Gainesville 1-AAAA Jessica Thomas, Dougherty High School, Albany 2-AAAA Andrew Calhoun, Troup County School System, Lagra nge 3-AAAA Reggie Wilkes, Long County High School, Ludowici 4-AAAA Brian Gwyn, Hampton High School, Hampton 5-AAAA Rendell Jackson, Atlanta Public Schools, Atlanta 6-AAAA Paul Standard, Gilmer High School, Ellijay 7-AAAA Hal Lamb, Calhoun High School, Calhoun 8-AAAA Eli Connell, Monroe Area High School, Monroe 1-AAA Kendall Mills, Muscogee County School District, Colum bus 2-AAA Kevin Grooms, Bibb County School District, Macon 3-AAA Jesse Crews, Appling County High School, Baxley 4-AAA Myron Newton, Butler High School, Augusta 5-AAA Nyere Coy Brown, Kipp Metro Atlanta Schools, Atlan ta 6-AAA Brian Montgomery, Dekalb County School District, Sto ne Mountain 7-AAA Brent Mashburn, Sonoraville High School, Calhoun 8-AAA Eric Sutulovich, Stephens County High School, Toccoa 1-AA Jeremy Rayburn, Thomasville High School, Thomasville 2-AA Von Lassiter, Bleckley County High School, Cochran 3-AA Ron Duncan, Screven County High School, Sylvania 4-AA Crystal Langston, Johnson Magnet High School, Augusta 5-AA Kandice P. Mitchell, Drew Charter School, Atlanta 6-AA Davis Russell, Bremen High School, Bremen 7-AA Michael Langston, Gordon Lee High School, Chickamaug a 8-AA Jason Gibson, Banks County High School, Homer 9-AA David Lowery, Fellowship Christian School, Roswell 1-A John Pinson, Baconton Charter School, Baconton 2-A Winston Peterson, Clinch County High School, Homervill e 3-A Adam Robertson, Emanuel County Institute, Twin City 4-A Eli Dupree, Wheeler County High School, Alamo 5-A Don Norton, Johnson County High School, Wrightsville 6-A Harley Calhoun, Schley County High School, Ellaville 7-A Joshua Moore, Best Academy, Atlanta 8-A Chris Ingle, Lake Oconee Academy, Greensboro GHSA President Dr. Jim Finch, Monroe County Schools, Forsyth GHSA Vice President Curt Miller, Oconee County, Watkinsville GACA Dr. Craig Davis, Georgia Athletic Coaches Association, Jesup GADA Joe Sanfilippo, Sautee Nacoochee GDOE Richard Woods, Georgia Department Of Education, At lanta GSBA David Colvard, Georgia School Boards Association, Inc., Lawrenceville GSSA Dr. Eric Holland, Georgia School Superintendents A ssociation, Rome GASSP Stacy Bennett, Richmond Hill High School, Richmond Hill At Large Scarlett Grantham, Parkview High School, Lilbur n At Large Regina Montgomery, Lithonia At Large Kevin Petroski, Athens Academy, Athens At Large Ricky Turner, Blessed Trinity, Roswell GEORGIA HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATION COMMITTEES 2026-27 Board of Trustees (Class 7A) Jason Dopson (Class 6A) Steve Waters (Class 5A) Robert Wilson (Class 4A) Eli Connell (Class 2A) Jeremy Rayburn (Class A) Harley Calhoun (At Large) Scarlett Grantham (At Large) Regina Montgomery (At Large) Ricky Turner (President) Jim Finch (Vice Pres.) Curt Miller Baseball Committee Basketball Committee Cheerleading/ Dance Committee Jason Brett Paris Burd Andrew Calhoun Cleveland Edwards Kevin Grooms Jeremy Rayburn Adam Robertson Ricky Turner Don Baker Andre Byrd Craig Davis Lamarr Glenn Eric Holland Adam Robertson Eric Sutulovich Derek Waugh Reggie Wilkes Jason Brett Nyere Brown Rendell Jackson Von Lassiter Jeremy Rayburn Davis Russell Nathan Turner Eligibility Committee Football Committee Flag Footbal l Committee Jason Carrera David Colvard Jason Dopson Eli Dupree Brian Gwyn Jason Holcombe Von Lassiter Brent Mashburn Winston Peterson Richard Woods Craig Davis Jason Dopson Andy Dorsey Brian Gwyn Brad Hayes Brian Montgomery Don Norton Davis Russell Paul Standard Paris Burd Andy Dorsey Jason Gibson Scarlett Grantham Myss Jelks Crystal Langston John Pinson Eric Sutulovich Jessica Thomas Golf Committee Gymnastics Committee Lacrosse Committe e Jesse Crews Darrell Demastus Cleveland Edwards David Lowery Steve Waters Reggie Wilkes Stacy Bennett Rendell Jackson Curt Miller Brian Montgomery Paul Standard Nathan Turner Peter Giles Brad Hayes Jason Holcombe Don Norton Lewis Pulliam Derek Waugh Literary/One Act Play Committee Officials Committee P SR Committee Jason Brett Jason Dopson Chris Ingle Myss Jelks Kevin Petroski Jeremy Rayburn Reggie Wilkes Jesse Crews Darrell Demastus Eric Holland Jessica Thomas Nathan Turner Steve Waters Eli Connell Marcus Diggs Daniel Garrett Peter Giles Scarlett Grantham Kevin Grooms Michael Langston Winston Peterson Jessica Thomas Derek Waugh GEORGIA HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATION COMMITTEES 2026-202 7 (Continued) Reclassification Committee Riflery Committee Soccer C ommittee Andrew Calhoun Harley Calhoun Eli Connell Jason Dopson Cleveland Edwards Jim Finch Lamarr Glenn Scarlett Grantham Chris Ingle Rendell Jackson Curt Miller Kandice Mitchell Brian Montgomery Regina Montgomery Myron Newton Kevin Petroski Davis Russell Ricky Turner Steve Waters Derek Waugh Robert Wilson Harley Calhoun Brad Hayes Lee Heaberlin Hal Lamb Michael Langston Kendall Mills Don Baker Peter Giles Von Lassiter Kendall Mills Don Norton Lewis Pulliam Softball Committee Sportsmanship Committee Swimming/D iving Committee Don Baker Paul Fitz-simons Kevin Grooms Chris Ingle Kandice Mitchell Jessica Thomas Jeff Wallace Stacy Bennett Nyere Brown David Colvard Craig Davis Marcus Diggs Eli Dupree Jason Gibson Von Lassiter Joshua Moore Joe Sanfilippo Jeff Wallace Stacy Bennett Andre Byrd Eli Connell Ron Duncan Jim Finch Eric Holland Regina Montgomery Myron Newton Joe Sanfilippo Tennis Committee Track/Cross Country Committee Volleyball Committee Paris Burd Andre Byrd Jason Carrera Hal Lamb David Lowery Brent Mashburn Joshua Moore Derek Waugh Harley Calhoun Lee Heaberlin Chris Ingle Rendell Jackson Kendall Mills Kandice Mitchell Regina Montgomery Myron Newton Robert Wilson Stacy Bennett Paul Fitz-simons Daniel Garrett Rendell Jackson Crystal Langston Brian Montgomery Jeff Wallace Wrestling Committee Andrew Calhoun Darrell Demastus Ron Duncan Lamarr Glenn Jason Holcombe John Pinson Eric Sutulovich APPENDIX ‘E’ ELIGIBILITY REPORT INSTRUCTIONS Items to which specific attention should be directed are: 1. GHSA Eligibility Form A and Form B, instructions, an d other eligibility forms are provided to all member s chools on the GHSA website. 2. The report submitted to the State Office becomes a p ermanent record. Care should be taken to have the infor mation fully correct and complete. An error could seriously affect the eligibility of a student and penalize a school. 3. Online submission certifies that all data is correct and accurate. 4. Boys and girls may be listed on the same Form A, and m ore than one activity may be listed on the same Form A. 5. Once a student has been certified eligible in a given school year, it is not necessary to re-file that student in subsequent activities unless region rules specify differently. The GHSA office maintains that once a student has been reported and declared eligible for the school year, no further report is necessary for that student during the s chool year UNLESS his/her eligibility has been interrupted. T here is no longer any need to submit a Form B for a previously-cleared transfer student. Transfer students are n ever listed on a Form A. 6. An eligibility report must be filed prior to the c alendar date for the first possible practice in any activit y. Supplemental filings may be made throughout the season. (EXCEPTION: Eligibility reports for Literary, One-Act Play and Rifle ry competitions are due twenty (20) calendar days before the first contest.) 7. CERTIFICATE OF ELIGIBILITY (Non-Transfer Students ) - FORM A A. All non-transfer students will be filed online on t he GHSA MIS web site. B. NAME: List students in alphabetical order by date of entry - ninth grade (9-10-11-12). Give the full name with the last name listed first. C. DATE OF BIRTH: Give the month, day, and year of the student's birth. A student whose 19th birthday was prior to May 1 of the preceding school year, is over age and not eligible to participate. You will be assisting the student if you require a birth certificate to be present ed to you for verification of age. D. DATE STUDENT ENTERED 9th GRADE: Complete the mon th, day, and year the student took the first 9th grade class at any school. This is not necessarily the date the student first entered your school. A student will not be eligible for participation for more than eigh t (8) semesters from the date the student entered the n inth grade. E. TOTAL UNITS EARNED PREVIOUS SEMESTER: Show the t otal number of units the student earned the previous semester. In order to be eligible, (beginning with the second semester of 9th grade) the student must have earned at least 2.5 units or their equivalent the semester immediately preceding participation. Place an “E” in the Units Earned column and Total Units Accumulat ed column for entering ninth grade students. F. TOTAL UNITS ACCUMULATED: Show the total number o f units the student has accumulated thus far in his high school career. To be eligible, the student must accum ulate units that count towards graduation as follows: END OF FIRST YEAR: 5 Units END OF SECOND YEAR: 11 Units END OF THIRD YEAR: 17 Units Students who lose eligibility for not meeting the unit requirements at the beginning of the year may regain eligibility during the school year by accumulating the uni ts required at the end of the semester and by passing the required number of subjects the previous semester. REM INDER: Eligibility is lost or regained on the first day of the new semester. G. ELIGIBILITY STATUS: This column is for GHSA use only . 8. CERTIFICATE OF ELIGIBILITY - TRANSFER STUDENTS - FORM B A. TRANSFER STUDENTS: FORM B MUST BE ENTERED ONLINE ON THE GHSA MIS WEB SITE. If a student has transferred to your school during the past twelve (12) months after entering 9th grade (and has not been cleared previously) complete and submit a Form B for that student. If the transfer student has been in your school one full calendar year, do not file a Form B. NO TE: Transfer students who do not meet eligibility guidelines for migrant students are eligible to partic ipate at the sub-varsity level ONLY, provided they meet academic standards. B. ACADEMIC DATA: This is the same information that is required for non-transfer students on Form A. C. YEARS ATTENDED: List all previous schools the student a ttended beginning with the 9th grade. D. ADDRESS (PRESENT/PREVIOUS): Give full street addre sses and DO NOT use post office box numbers. E. LIVES WITH/LIVED WITH: Use the full name(s) of the parents, step-parents, guardians, etc. With blended families it is sometimes confusing when complete names are not given. F. DATE STUDENT ENROLLED: Be precise as to the date th e student entered your school. G. EXCEPTIONS: Certain situations allow a student to b e eligible without a bona fide change of address. See By- Law 1.60. FOR THE CURRENT YEAR (2023-24): 1. A student whose birth date was prior to May 1, 2004, is over age and is not eligible. 2. A student who entered 9th grade prior to August of 2020, has exceeded eight (8) semesters and is not eligible. 9. CERTIFICATE OF ELIGIBILITY - FORM C A. STUDENTS WITH INTERRUPTED ACADEMIC ELIGIBILITY: Form C must be entered online. A student gains or loses eligibility on the first day of each semester. If the student is not eligible because he has an “Incomplete ” in one or more classes, or if the student is in a Credit Recovery Program at the beginning of second semester, the student has 15 school days to become eligible. That stu dent may not practice or compete in the interim. (see By-Law 1.58). Students who have had their academic p rogress interrupted need to be filed on a Form C, even if their eligibility form has been submitted previo usly. Be certain that the relevant portions of this form are filled out completely. B. FILING PROCEDURES: 1. The upper half of the Form C is to be completed ju st like a Form A. The numbers in the “Units Earned Previous Semester” column and the “Total Units Accumulated ” column should reflect the progress made in the 15-schoolday period. 2. The lower half of the Form C is to be completed ac cording to the particular issue for the student. One portion is completed if the student was making up “Incomp letes,” and the other is completed if the student was involved in a “Credit Recovery Program.” If the course work is not made up in the allotted 15-school- day period for the second semester, the student is ineligi ble for that semester. The Principal still has the option of filing a “Hardship Application” if there ar e special circumstances that prevented the completion of the coursework in the 15-school-day period. 10. MT (magnet transfer) Forms must be entered online. 11. HS (home study transfer) Forms must be entered onlin e. Directions may be found on the “forms” page under Resources on the GHSA web site. 12. All hardships must be entered online with supportin g documents uploaded. Appendix F - Game Fee Chart for 2026-2028 Sport/Contest Varsity Sub-Varsity State Playoffs Baseball Crew of Two: $85.00 Crew of Three: $75.00 $69.00 Rounds 1-3: $140.00 Semifinals & Finals: $155.00 Basketball Crew of Three: $79.00 Shot Clock: 1/2 game fee Crew of Two: $64.00 Rounds 1-3: $170.00 Semifinals & Finals: $185.00 Cheer/Dance $12.50/Judge per performance $10.00/Judge per performance Minimum 12 Teams Same as Varsity Pre Finals: $185.00 Finals: $210.00 Tackle Football Crew of 6: $136.00 Clock/Chain: 1/2 Game Fee $79.00/Official Rounds 1-3: $175.00 Semifinals & Finals: $190.00 Clock/Chain: $90.00 Flag Football $51.00 Same as Varsity Rounds 1-2: $65.00 Rounds 3-4: $70.00 Finals: $75.00 Gymnastics $75.00 $95.00 Lacrosse Crew of Three: $93.00 Crew of Two: $103.00 $79.00/Official Rounds 1-3: $120.00 Semifinals & Finals - $145.00 Soccer $93.00/Official $79.00/Official Rounds 1-3: $480.00/Crew Semifinals & Finals: $500.00/Crew Softball (Fast Pitch) $83.00/Umpire (Slow Pitch) $62.00/Umpire $58.00/Umpire (FP) Rounds 1-2: $115.00 (FP) Elite Eight: $125.00 (SP) All Rounds: $80.00 Swimming $64.00: 22 Events or Less Add $2.75 Per Heat or Diver Finals: $130.00 Volleyball (per match) Best of Three: $64.00 Best of Five: $84.00 (Line Judge: 1/2 game fee) Best of Three: $48.00 Best of Five: $74.00 (Line Judge: 1/2 game fee) Rounds 1-3: $110.00 Semifinals & Finals: $125.00 (Line Judge: 1/2 game fee) Wrestling (per match) Dual Match: $93.00 Tri or Quad Match: $85.00 Individual Match $6.00/Match Dual Match: $72.00 Individual Match: $5.50/Match Dual Matches: $95.00 Traditional: $6.50/Match Regular Season Travel Fees: (1) Official: $30.00 (2 ) Officials: $40.00 (3) Officials: $50.00 (4+) Add $7.00 per official. NOTE: Travel fees are based on a “per crew/per competition da y” basis. Regular season travel fees for travel of more tha n 100 miles are doubled. Travel fees may be negotiated fo r invitational and region tournaments., but are other wise non- negotiable. Travel Fees for State Tournament contests a re a “flat fee” of $25.00 per official per assignment. APPENDIX ‘N’ GUIDELINES REGARDING NAME, IMAGE AND LIKENESS (NIL) The GHSA does not specifically prohibit students from enga ging in certain commercial activities as individuals. These activities, commonly referred to as name, image and likene ss (NIL), will not put a student’s amateur status at risk p rovided the student meets all the requirements for maintaining amateur status in compliance with GHSA by-law 1.92-c and providing there is no violation of by-laws prohibiting i nfluencing a student to attend or remain at a member school under GHSA by-law 1.70 (Recruiting/Undue Influence/Following The Coach). A student-athlete may benefit from the use of their na me, image and likeness (NIL) in compliance with GHSA by-law 1.92-c provided: The compensation is not contingent on specific athletic per formance or achievement. The compensation is not provided as a incentive to enroll or remain enrolled at a specific school. The compensation is not provided by the school or any person acting as an agent for the school. The following guidelines are in effect for NIL activiti es: Intellectual property - No “marks” may be used including, but not limited to, school logos, school name, school uniforms, school mascot, or any trademarked GHSA logo or a cronyms. No school apparel or equipment shall be worn, which inc ludes school name, school uniforms, school logo, school mascot or any apparel displaying trademarked GHSA logos or acronyms. No member school facility may be used for the purpose of n ame, image and likeness activities. No activities in conflict with a member school’s local school district policy may be endorsed. (Examples include, but are not limited to, tobacco products, alcohol products and controlled substances.) Students and their families should seek professional guida nce as to how NIL activities could impact collegiate financial aid and/or tax implications, among other issues . Within seven (7) calendar days after entering into any ty pe of NIL contract/agreement, a student, or the student ’s parents/guardians, must notify the Principal or Athletic Director of the student’s school of entering into that agreement. AMENDMENT TO APPENDIX “N” OF THE GHSA BYLAWS Appendix N of the GHSA Bylaws is hereby amended as follow s: By adding thereto the following language to the guid elines in effect for NIL activities: No student-athlete may be a member of nor receive compen sation or any other benefit from a Collective or NIL Cl ub. A Collective is defined as any group organized or existing fo r the purpose of compensating or benefiting an individu al student athlete or a group of student athletes of a member scho ol. NIL Clubs are defined as a group of student athlet es organized or existing for the purpose of soliciting funds or other benefits from fans, members or other sources, managing or promoting NIL activities of student athletes or otherwis e providing funds or other benefits to an individual stu dent athlete or group of student athletes. Booster Clubs are not considered Collectives or NIL Clubs i f such Booster Club is operated under the supervision of a member school and provides monetary or other benefits to school athletic facilities, school athletic equipment, school team meals or other school team benefits rather than to an i ndividual student athlete or group of student athletes . Student athletes violating this guideline may be subject to loss of eligibility to compete in GHSA activities and a ny member school which knowingly allows any student athlete to violate these guidelines may be subject to fines, forfeiture of contests, probation and being declared ineligible to compete in post season GHSA contests or activities. APPENDIX ‘P’ GHSA FINES STRUCTURE FOR RULES VIOLATIONS In accordance with Section 13 of Article IV of the Consti tution of the Georgia High School Association, member s chools are required to abide by all the rules of the Associatio n. The Executive Director of the Association is empowered to m ake a determination as to whether a violation of GHSA rules has occurred, and to assess an appropriate penalty that may include: 1. a fine of not more than $2,500.00 per offense, an d/or 2. probation in the sport(s) in which the violation occur red, and/or 3. suspension from the Association for up to a full calend ar year, and/or 4. forfeiture of games and/or contests. Pursuant to such authority, the Georgia High School Associa tion, by and through its Executive Director and with the approval of the GHSA Executive Committee, implements and publishes the following ranges of fines for certain des ignated offenses. Such fines are in addition to the other penal ties set forth above. The amount of such fines and the im position of other penalties shall be determined by the Executive Dire ctor upon consideration of the facts and circumstances of the violation and shall include, but not be limited to, th e following factors: 1. Whether the violation was the result of carelessness, wi llfulness, or ignorance. 2. The length of time the violation continued. 3. Whether the offense was self-reported or resulted fr om a complaint by another school, and the extent of coope ration by school officials in the investigation of the violation. 4. The number of violations involved. 5. The result of the violation (i.e.: a. injury to a person b. financial gain of the offending school or financial loss to another school and the amount thereof c. damage to the reputation of the GHSA d. whether the violation substantially contributed to wi nning or losing a game or contest 6. Whether the school involved has had similar or other v iolations within the past three (3) years. 7. Any other factors deemed by the Executive Director to me rit a more or less severe fine and/or penalty. The list of violations set forth in this listing in not a ll-inclusive, and if a violation of rules occurs which is not listed herein, then the Executive Director shall have the authority to as sess penalties that he deems appropriate. In addition to the listed fines and penalties, the Exec utive Director may issue a severe warning to a member school which places the school on notice that further violations of GHS A rules will result in increased fines and/or penalties. ELIGIBILITY VIOLATIONS VIOLATION RANGE OF FINES Allowing a player to participate in a game without ha ving an eligibility form filed with the GHSA [By-law 2.32] $50.00 - $500.00 Allowing a player to try-out, practice, or compete witho ut having a standardized physical examination form on file at the school. [By-laws 1.41 an d 2.21] $250.00 - $1,000.00 Allowing a “migrant” student to participate in a varsit y contest. [By-laws 1.62-1.69] $200.00 - $500.00 Allowing an ineligible student to try-out, practice, or compete. [By-laws 1.51 - 1.53, 1.56 and 1.58] $200.00 - $1,000.00 Allowing a student who is not eligible by the age rule or the 8-semester rule to try-out, practice, or participate. [By-law 1.30 and 1.42] $300.00 - $1,000.00 Violation of the “sit-out rule” following an ejection . [By-law 2.72] $200.00 - $1,000.00 Violation of the 8th-grade participation rule. [By-la w 1.45] $250.00 - $750.00 SPORTSMANSHIP VIOLATIONS VIOLATION RANGE OF FINES Have a coach or player ejected from a competition. [By-law 2.72] $250.00 - $500.00 Substitutes leave the bench area to go to the area of a fight during a contest. [By-law 2.71] $250.00 - $1,000 .00 Players, coaches or administrators behave in an unsporting m anner before or after a contest. [By-law 2.71(b)&(e) & 2.78] $250.00 - $1,000.00 Coach or player confronting (or making contact with) offi cial(s) or committing other unsporting acts. [By-law 2.73, 2.77 & 2.78] $250.00 - $1,000.00 Having players involved in a multi-player fight before, d uring, or after a game. [By-law 2.71(d)] $500.00 - $1,000.00 Coach or administrator removing team from a competition outside of what is allowed in playing rules. [By-law 2.71(f)] $500.00 - $1,000.00 Violation of video taping rules [By-law 2.88] $500.00 - $1,000.00 Make comments to the media that are critical of officiati ng [By-law 2.74] $250.00 - $ 500.00 ADMINISTRATIVE VIOLATIONS VIOLATION RANGE OF FINES Hold an illegal practice (i.e., during school hours, out of season, etc.) or violation of practice safety rules [By-laws 2.61, 2.62. 2.67 and 2.69] $500.00 - $2,500.00 Participate in an illegal or an unsanctioned competitio n. [By-laws 2.62, 2.64, 2.66 and 2.91] $200.00 - $1,00 0.00 Allow an unauthorized person to coach [By-laws 2.51 and 2 .52] $250.00 - $1,000.00 Failure to follow GHSA procedures and deadlines [By-law s 2.27, 2.31 and 2.53] $50.00 - $250.00 Failure to keep an appointment for an eligibility app eal [By-law 2.28] $100.00 Allowing a player to exceed the participation limit for that sport: [By-law 1.44] Football All other sports $1,000.00 $200.00 - $1,000.00 Failure to exert reasonable institutional control (with players, coaches, spectators, facilities, etc.) [By-laws 2.22-2.24, 2.26 and 2.71] $250.00 - $2,500.00 Failure to meet conditions of game contracts and agreeme nts [By-laws 2.29 and 2.63] (NOTE: This could also involve restitution to offended scho ol) $250.00 - $2,500.00 Failure of coaches to attend GHSA sport rules clinics and f or missing deadlines for the rules clinic. Will also revoke the coach's GHSA pass deadline. (Fall deadline August 15th, Winter deadline November 10th, Spring deadline Febru ary 9th) When a coach misses a deadline, they have until midnight on the 10th day fol lowing the rules clinic to complete the clinic. If the rules clinic is not completed by the deadlin e, the coach cannot coach that sport and their GHSA pass will remain revoked for the duratio n of the time until the clinic is completed. If any school is found to be allowing a coach t o coach without completing the clinic after the deadline, the school will be issued a la ck of institutional control fine per case[By-law 2.54] $200.00 Allowing a non-student to try out, practice or compete. [By-law 1.21] $250.00 - $2,000.00 ETHICS VIOLATIONS VIOLATION RANGE OF FINES School personnel/boosters involved in recruiting a student for athletic purposes and/or using undue influence to gain or retain a student. [By -laws 1.71 - 1.73] $1,000.00 - $2,500.00 Misrepresenting facts on a GHSA document. [By-laws 2.23 an d 2.24] $500.00 - $2,500.00 Misrepresenting facts during a GHSA investigation. [By-law s 2.23 and 2.24] $500.00 - $2,500.00 MISCELLANEOUS VIOLATIONS VIOLATION RANGE OF FINES Violation of financial aid rules [By-laws 1.81 - 1.83] $1,000.00 - $2,500.00 Violation of amateur standing rules {By-laws 1.90 - 1.9 6] $500.00 - $2,000.00 Region failing to follow GHSA procedures and deadline s [By-laws 3.20 and 3.30] $100.00 - $500.00 APPENDIX 'PSR' POST SEASON RANKING FORMULA 1. Core Post Season Ranking Formula The GHSA Post Season Ranking Formula (PSR) is calculated using three weighted components: PSR=(WPx0.35)+(OWPx0.35)+(OOWPx0.30) Where: WP = Winning Percentage OWP = Opponents’ Winning Percentage OOWP = Opponents’ Opponents’ Winning Percentage 2. Winning Percentage (WP) Formula WP=Weighted WinsActual Contests Played Weighted Win Values Contest Type Win Value Home Win 1.0 Away Win 1.0 Neutral Site Win 1.0 Non-GHSA Opponent Win 0.9 Additional Notes Maximum non-GHSA wins counted = 20% of scheduled contests Any wins beyond the 20% limit become: 0" (No Contest)" 3. Opponents’ Winning Percentage (OWP) Formula OWP=Opponent WP (excluding games vs team)Number of Oppon ents Key Rule When calculating an opponent’s WP: Remove all contests played against the team being evaluate d. 4. Opponents’ Opponents’ Winning Percentage (OOWP) Formula OOWP=Opponent OWPNumber of Opponents Key Rule The team being evaluated IS included in the opponent’ s OOWP calculation. 5. Full PSR Example Assume: WP=0.800000 OWP=0.650000 OOWP=0.700000 Step 1 — Apply Weighting WPContribution=0.800000x0.35=0.280000 OWPContribution=0.650000x0.35=0.227500 OOWPContribution=0.700000x0.30=0.210000 Step 2 — Add Components PSR=(0.280000)+(0.227500)+(0.210000)=0.717500 6. GHSA Tiebreaker Order If schools finish with identical PSR totals: 1. Head-to-Head Result 2. Highest WP 3. Highest OWP 4. Highest OOWP 5. Coin Toss 7. Region Champion Seeding Principle Formula Concept Region Champions are guaranteed a home playoff game. Region Champions are seeded first by PSR order. Remaining playoff teams are then seeded strictly by PSR ra nking. 8. Example Seeding Logic Example — 5 Region Champions Seed Assignment #1 Region Champion (PSR #1) #3 Region Champion (PSR #3) #8 Region Champion (PSR #8) #9 Region Champion (PSR #9) #16 Region Champion (PSR #18) Remaining teams fill all open seeds strictly by PSR ranking order. 9. Minimum Contest Requirements Sport Minimum Contests Football 9 Flag Football 14 Softball 20 Volleyball 30 Matches Basketball 22 Baseball 20 Lacrosse 14 Soccer 14 Tennis 14 Sport Minimum Contests 10. Important Operational Rules Sports using PSR for playoff seeding (baseball, basketball , flag football, football, lacrosse, soccer, softball, ten nis, volleyball) must play all games/matches to completion with no ties. Non-GHSA Contest Limitation Maximum allowable non-GHSA wins counted: Maximum Counted Non-GHSA Wins=0.20xScheduled Contests Forfeit Rule A forfeited contest: counts in the PSR formula OR may be replaced by a makeup contest schools must choose before the makeup contest is played 11. Important Definitions Term Definition WP Team success OWP Strength of opponents OOWP Strength of opponents' schedues PSR Combined playoff ranking metrics 12. Strategic Interpretation The PSR system rewards: Winning consistently Playing strong GHSA schedules Opponents who also win consistently Strong regional competition depth The formula reduces emphasis on: classification bonuses margin of victory subjective ranking systems OWP Explained: In the Georgia High School Association Post Season Ranking Formula (PSR), the “OWP excluding games vs. team” rule is designed to prevent a team from artificially helping or hurting its own strength-of-schedule rating. The GHSA definition states: “Opponents’ Winning Percentage (OWP) ... is calculated by ta king the average of the WP’s for each of the team’s opponents with the requirement that all contests agains t the team in question are removed from the equation. ” Here is what that means in practice. Basic Concept OWP measures how strong your schedule was by looking at how well your opponents performed. But when calculating each opponent’s winning percentage, the games they played against YOU are removed. That avoids circular logic. Example Assume Team A played Team B twice. Team B’s full record 8-2 overall Two losses came against Team A If GHSA used Team B’s full record: Team B WP = 8/10 = .800 But that would reward Team A twice: 1. Team A already gets credit for beating Team B 2. Team A would ALSO inflate its OWP because those wins weakened Team B’s record So GHSA removes the games against Team A. Team B record excluding Team A games Remove the two losses to Team A Team B becomes 8-0 Now: Adjusted WP = 1.000 That adjusted number is what counts in Team A’s OWP. Why GHSA Does This The exclusion: Prevents double-counting Makes schedule strength more independent Rewards teams for scheduling strong opponents rather than merely beating them This is similar to the old NCAA RPI methodology used in basketball and baseball. Full OWP Process For Team A: 1. Take every opponent on Team A’s schedule 2. Compute each opponent’s WP 3. Remove games played against Team A from each opponent ’s record 4. Average all adjusted WPs Formula conceptually: OWP=Opponent Adjusted WPNumber of Opponents Important Detail: Repeat Opponents In GHSA PSR, opponents are counted per game, not just once. So if: You play Team B twice Team C once Then Team B’s adjusted WP is entered twice into the aver age. The GHSA example explicitly states: “Team A has played Team B twice and Team B WP would be counted twice.” So: OWP=(Team B adjusted WP)+(Team B adjusted WP)+(Team C adjusted WP)3 Strategic Effect in GHSA PSR Because OWP is 35% of the formula: PSRF=(WPx0.35)+(OWPx0.35)+(OOWPx0.30) scheduling strong opponents matters significantly. A team can improve playoff seeding by: Playing opponents who win a lot of games Even if those opponents lose to you Since your games against them are removed, beating them does not reduce their contribution to your OWP. That is one reason strong schedules are heavily incentivized u nder the GHSA PSR model. For your team: Your WP (Winning Percentage) Your actual games count normally. If you beat an opponent: it counts as a win in your WP it counts as a loss in their WP Formula: WP=Wins(Wins+Losses) Your OWP (Opponents’ Winning Percentage) When GHSA evaluates your opponents for strength of schedul e, it removes the games they played against YOU. So: your win over them is removed your loss to them is removed Only their games versus everyone else remain. Example Your team (Team A) Record: 8-2 Opponent (Team B) Full record: 6-4 One of Team B’s losses was to Team A. For YOUR WP You keep the win. Your WP: WP=810=0.800 For YOUR OWP GHSA adjusts Team B’s record by removing the game against you. So Team B becomes: 6-3 instead of 6-4 Adjusted Team B WP: Adjusted WP=69=0.667 That 0.667 is what goes into YOUR OWP calculation — not .600. Why This Matters Without the adjustment: every time you beat a team, you would lower your own schedule strength. GHSA removes your direct impact so OWP reflects: how strong your opponents were against everybody else. The GHSA Office has built a platform in the MIS system t hat implements the following requirements: Every Class 1A - 7A, each school enters their schedule in the MIS system (Schedule will be locked before 1st game). Each school enters their teams schedule on the MIS platfor m for all contests; Contests against non GHSA member schools will be calculated using winning percentage only. All postponed contests should be rescheduled. Canceled contests will need approval from the GHSA offic e to reschedule a replacement opponent. Forfeited contests count in a schools formula and the appr opriate points should be applied (If a school chooses to accept the forfeited contest points, any additional sche duled game played will not be calculated into the schools formula). However, if a school chooses to not accept the forfeited con test points, the additional makeup contest will be calculated into the schools formula. The school must choose w hich option to accept before the makeup contest is played. All contests against GHSA member schools will be used to cal culate the schools PSR regardless of classification. Schools will not earn additional points for playing schoo ls in higher classifications. All member schools must enter their scores in the MIS system for the schedule entered in the system (scores will be locked after being submitted). APPENDIX ‘R’ CLASSIFICATION & ALIGNMENT FOR 2026-2027 ( NOTE: These are Region Organizations for Football, but all member schools are included.) NR - Indicates school playing Non-Region football schedule ** - Indicates school NOT playing varsity football Total All Classes 457 Schools, 415 Football AAAAAAA (52 Schools, 50 Football) 1-AAAAAAA (5 Schools) School FTE Reclass Camden County 2828 2850 Colquitt County 2552 2572 Lowndes 3059 3153 Richmond Hill 2762 2806 Valdosta 2322 2422 2-AAAAAAA (5 Schools) School FTE Reclass Carrollton 1875 2307 Douglas County 1950 2454 East Coweta 2932 3020 Northgate 2204 2320 Westlake 1903 2531 3-AAAAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Campbell 3246 4008 Harrison 2184 2464 Hillgrove 2235 2597 Kennesaw Mountain 1623 2481 McEachern 2122 2310 North Atlanta 2393 2575 Pebblebrook 2368 2748 4-AAAAAAA (5 Schools) School FTE Reclass Archer 2963 3077 Grayson 3743 3937 Newton 2572 2834 Rockdale County 2223 2707 South Gwinnett 2671 2749 5-AAAAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Cherokee 2808 2904 Etowah 2283 2313 Marietta 2449 2639 North Cobb 2415 3075 North Paulding 3022 3114 Paulding County 2048 2380 Walton 2656 2670 Wheeler 2309 3283 6-AAAAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Alliance Academy ** (Projected) 1201 3127 Denmark 2609 3045 Forsyth Central 2447 3095 Innovation Academy ** 1439 4317 Lambert 3207 3723 North Forsyth 2284 2428 South Forsyth 2735 3333 West Forsyth 2600 2996 7-AAAAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Berkmar 2776 2800 Brookwood 3802 4098 Duluth 2497 2707 Norcross 2151 2259 North Gwinnett 3053 3137 Parkview 3176 3358 Peachtree Ridge 3034 3112 8-AAAAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Buford 2040 2392 Central Gwinnett 2279 2753 Collins Hill 2485 2555 Dacula 2413 2455 Discovery 2597 2665 Mill Creek 2741 2873 Seckinger 2500 2796 AAAAAA (64 Schools, 64 Football) 1-AAAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Bradwell Institute 1828 1884 Brunswick 1919 1989 Effingham County 2166 2210 Glynn Academy 1863 1971 Greenbrier 1997 2057 Grovetown 2229 2255 Lakeside, Evans 1822 2032 South Effingham 1884 1982 2-AAAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Coffee 1842 1854 Houston County 2101 2177 Lee County 1812 1824 Northside, Warner Robins 1997 1999 Thomas County Central 1572 1850 Tift County 2055 2097 Veterans 1998 2058 3-AAAAAA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Creekside 1753 1855 Hughes 2048 2064 Lovejoy 1973 2047 McIntosh 1737 1839 Morrow 2154 2174 Newnan 2191 2249 Northside, Columbus 1354 1856 Tri-Cities 1765 1999 Woodward Academy 1072 2086 4-AAAAAA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Alcovy 1921 1939 Chamblee 1862 2178 Decatur 1887 1989 Dunwoody 1914 1932 Heritage, Conyers 1666 1894 Lakeside, DeKalb 2181 2327 Meadowcreek 2455 2503 Midtown 1747 1829 Shiloh 2070 2122 5-AAAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Alexander 1770 1980 Chapel Hill 1549 2027 East Paulding 1879 1969 Hiram 1392 1642 New Manchester 1957 2233 Osborne 2707 3269 South Cobb 1968 2188 South Paulding 1861 2161 6-AAAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Creekview 2034 2074 Kell 1565 1831 Lassiter 2007 2221 Pope 1793 1915 River Ridge 1842 1928 Rome 1925 2083 Sequoyah 2063 2181 Woodstock 1901 2011 7-AAAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Alpharetta 1948 2004 Gainesville 2079 2137 Johns Creek 1791 1821 Lanier 1887 1915 Milton 1949 1987 Riverwood 1734 1872 Roswell 1949 1983 8-AAAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Apalachee 1821 1849 Cedar Shoals 1508 1514 Clarke Central 1909 1961 Habersham Central 2058 2068 Jackson County (Projected) 1875 1903 Loganville 1886 1992 Mountain View 2100 2140 Walnut Grove 1531 1635 AAAAA (61 Schools, 61 Football) 1-AAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Benedictine 832 1282 Evans 1744 1812 Groves 1383 1535 Jenkins 1254 1476 Richmond Academy 1213 1467 Statesboro 1717 1731 Ware County 1542 1546 Wayne County 1526 1526 2-AAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Eagles Landing 1511 1533 Jones County 1579 1579 Locust Grove 1570 1696 Ola 1527 1619 Perry 1629 1659 Union Grove 1554 1684 Warner Robins 1771 1785 3-AAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Central, Carroll 1324 1466 Griffin 1435 1457 Harris County 1695 1721 LaGrange 1405 1483 Lithia Springs 1418 1622 Starrs Mill 1334 1474 Whitewater 1325 1397 4-AAAAA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Arabia Mountain 1161 2913 Drew 1780 1866 Dutchtown 1762 1806 Eastside 1555 1597 Forest Park 1645 1687 Jonesboro 1672 1768 M. L. King 1381 1449 Mundys Mill 1619 1725 Stockbridge 1391 1395 5-AAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Banneker 1545 1711 Cross Keys 1587 1587 Druid Hills 1448 1570 Jackson, Atlanta 1622 1740 Lithonia 1466 1556 Mays 1226 1500 Southwest DeKalb 1244 1770 Tucker 1683 1753 6-AAAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Blessed Trinity 844 1508 Cambridge 1612 1704 Centennial 1579 1591 Chattahoochee 1715 1771 Marist 804 1220 Northview 1555 1609 Sprayberry 1632 1800 St. Pius X 997 1731 7-AAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Allatoona 1477 1653 Cartersville 1454 1686 Cass 1474 1488 Cedartown 1379 1397 Dalton 1688 1752 Villa Rica 1654 1758 Woodland, Cartersville 1445 1513 8-AAAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass East Forsyth 1558 1706 Flowery Branch 1243 1521 Jefferson 1352 1422 Johnson, Gainesville 1235 1415 Madison County 1474 1498 North Oconee 1470 1516 Winder-Barrow 1761 1795 AAAA (61 Schools, 60 Football) 1-AAAA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Bainbridge 1151 1173 Cairo 1179 1179 Columbus 1132 1142 Dougherty 1150 1234 Hardaway 1017 1135 Monroe 1159 1227 Shaw 1071 1191 Spencer 1050 1134 Westover 1277 1285 2-AAAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Baldwin 1189 1189 Howard 1189 1315 Mary Persons 1373 1385 Peach County 1112 1198 Spalding 1171 1237 Troup County 1273 1333 Upson-Lee 1149 1149 Westside, Macon 1006 1302 3-AAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Harlem 1366 1386 Liberty County 1186 1308 Long County 1265 1265 New Hampstead 1037 1121 Southeast Bulloch 1121 1139 West Laurens 1224 1258 Windsor Forest 1120 1200 4-AAAA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Fayette County 1250 1278 Hampton 1112 1146 Luella 1258 1294 McDonough 1268 1338 Mt. Zion, Jonesboro 1227 1263 North Clayton 1116 1128 Riverdale 1232 1256 Sandy Creek 1173 1273 Woodland, Stockbridge 1224 1284 5-AAAA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Clarkston 1384 1384 Douglass, Atlanta 1275 1361 Greater Atlanta Christian 632 1348 North Springs 1120 1258 Pace Academy 481 787 Salem 1143 1203 Stephenson 1235 1331 Stone Mountain 1217 1301 Westminster 819 1259 6-AAAA (6 Schools) School FTE Reclass Chestatee 1180 1226 Dawson County 1216 1220 Gilmer 1140 1140 North Hall 1094 1204 Pickens 1127 1131 White County 1110 1130 7-AAAA (6 Schools) School FTE Reclass Adairsville 1164 1210 Calhoun 1247 1335 Heritage, Catoosa 1208 1246 Northwest Whitfield 1101 1171 Ridgeland 1265 1287 Southeast Whitfield 1346 1374 8-AAAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Cherokee Bluff 1204 1374 East Hall 1220 1262 East Jackson 1081 1133 Hoschton ** (Projected) 1150 1150 Monroe Area 1177 1221 Oconee County 1232 1276 West Hall 1222 1262 AAA (62 Schools, 61 Football) 1-AAA (6 Schools) School FTE Reclass Carver, Columbus 859 1013 Crisp County 966 992 Jordan 1017 1089 Kendrick 788 854 Sumter County 1025 1029 Worth County 829 855 2-AAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Callaway 901 953 Central, Macon 962 1394 Jackson 982 982 Lamar County 875 907 Northeast 798 878 Pike County 1063 1063 Rutland 924 954 Southwest 858 892 3-AAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Appling County 964 968 Beach 962 986 Brantley County 926 950 Islands 711 965 Johnson, Savannah 683 891 Pierce County 983 1003 Tattnall County 971 973 Toombs County 893 945 4-AAA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Burke County 1102 1110 Butler 876 964 Cross Creek 1048 1136 Hephzibah 952 1078 Thomson 907 907 Washington County 850 860 Westside, Augusta 1021 1099 5-AAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Haralson County 900 902 Holy Innocents 548 984 KIPP Atlanta Collegiate 923 1213 Lovett 634 958 North Cobb Christian 444 952 Temple 875 935 Therrell 997 1043 Wesleyan 493 863 6-AAA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Carver, Atlanta 1070 1126 Cedar Grove 1022 1042 Columbia 842 842 Hapeville 571 1047 McNair 833 837 Miller Grove 1057 1057 Redan 1013 1013 South Atlanta 926 982 Towers NR 792 792 7-AAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Coahulla Creek 1026 1108 LaFayette 1094 1122 Murray County 924 926 North Murray 878 890 Ringgold 992 1064 Rockmart 904 928 Sonoraville 1037 1067 Union County 871 895 8-AAA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Barrow ** 1092 1092 Elbert County 881 883 Franklin County 981 983 Hart County 1041 1055 Hebron Christian 499 1015 Lumpkin County 1048 1058 Morgan County 1033 1041 Stephens County 1102 1108 AA (85 Schools, 65 Football) 1-AA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Bacon County 596 620 Berrien 795 807 Brooks County 471 485 Cook 908 924 Fitzgerald 809 809 Jeff Davis 773 777 Thomasville 700 734 2-AA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass ACE Charter 550 696 Bleckley County 673 751 Dodge County 781 781 Dublin 579 633 East Laurens 671 707 Swainsboro 763 763 Vidalia 671 773 3-AA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Bryan County 490 500 Calvary Day School 383 823 Metter 472 500 Savannah 547 599 Savannah Arts Academy ** 789 799 Savannah Christian 399 831 Screven County 543 545 St. Vincents Academy ** 592 832 Woodville-Tompkins ** 692 692 4-AA (11 Schools) School FTE Reclass Aquinas 242 362 Davidson Fine Arts ** 387 387 Glenn Hills 802 822 Jasper County 841 841 Jefferson County 605 611 Johnson, Augusta 307 307 Josey 591 651 Laney 673 835 Putnam County 839 841 Social Circle 627 809 Technical Career Magnet ** 254 254 5-AA (14 Schools) School FTE Reclass Ben Franklin Academy ** 100 102 Coretta Scott King Academy ** 388 388 Drew Charter School ** 490 562 Eagles Landing Christian 255 407 Greenforest Christian ** 43 43 Landmark Christian 308 416 Paideia ** 466 772 Southwest Atlanta Christian ** 85 145 Stilwell Arts ** 520 538 Trinity Christian 471 693 Utopian Academy 323 829 W. D. Mohammed ** 63 163 Washington 782 842 Whitefield Academy 379 595 6-AA (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Armuchee 508 556 Bremen 725 791 Coosa 638 688 Darlington 442 604 Heard County 654 682 Model 701 835 Mt. Zion, Carroll 502 544 Pepperell 618 632 7-AA (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Chattooga 724 726 Christian Heritage 208 344 Dade County 528 528 Dalton Academy ** 582 594 Fannin County 835 837 Georgia-Cumberland Academy ** 323 323 Gordon Central 836 866 Gordon Lee 382 572 Lakeview-Ft. Oglethorpe 820 862 8-AA (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Athens Academy 325 539 Banks County 787 787 Commerce 567 647 Oglethorpe County 665 693 Prince Avenue Christian 318 524 Providence Christian 298 666 Rabun County 614 628 9-AA (13 Schools) School FTE Reclass Atlanta International ** 445 649 DeKalb School of the Arts ** 302 774 Fellowship Christian 423 761 Galloway ** 269 663 Kings Ridge 284 522 Mount Vernon 513 893 Mt. Bethel Christian 215 627 Mt. Paran Christian 440 786 Mt. Pisgah Christian 299 639 St. Francis 200 578 THRIVE Christian ** (Projected) 155 435 Walker 398 806 Weber School ** 299 699 A (72 Schools, 54 Football) 1-A (15 Schools) School FTE Reclass Baconton 284 290 Baker County ** 78 116 Calhoun County 112 112 Early County 465 477 Miller County 227 257 Pataula Charter ** 163 257 Pelham 368 456 Quitman County ** 93 93 Randolph-Clay 189 189 Scintilla Charter Academy NR 270 556 Seminole County 374 434 Southwest Georgia STEM 144 240 Spring Creek ** 80 96 Stewart County ** 112 112 Terrell County 272 272 2-A (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Atkinson County 416 442 Charlton County 448 454 Clinch County 357 395 Echols County ** 235 255 Irwin County 471 477 Lanier County 456 464 Mitchell County 318 348 3-A (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Claxton 430 442 Emanuel County Institute 290 322 McIntosh County Academy 358 358 Montgomery County 251 263 Portal 300 346 Savannah Classical ** 81 81 Savannah Early College ** 117 345 STEAM Academy ** 89 89 4-A (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Dooly County 300 306 Hawkinsville 367 385 Telfair County 390 392 Treutlen 307 329 Turner County 288 288 Wheeler County 241 273 Wilcox County 348 368 5-A (9 Schools) School FTE Reclass Georgia Military College 297 405 Georgia School for Innovation ** 225 337 Glascock County 170 174 Hancock Central 183 183 Jenkins County 308 320 Johnson County 273 299 Twiggs County 222 226 Wilkinson County 299 299 Wilson Academy 209 427 6-A (11 Schools) School FTE Reclass Central, Talbotton 118 118 Chattahoochee County 469 481 Crawford County 447 457 Furlow Charter ** 172 172 Macon County 302 304 Marion County 383 399 Rainey-McCullers ** 271 287 Schley County 366 424 Taylor County 340 368 Webster County ** 61 73 7-A (7 Schools) School FTE Reclass Atlanta Classical ** 185 185 B.E.S.T Academy 332 338 Bowdon 442 464 Elite Scholars Academy ** 413 419 Greenville 203 209 Manchester 400 410 Northwest Classical Academy ** 159 455 Trion 349 423 8-A (8 Schools) School FTE Reclass Greene County 413 419 Lake Oconee Academy 346 346 Lincoln County 362 394 Taliaferro County ** 55 73 Towns County NR 269 269 Warren County 169 169 Washington-Wilkes 362 364 Woody Gap ** 10 10 NOTE: The first enrollment figure shown beside each mem ber school is the FTE count in grades 9-12, while the sec ond is the Student Reclassification Count after applying the 3. 0 multiplier to out-of-district students. ** - Schools not playing varsity football. NR - Schools playing a non-region schedule in football. APPENDIX ‘S’ STUDENT TRANSFER SERVICE AREAS FOR NON-PUBLIC & CHA RTER MEMBER SCHOOLS (The Student Transfer Service Area for non-public and c harter member schools is the same as the public school service area in which the non-public or charter school resides.) SCHOOL SERVICE AREA ACE Charter Howard HS Alliance Academy for Innovation Forsyth Central HS Aquinas Richmond Academy Athens Academy Oconee County HS Atlanta Classical Charter North Atlanta HS Atlanta International North Atlanta HS Baconton Charter Mitchell County HS Ben Franklin (Boarding) Druid Hills HS Benedictine Jenkins HS Blessed Trinity Roswell HS Calvary Day School Jenkins HS Christian Heritage Dalton HS Darlington Rome HS Drew Charter Jackson-Atlanta HS ELCA Eagles Landing HS Fellowship Christian Roswell HS Fulton Leadership Charter Tri-Cities HS Furlow Charter Sumter County HS Galloway North Atlanta HS Genesis Innovative Academy Douglass HS Georgia Cumberland Academy Calhoun HS Georgia Fugees Academy Tucker HS Greater Atlanta Christian Meadowcreek HS Greenforest Christian Columbia HS GSIC Charter Hephzibah HS Hapeville Charter Banneker HS Hebron Christian Dacula HS Holy Innocents' Riverwood HS King’s Ridge Christian Cambridge HS KIPP Atlanta Charter Douglass HS Lake Oconee Academy Greene County HS Landmark Christian Creekside HS Lovett North Atlanta HS SCHOOL SERVICE AREA Marist Chamblee HS Mt. Bethel Sprayberry HS Mt. Paran Christian Kennesaw Mountain HS Mt. Pisgah Christian Centennial HS Mt. Vernon School North Springs HS North Cobb Christian North Cobb HS NW Classical Ac. (2024-25) North Cobb HS Pace Academy North Atlanta HS Paideia Druid Hills HS Pataula Charter Calhoun County HS Prince Avenue Christian North Oconee HS Providence Christian Berkmar HS St. Francis Cambridge HS St. Pius X Cross Keys HS St. Vincent's Academy Savannah HS Savannah Christian Groves HS Savannah Classical Savannah HS Savannah Country Day Windsor Forest HS Scintilla Charter Academy Valdosta HS SW Atlanta Christian Therrell HS SW Georgia STEM Randolph-Clay HS Spring Creek Charter Bainbridge HS STEAM Academy Charter Statesboro HS THRIVE Christian Academy Tucker HS Trinity Christian East Coweta HS Utopian Academy Morrow HS Walker School Marietta HS W.D. Mohammed McNair HS Weber School North Springs HS Wesleyan School Norcross HS Westminster North Atlanta HS Whitefield Academy Pebblebrook HS Wilson Academy Stone Mountain HS Woodward Academy Tri-Cities APPENDIX ‘S-R’ STUDENT RECLASSIFICATION AREAS FOR NON-PUBLIC & CHA RTER MEMBER SCHOOLS (The Student Reclassification Area for non-public and cha rter member schools is a public school service area chosen by the non-public or charter school for reclassification purpo ses only. It must be in the county in which the school reside s.) SCHOOL RECLASS AREA ACE Charter Howard HS Alliance Academy for Innovation Forsyth Central HS Aquinas Richmond Academy Athens Academy Oconee County HS Athens Christian Cedar Shoals HS Atlanta Classical Charter North Atlanta HS Atlanta International North Atlanta HS Baconton Charter Mitchell County HS Ben Franklin (Boarding) Druid Hills HS Benedictine Jenkins HS Blessed Trinity Roswell HS Calvary Day School Jenkins HS Christian Heritage Dalton HS Darlington Rome HS Drew Charter Jackson-Atlanta HS ELCA Union Grove HS Fellowship Christian Roswell HS Fulton Leadership Charter Tri-Cities HS Furlow Charter Sumter County HS Galloway North Atlanta HS Genesis Innovative Academy Douglass HS Georgia Cumberland Academy Calhoun HS Georgia Fugees Academy Tucker HS Greater Atlanta Christian Meadowcreek HS Greenforest Christian Columbia HS GSIC Charter Hephzibah HS Hapeville Charter Banneker HS Hebron Christian Dacula HS Holy Innocents' Riverwood HS King’s Ridge Christian Cambridge HS KIPP Atlanta Charter Douglass HS Lake Oconee Academy Greene County HS Landmark Christian Creekside HS Lovett North Atlanta HS SCHOOL RECLASS AREA Marist Chamblee HS Mt. Bethel Sprayberry HS Mt. Paran Christian Kennesaw Mountain HS Mt. Pisgah Christian Centennial HS Mt. Vernon School North Springs HS North Cobb Christian North Cobb HS NW Classical Ac. (2024-25) North Cobb HS Pace Academy North Atlanta HS Paideia Druid Hills HS Pataula Charter Calhoun County HS Prince Avenue Christian North Oconee HS Providence Christian Berkmar HS St. Francis Cambridge HS St. Pius X Chamblee St. Vincent's Academy Savannah HS Savannah Christian New Hampstead HS Savannah Classical Savannah Arts Academy Savannah Country Day Windsor Forest HS Scintilla Charter Academy Valdosta HS SW Atlanta Christian Therrell HS SW Georgia STEM Randolph-Clay HS Spring Creek Charter Bainbridge HS STEAM Academy Charter Statesboro HS Stilwell School of the Arts Mount Zion HS, Jonesboro Tallulah Falls (Boarding) Habersham Central HS THRIVE Christian Academy Tucker HS Trinity Christian East Coweta HS Utopian Academy Morrow HS Walker School Marietta HS W.D. Mohammed McNair HS Weber School North Springs HS Wesleyan School Norcross HS Westminster North Atlanta HS Whitefield Academy Pebblebrook HS Wilson Academy Stone Mountain HS Woodward Academy Tri-Cities HS Appendix Z - Results & Records of State Playoff Events from 2025-26 School Year Print Version Coming Soon

a. GHSA Concussion Policy: In accordance with Georgia law and national playing rules published by the NFHS, any athlete or game official who exhibits signs, symptoms or be haviors consistent with a concussion shall be immediately removed from the practice or contest and shall not return to play until an appropriate health care professional has determined that no concussion has occurred. (NOTE: An approp riate health care professional may include: licensed physician (MD/DO) or another licensed individual under th e supervision of a licensed physician, such as a nurse practitioner, physician’s assistant, or certified athletic tr ainer who has received training in concussion evaluation an d management). 1. No athlete or game official is allowed to return t o a game or practice on the same day that a concussion (1) has been diagnosed OR (2) cannot be ruled out. 2. Any athlete diagnosed with a concussion shall be cleared medically by an appropriate health care professional prior to resuming participation in any future practice o r contest. The formulation of a gradual return to pla y protocol shall be a part of the medical clearance. 3. Any athlete who has been diagnosed with a concussion must fully return to school (if in session) for a full day prior to returning to practice. 4. Each school will be responsible for monitoring the par ticipation of its coaches in the concussion management course, and shall keep a record of those who participate. 5. Each school must distribute to every athlete and his/her parent/guardian an information sheet that includes: th e dangers of concussion injuries, the signs/symptoms of concussion, and the concussion management protocol outlined in this by-law. This sheet must be signed by the parent/guardian of each athlete and a copy kept on file at the school. b. Any student-athlete who has sustained and has been diag nosed with a traumatic head injury (concussion), must follow a minimum of a 5-step return-to-play protocol. Recommendation for this RTP is based on an athlete comple ting the following return-to-sport strategy once they have beco me “symptom free” as determined by an appropriate healthcare professional. A minimum of 24-48 hours of bot h physical and cognitive rest must take place once the diagnosis is made: Level 1: Activity – “activities of daily living” that do not cause symptoms to re-occur (gradual return to school) Level 2: Activity – Light aerobic activity such as walking or sta tionary bicycle (at a low pace with no resistance) Level 3: Activity - Running drills, sport-specific activity with out head impact Level 4: Activity – Intensity of training drills may be incre ased. Limited practice with non-contact drills. Progressive 31 resistance training may begin. Level 5: Activity – Full medical clearance by a healthcare pr ofessional, unrestricted training activities including contact drills may begin Level 6: Activity – Unrestricted participation to sport A minimum of 24 hours must take place before progression t o the next level. c. SB 60, Jeremy Nelson and Nick Blakely Sudden Cardiac Arrest Preve ntion Act: In accordance with Georgia law: 1. Each school must distribute to every athlete and his/her parent/guardian an information sheet that includes: th e Early Warning Signs, How to Recognize Sudden Cardiac Arrest, and Learn Hands- Only CPR outlined in this by-law. This sheet must be signed by the parent/guardian of each athlete, each athlete and a copy kept on file at the school. 2. Each school must hold an informational meeting twice p er year regarding the symptoms and warning signs of sudden cardiac arrest. At such informational meeting, an i nformation sheet on sudden cardiac arrest symptoms and warning signs shall be provided to each student’s pare nt or guardian. In addition to students, parents or guardians, coaches, and other school officials, such informat ional meetings may include physicians, pediatric cardiologists, and athletic trainers. 2.69 Legal practice dates are established for each activity (see the calendar at the beginning of this publication), an d schools shall not conduct or allow an illegal practice. a. The beginning of each GHSA school year is designated as Au gust 1st. The end of the GHSA school year is designated as when an individual school ends its classes in th e Spring. b. Illegal practices are defined as practices involving five or more students participating in any extracurricular activity i n the presence of, or under the direct or indirect supervisi on of any coach of the school (including a community coach). At any given point in time, a member school may conduct up to three (3) separate groups participating in skill-buil ding drills. A group is defined as one (1) coach working with n o more than four (4) student-athletes in a sport. Each sp ort may have up to three (3) groups conducting 4-and-1 workou ts simultaneously, provided the groups are located in separate facilities or clearly separate practice areas. Any me mber school found to be in violation of this by-law shall be subject to any GHSA institutional fines and penalties, i ncluding up to a postseason ban. Exception – Competition Cheerleading Competition cheerleading programs shall be permitted t wo (2) groups participating in 6-and-1 workouts simultaneously in separate facilities or clearly separate pr actice areas. Each group may include one (1) coach working with up to six (6) cheerleaders, which allows for the additional athletes necessary to safely spot stunts. 1. Any practice occurring after the beginning of the school year and before the opening of the designated season is an illegal practice. 2. Any practice occurring after the end of the season for t hat team and before the end of the school year for students in that school is an illegal practice. 3. During the summer (i.e., between the ending of on e school year and the beginning of the next) the only restrictions on practices and competition are that all acti vities must be strictly voluntary, and two (2) “Dead Weeks” must be observed, as follows: Schools are prohibited f rom participating in voluntary workouts, camps and/or clinics, weight training or competitions during t he week (Monday through Sunday) beginning with Memorial Day in May, AND the week (Monday through Sunday) in which the Fourth of July falls each year. 4. It is illegal for a team to go to a competitive or instructional camp or clinic during the school year. a. If the event is held out of season, it would constitut e an illegal practice. b. If the event is held in-season, it would involve illeg al coaching. c. Boys and girls teams in the same sport are considered the same activity. d. This prohibition does not apply to the summer months. 5. Neither coaches, former coaches (including community coache s), nor any other school personnel shall suggest, require, or otherwise attempt to influence stud ents to participate in or practice for a sport outside th e GHSA-designated season. (NOTE: This would prohibit requiri ng any student to participate in one sport in order to be allowed to try-out and/or play another sport at his school). 6. The following activities are examples of illegal pract ices: a. interscholastic scrimmages or practice competitions not in compliance with By-Law 2.62e; b. practices involving alumni or students who presently are not eligible at the member school at any time in the school year; c. practices against a non-school team at any time in the sch ool year; d. practices of any kind outside the season designated by the GHSA. NOTE: Free Style and Greco-Roman Wrestling are considered to be the same sport as Folk Style (high school) Wrestling and are subject to GHSA rules regulating illegal practices. 7. Coaches are allowed to be spectators (in the stands) or “fellow competitors” at non-school events out of season as long as no coaching occurs. 8. Schools found guilty of having illegal practices will be subject to penalties that may include a fine, warning, 32 probation, and/or suspension by the GHSA Executive Director. c. A GHSA coach (certified teacher or community coach) may not co ach a non-GHSA team in a competitive setting during the school year that includes any player(s) who part icipate in the sport he/she coaches at the member school. EXCEPTION: In a situation in which the child or step-child o f the coach is the only player on a non-school team from the coach’s school, the coach would be exempted from this ru le. 2.70 - SPORTSMANSHIP 2.71 GHSA-member schools are required to conduct all relationsh ips with other schools in a spirit of good sportsmanship. a. It shall be the responsibility of a member school to u se every means at its disposal to impress upon faculty, student s, team members, coaches, and spectators the values of sportsmansh ip in preparation for the management of interscholastic contests. Contest officials have the authority to have any and all individuals removed from the confines of the contest whose behavior has become a distracti on and/or hindrance to the administration of the event . This may include, but is not limited to, verbal and visual gestures. b. The Executive Director shall have the authority to assess pe nalties against schools and/or coaches for conduct unbecoming a professional educator or coach committed by coa ches or other school personnel at GHSA events. Penalties against schools may include fines, probation or susp ensions; and penalties against coaches and other school personnel may include suspension from GHSA events. c. It shall be the responsibility of the home or host schoo l to take the following precautions at all interscholasti c athletic events 1. Take proper steps and precautions to insure crowd and sp ectator control, including having an administrator (or designee) from the host school to function as “Game Manag er” at all GHSA sanctioned events. EXCEPTIONS: Golf and Tennis. 2. Take steps to insure the comfort and security of all pla yers, coaches, and officials. 3. Have in place sufficient security personnel to handle an y crowd-control problems that might reasonably be expected. 4. Security escorts must be provided to game officials by the host school at all GHSA sanctioned contests, before, during and following the contest - including to their vehicles. 5. Provide a safe and secure changing area for contest offi cials, free from traffic by school staff, students and spectators. d. Each school must develop a plan to handle fight situati ons that may occur during an athletic contest. 1. Attention must be given to keeping substitutes in the b ench areas throughout the fight, and to keeping spectators away from the competitive area. 2. Schools whose substitutes leave the bench area to go to t he area of a fight will be fined by the GHSA Executive Director. 3. All players who are involved in a fight and any substitu tes who leave the bench area during a fight or potenti al fight and are ejected from the current contest, will be subject to the sit-out rule. 4. The prohibition against players fighting or being invol ved in a fight shall continue until all players have left the school property or other venue where the contest takes place . 5. The GHSA office may review video recordings and statements of contest officials, school officials and law enforcement to determine which players were fighting, l eaving the bench or otherwise involved in a fight situation. After review of the same, the GHSA may levy, modi fy or withdraw penalties including fines against member schools and enforcement of the sit-out rule again st players fighting, leaving the bench or involved in a fight. e. Players and coaches are expected to exhibit good sportsmansh ip before, during and after a contest, even if the gam e officials do not have jurisdiction. Behaviors such as taunting , fighting, etc., are forbidden. f. No coach may remove his/her team from competition befo re the end of the contest unless it is done in accordance with the playing rules of that sport. 2.72 Any player, coach, or team attendant who is ejected from a GHSA contest shall be suspended from all levels of competition (i.e., varsity or sub-varsity) in any sport or act ivity (regular season or playoffs) until the period of susp ension has expired. NOTE: Ejection penalties must be served at the next contest regardless of whether or not the school has received notice from the GHSA office by that time. a. Ejections are based on judgment calls by a contest officia l and are not reviewable or reversible. b. A coach shall have no role nor be in attendance at pre -contest warm-ups or activities, and shall not be in unifo rm in attendance at contests until the period of suspension has e xpired. c. A player or team attendant may not be on the competit ive area nor in the team bench area during any contest u ntil the period of suspension has expired, but is allowed to p articipate (not in uniform) in Senior Night recognitio n. d. The period of suspension resulting from an ejection w ill expire as follows: 1. Football: after the individual has been withheld f rom the next-scheduled game at the level at which the ej ection occurred (and all contests at any other level). 2. Soccer: 33 a. One-Game Sit-out: 1. Two yellow cards in the same game 2. Deliberate handball to prevent a goal 3. Red card for a foul on a player moving toward his go al in a scoring situation b. Two-Game Sit-out with Red Card for any of the foll owing: taunting, violent conduct, serious foul play, spitting on another person, foul or abusive language, l eaving the bench area for a fight situation. 3. Lacrosse players who are ejected or foul out will sit o ut as follows: a. BOYS: Any player who fouls out for the accumulation of pe rsonal foul penalty time will sit out the next scheduled game. Any player or coach ejected for unsporting b ehavior or violent conduct will sit out the next two games. b. GIRLS: Any player receiving a second yellow card is suspended from further participation in the game. She must leave the field and enter the penalty area for two minutes of elapsed playing time and no substitute may take her place during that two-minute per iod. Any player or coach given a red card for unsporting behavior or violent conduct will sit out two ( 2) games. 4. Track and Field: after the individual has been withh eld from the next scheduled contest. NOTE: All allegations of unsporting behavior must be referred to the “Jury of Appeals” for a final resolution on disqualification. A report must be submitted to the GHSA office in the event of a disqualification. 5. All Other Activities: after the individual has been wit hheld from the next two (2) scheduled contests at the leve l at which the ejection occurred. e. To satisfy the penalty of the sit-out game(s), those ga mes must have been scheduled at the time of the ejection, and must be played to completion. f. Penalties for ejections of a coach or player for unsport ing acts shall be: 1. First Ejection: Coach - $250.00 fine plus penalties as per each sport’s by-laws. Player: Completion of the “NFHS Sportsmanship Course” online plus penalties as per ea ch sport’s by-laws. 2. Second Ejection: Coach - $500.00 fine plus penalties as per each sport’s by-laws; and suspension until completion of the “NFHS Sportsmanship Course” online. Playe r: $200 fine plus penalties as per each sport’s by-laws. NOTE: When a player, coach or team attendant has a second ejection in the same activity during a school year, that individual shall be withheld from compe tition for twice the time period of a normal suspension . 3. Third Ejection: Coach - Season suspension plus penalties a s per each sport’s by-laws; can not coach in any activity at any GHSA member school until successful completion of “GHSA Principles for Coaching.” Player: Season suspension plus penalties as per each sport’s by-laws. 4. The Executive Director shall have the authority to levy ad ditional penalties for repeat offenders. 5. Penalties imposed by the GHSA Executive Director may be appe aled as described under Section 9 of Article IV, in the GHSA Constitution. g. If the ejection occurs in the last game of a season, th e penalty carries over to the first game of the next sport in which the student or coach participates (even if the ejectee tra nsfers schools). h. When a player or coach is ejected from a pre-season scrim mage (i.e., a practice game) in any sport, the school shal l be fined a minimum of $250 and there will be no sit- out penalties imposed. i. Game Incident Reports are due within 24 hours of th e contest, and are to be submitted via the GHSA electronic reporting program. 2.73 Any student or coach who intentionally injures, intention ally attempts to injure, or confronts physically another stu dent, coach, official, spectator, or other person immediately be fore, during, or immediately after any GHSA-sponsored acti vity, may be fined (coach) or declared ineligible to participa te in future GHSA activities by the GHSA Executive Director. NOT E: The notice, hearing, and appellate procedures set forth in the GHSA Constitution shall be applicable to such ruli ngs. 2.74 Coaches, administrators, contest officials or players are no t to make comments in the media or on any form of social media that are critical of officials and/or their calls i n a game. Penalties that could be imposed by the GHSA Executi ve Director include fines and/or suspensions. 2.75 The use of fireworks at any GHSA-approved event shall be in strict compliance with the licensing and application procedures of Georgia law and under permit of the pro bate court in which the event is held. 2.76 Artificial noisemakers are allowed at outdoor events with the exception of air horns, whistles, or other similar d evices that simulate the sounds of clock horns or officials’ whistle s. At any time that a national playing rule prohibits ar tificial noisemakers in a sport, that rule will supercede this by-la w. 2.77 The officials’ dressing area is “off limits” to school staf f, students and spectators one hour prior to game time, during the duration of the contest, and until the contest offi cials depart the facility. 2.78 Unsporting acts committed by players or coaches will be hand led as follows: a. If the inappropriate behavior occurs after the expira tion of a contest, but while the officials still have jur isdiction as referenced in the NFHS rule book, the official may eject the player or coach and published penalties for ejections will apply. 34 b. If the inappropriate behavior occurs after the offici als’ jurisdiction has ended, but the official(s) witness th e behavior, a Game Report shall be filed with the GHSA office and adm inistrative penalties will be assessed against the school of the guilty parties by the Executive Director. c. In the case of repeat offenders of unsporting acts, the Executive Director will be authorized to levy penalties aga inst the school of the guilty parties regardless of whether or not an ejection has occurred. 2.80 - MEDIA AND FILMING REGULATIONS 2.81 The host or home school has the right to determine whe ther or not its regular-season activities may be broadcast, televised, webcast, taped, filmed or photographed for a ny “commercial” or scouting purposes. a. Either school involved in the event shall have the right to video tape the event and to copy said tape, but no t hird party shall have that right, not even the videographer. b. A visiting school desiring to bring broadcasting personne l must obtain permission to do so from the host school pri or to the date of the activity or contest. c. The host school must execute a written contract with the broadcast entity that complies with the GHSA rules and regulations for broadcasting. 2.82 The region has the right to determine whether or no t region tournament (post regular-season) events may be broadcast, televised, webcast, tape recorded, filmed or ph otographed for any “commercial” purposes. a. The region should set and assess any fees charged for bro adcasting or telecasting region tournament contests or events. b. The region must execute a written contract with the b roadcast entity that complies with the GHSA rules and regulations for broadcasting. 2.83 The GHSA rules and regulations for Regular Season and Re gion Tournament broadcasting are as follows: a. The host school shall have the right to approve the am ount of space used and the placement of broadcast equipment. b. The host school (for regular-season events), or the reg ion (for region tournaments) shall be entitled to all revenue from the sale of broadcasting rights unless the contract spe cifies otherwise. c. Advertising utilized during the broadcast shall not inclu de alcohol or tobacco products. d. Commercial announcements shall not occur during playing time. e. Announcers shall not criticize coaches, officials, or schools, and shall be fair and impartial in their descriptions. f. The copyright privileges for Regular-Season events belon g to and shall remain the property of the host school. g. The copyright privileges for Region Tournament events belong to and shall remain the property of the region . 2.84 GHSA Media rules and regulations for State Playoff events: a. Broadcast rights and copyright privileges to all state pl ayoff events (i.e., after region winners have been deter mined) belong to the Georgia High School Association, and the GH SA has the right to determine if any of these events may be broadcast, televised, webcast, tape recorded, filmed or photographed for any purposes. NOTE: Participating schools may NOT sell tapes of state playoff events or provide copies of tapes to third parties for resale without written consent from the GHSA office. b. The GHSA shall grant media access at all state playoff eve nts to properly identified representatives of newspapers, radio stations (with broadcast contract) and television out lets ONLY. Proper identification is interpreted to mean an identification card given by the media outlet, or writt en documentation on the letterhead of the media outl et specifying that the bearer is working for that outlet at the GHSA event. c. Any media entity wishing to broadcast or telecast (includi ng Internet reproduction) any state playoff event must execute a written contract with the GHSA for that event. C ontact the GHSA office for a contract, which shall contain specific rules and requirements. d. Advertising utilized during a broadcast shall not includ e alcohol or tobacco products. e. Announcers shall not criticize coaches, officials, or schools, and shall be fair and impartial in their descriptions. f. Broadcast fees are listed in a chart that follows. The fees are “per event” except for football, basketball and soccer, which are per game. NOTE: a baseball playoff series is one event; a softball tournament is one event. g. Television and Video Webcast rights and fees must be neg otiated with the GHSA office on a case-by-case basis, except for those stations or schools having long-term contract s with the GHSA. h. Video production for authorized school “coach’s shows” are exempt from these rules and fees. However, schools may only tape, photograph or film events in which their team is participating. i. NFHS Network is the exclusive post-season video streaming pl atform of the GHSA. Members of the NFHS Network School Broadcast Program (SBP) do not pay rights fees for post-se ason playoffs. Non-SBP schools can request to carry a playoff contest subject to GHSA rights fees & NFHS Netwo rk schedule. Requests should be sent to Marvin James at marvin.james@ghsa.net. For more information on joining the School Broadcast Program (nfhsnetwork.com/sbp) contact Matt Abramson at matt.abramson @playonsports.com. 35 2.85 Radio, Audio Internet Broadcast Fees for State Playoff even ts: Fees are based on the size of the market. Levels are determined as follows - Level 3 = 50,000 population and higher; Level 2 = 25,000 to 49,999; Level 1 = Under 25,000 population. Fees for each level are li sted below. NOTE: These fees are for radio and audio on ly Internet webcasts. Market Size Football Basketball Baseball/Softball Other Events Level 3 $225/game $125/game $150/event case by case Level 2 $175/game $100/game $100/event case by case Level 1 $125/game $75/game $75/event case by case 2.86 Television stations or other broadcast entities shall have the right to film portions of GHSA state playoff events in order to air selected highlights in any bona fide newscast . “Bona fide newscast” is defined as a half-hour or hour program that is regularly scheduled and includes news, weather and sports. Entertainment and commercial uses of highlights ar e not considered bona fide newscasts and are prohibited. Hi ghlights may not exceed one minute per contest, or two mi nutes total running time in any single newscast without the con sent of the GHSA. Highlights may be used, subject to the ab ove guidelines, up to 72 hours after the event. NOTE: Members of the working press shall be allowed to use digital video cameras at GHSA state playoff events as long as such cameras are being used to obtain still images or vid eo highlights as defined in this By-Law. Site administrati on shall have the authority to prevent use of such video equip ment if it is determined that a video tape of a substan tial portion of the event is being made. 2.87 FLASH PHOTOGRAPHY: Flash photography is prohibited at all i ndoor GHSA state playoff events unless permission is obtained from the GHSA office on a case-by-case basis. Flash photography at outdoor GHSA state playoff events is at the discretion of the onsite game officials. 2.88 Parents and/or fans connected with a member school will b e allowed to use video or still cameras from the stands to tape or photograph GHSA state playoff events in which that member school is participating under the following cond itions (EXCEPTION: One Act Play, Literary and Cheerleading restrictio ns remain in place): a. The cameras must be hand-held and their use cannot in terfere with another fan’s view of the event. Site administrators shall have the authority to halt photogra phy if, in their opinion, this rule is being violated. b. The tapes/photos must be for personal use only and cann ot be used for scouting purposes, given to other schools for scouting purposes, used for any commercial/business purpose, or sold for profit. Violation of this rule by a member school will result in penalties from the Executive Director including a fine. c. Anyone else filming or photographing GHSA state playoff events for any purposes must have approval of the Executive Director. 2.90 - REGULATIONS OF COMPETITIONS 2.91 Sunday Competition: Sunday competition is prohibited for GHSA regular season or playoff contests. Sunday practices are regulated by local school policy. 2.92 Contest Rules: All athletic and literary competitions are to be played according to the rules published by the Nat ional Federation of State High School Associations, using officiall y-dressed officials who are registered with the GHSA and assigned to specific member schools by the GHSA office. a. EXCEPTION: Tennis is played according to the rules of USTA, unless specified by GHSA rules. b. EXCEPTION: Golf is played according to the rules of the U SGA, unless specified by GHSA rules. c. EXCEPTION: Riflery is conducted according to the “National Standard Three-Position Air Rifle Rules.” d. EXCEPTION: Girls Lacrosse is conducted according to the rules of US Lacrosse. e. The National Federation prohibits the use of video tape to review an official’s decision. f. No protests are allowed in any GHSA sport or activity unl ess specified by NFHS rules. g. Judgement calls by contest officials are not reviewable o r reversible. 2.93 Interrupted/Postponed Games: Any GHSA competition may be in terrupted due to human, mechanical, or natural causes when it is necessary to protect the safety of players and spectators. The Executive Director shall have the authority to postpone GHSA events and to direct the procedure for re scheduling when deemed necessary. a. The GHSA requires the host school to provide lightning detectors at all outdoor athletic activities. 1. When a lightning detector indicates a dangerous situa tion, the game manager will notify the head official. At that point, the official will suspend play and all part icipants and fans will go to a place of safety (NOTE: If 36 officials spot lightning before being notified, they ma y suspend play). 2. The contest may resume in accordance with procedures publ ished in the NFHS Rules Book. b. Postponed games are games that are terminated before they actually begin because of weather problems, emergency situations, or mechanical failures. 1. The host school should notify the opposing team and of ficials as early as possible when a contest is postponed. 2. The host school is responsible for determining whether an event is to be postponed until the time that game rules turn that responsibility over to game officials except when there is a written contract for that game. When there is a contract, there must be an agreement between the competing schools about the postponement 3. School personnel will agree on the rescheduling of th e contest. c. Suspended and/or Terminated Games - When game officia ls suspend a game due to weather issues, the following procedures are in place: 1. For all Baseball, Softball, Lacrosse, Soccer and JV Footbal l contests involving teams of different classifications, there will be up to a two-hour delay (cumulative) befo re the contest will be terminated. (See the Baseball and Softball Sections to see the procedures involved with termin ated games.) a. If the Lacrosse, Soccer or JV Football contest is terminate d before it has reached the halfway point, the contest is declared a “no contest.” b. If the Lacrosse, Soccer or JV Football contest is terminate d after it has reached the halfway point, the score at the point of termination is final. 2. For Lacrosse and Soccer contests involving teams of the same classification, all contests will be played to completion. (Note: The team that is behind may choose no t to resume the contest a. There will be no mandatory two-hour delay. b. The 11:30 curfew will be waived. c. Administrators from the competing schools may agree to po stpone the contest and resume competition at the point of interruption at a later time. d. The team that is behind may choose not to resume the contest at a later date. 3. All scheduled GHSA varsity football games that have been e ither interrupted or postponed must be played to completion. Schools must decide when completion will take p lace in a timely manner. The team behind in the score of an interrupted game has the option not to comp lete the game and the score will be recorded as it was at the point of interruption. a. There will be no mandatory two-hour delay. b. The 11:30 curfew will be waived. 4. Golf and Tennis procedures will be dictated by USGA and USTA rules. 5. Cross Country and Track and Field will not use the two -hour delay rule. d. Paying Officials in shortened/postponed games: 1. In the event a scheduled contest cannot be started due to weather-related conditions, officials who have arrived at the contest site will be paid one-half the contest fe e in addition to the travel allowance. 2. If a game is interrupted by weather or darkness befor e it becomes a completed game, the officials will be pai d one-half the regular game fee. 3. If a game is an official game at the point of inte rruption, the officials will be paid full fees. 4. Beyond these conditions, no officials group(s) may hold t he schools responsible for weather-related postponements. 2.94 All championship contests that end in a tie will have tha t tie resolved by means of the procedures that are used to resolve ties in preceding rounds of the playoffs. 2.95 Absence of Officials: In the unlikely event that game offi cials do not arrive for a contest, both schools should agree on one of the following procedures: a. Delay the game until a new set of officials can arrive ; b. Agree to play the game on another date except a Sunda y; c. Use registered officials who might be in attendance at the contest; d. Use coaches or school personnel from both schools; e. Use formerly registered officials who might be in att endance at the contest. 2.96 All Star Teams: a. In accordance with state law, member schools shall not p ermit their teams or players to participate in “Bowl” or “All Star” games during the GHSA regular season or during GHSA p layoffs. Players selected to participate in out-of- season all-star games must adhere to GHSA amateur standing rules, and to NCAA regulations regarding all-star games. b. The GHSA is not involved in either sanctioning All Star g ames or overseeing the selection process. c. Coaches who are going to coach their own underclass playe rs in an all-star game must report this to the GHSA. (NOTE: All provisions of by-law 1.70 concerning recruiting a nd undue influence remain in effect.) 37 2.97 Admission Fees for State Playoff Contests are set by the GHSA a nd are published in the various sports sections of the by-laws or on the GHSA web site. a. “Babies in arms” are admitted free of charge to all events in the company of a ticket or pass holder. b. Digital tickets are available exclusively on GoFan (https: //gofan.co/app/school/GHSA). c. There is no admission fee for Golf, Riflery, Literary or One Act Play. d. College and University coaches may attend GHSA playoff cont ests free of charge with proper ID. 2.98 Auxiliary personnel such as ballboys/girls or batboy/girls at all State playoff games must be at least 12 years of age. 2.99 All participant uniforms rules and restrictions shall be i nterpreted in accordance to Georgia law. The GHSA shall n ot enact or enforce any participant uniforms rule which proh ibits religious expression of student athletes other than the rules of particular athletic events as adopted by the National Federation of State High School Associations. 38 BY-LAW 3.00 - REGION 3.10 - REGION AUTHORITY Each region, either through its governing board or in g eneral session, shall have the authority to: 3.11 Make rules , which do not violate GHSA regulations, in order to successf ully operate the region organization. 3.12 Assess mandatory membership dues in order to operate the r egion organization. 3.13 Set deadline entry dates for all region contests. 3.14 Oversee the operation of region contests (post regular-season) by setting: a. Sites for the contests. b. Admission fees for those contests. c. Procedures for trophies and medals. d. Contest structure for determining a region winner, including a written tie-breaker procedure. e. An appeals committee to handle appeals in region pla yoff competitions. NOTE: Decisions of the Region Appeals Committee may be app ealed to the Executive Director when it is believed that region by-laws have been violated. 3.15 Set and assess fees for region contest entrants to pay expense s for the contest, and to pay the expenses of region representatives to the State contest. 3.16 The region, not the host school, has the copyright privil eges to all region tournament (post regular-season) even ts, and the region should set and assess any fees charged for br oadcasting or telecasting region tournament contests or events. 3.17 Pay its Secretary-Treasurer a stipend. 3.20 - REGION RESPONSIBILITIES TO STATE ASSOCIATION Each region, through its Secretary, shall: 3.21 Certify the winners in all region meets and/or tournaments to the GHSA Execut ive Director within the time limits specified in the By-Laws for each event. 3.22 Furnish a copy of complete region results in every region meet and/or tournament to all region schools. 3.23 Elect a Region Sportsmanship Award winner each school year using criteria developed by the re gion or criteria developed by the GHSA Sportsmanship Committee. 3.30 - REGION FINANCIAL OBLIGATIONS TO STATE ASSOCIATION 3.31 The host school of any tournament held within a region is obligated to pay five percent (5%) of the gross receip ts to the GHSA Executive Director within ten (10) calendar days of the clo se of the tournament. NOTE: Gross receipts are defined as total income before any charges such as stadium f ees, officials, etc., have been deducted. 3.32 Regions (or Areas) that fail to follow stated procedure s or deadlines may be assessed a fine for each violation. 38 BY-LAW 4.00 - STATE 4.10 - GHSA ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES TO MEMBER SCHOOLS 4.11 The GHSA Executive Committee shall meet bi-annually to revi ew By-Laws, policies and procedures of the Association, and to make additions, deletions, and modifica tions as necessary. a. The GHSA Executive Committee and Board of Trustees shall, from time to time, adopt whatever rules of procedure are deemed appropriate. The Chair of the meeting sha ll be authorized to conduct all such meetings in an order ly fashion subject to any changes in those procedures otherwise adopted by a majority vote of members present and subject to the following: 1. “Pass” votes are not considered “No” votes 2. Any Committee member may request a roll-call vote on a ny question before the Committee without the requirement of a majority vote. 3. Members of the Executive Committee may propose new or a mended rules, by-laws or actions to be taken or considered by the Executive Committee during the new busine ss portion of Executive Committee meetings only if such proposal has first been submitted to the Executi ve Director for inclusion on the agenda for the meeting not later than five calendar (5) days prior to the date of the Executive Committee meeting. Provided however, that if the Executive Director certifies any proposa l that has not been timely submitted to be of an emergency nature or to be necessary for the orderly transact ion of the business or activities of the GHSA, then he shall have the authority to bring such proposal to the floor of the meeting for consideration of and action by the Executive Committee. b. The GHSA Executive Committee shall consider recommendation s at its bi-annual meetings from member schools and/or region secretaries that are submitted in writing to the GHSA Office at least thirty (30) calendar days prio r to the meeting. 4.12 The GHSA Office shall maintain an official record for al l dues and fees received from any source, and shall provide for an annual audit of finances by a firm of auditors or a certified public accountant. 4.13 The GHSA Office shall provide all necessary forms on the GHSA web site, including the following forms from which copies are to be made to satisfy the needs of the member schools: a. Student eligibility forms. b. Declarations of intent to enter GHSA activities. c. Forms to secure sanctioning of events. d. Contracts for events. e. Financial statements for hosting GHSA events. 4.14 The GHSA Office shall provide an annual calendar that no tes: 1. the beginning and end of the season for all activiti es; 2. dates for Region, Area and/or State Playoff contests and /or tournaments 4.20 - RECLASSIFICATION (For the 2026-28 cycle) 4.21 Every two (2) years, member schools will be assigned a “Recla ssification Student Count” and placed in classifications for competition by one of the following procedures: a. The Reclassification Student Count for Public schools will be based on the FTE count for students in Grades 9-12 provided by the Georgia Department of Education for the fall semester of the second year of the current reclassification cycle. 1. A school will be considered a single-gender school if ei ther gender composes less than 35% of the school population. 2. A single-gender school shall have its FTE numbers doubled for the purpose of reclassification. b. The Reclassification Student Count for Private schools wil l be based on the actual head count of students in Grade s 9-12 at member private schools as determined on October 1 of the second year of the current reclassification cycle. c. The Reclassification Student Count will be based on pro jected enrollment numbers for all schools affected by the opening of a new school, the consolidation of existing scho ols or the redistribution of students within a school system that must be submitted by the system Superintendent no lat er than October 1 of the second year of the current reclassification cycle. 1. Projections must be filed for the next two school years a nd those numbers will be averaged to get the number by which the schools will be classified. 2. In the event that a school’s actual enrollment in the first semester of the new reclassification cycle exceeds the 40 projection average by 10% or more, or an existing school e xceeds the projection by 5% or more AND the additional students would have resulted in the school bei ng in a higher classification, the school shall not be eligible for post-season play in any sport for the entire ty of that reclassification cycle. 3. Schools may appeal the loss of post-season competition to the Reclassification Committee and then to the full Executive Committee. d. The Reclassification Student Count or classification place ment of isolated schools will be determined by the Reclassification Committee in accordance with the “Isolatio n Rule.” 4.22 The Reclassification Committee may utilize the following factors in reclassification decision: a. Consideration of travel time and costs, plus time out of school for students. b. Consideration of differences in the size of school popu lations. c. Consideration of competitive balance of the schools. d. Consideration of equitable access to playoff slots. e. Consideration of rivalries and gate-receipt issues. 4.23 The membership of the Association shall be divided into se ven (7) classifications as follows: a. Schools will be placed in classifications (according to the ir Reclassification Student Count) as follows: 1. Class 7A: Largest 13% (approximately) of football playi ng schools. Note: Schools may opt to play up into 7A. 2. Class 6A: Next Largest 15% (approximately) of football playing schools. 3. Class 5A: Next Largest 15% (appoximately) of football p laying schools. 4. Class 4A: Next Largest 15% (appoximately) of football p laying schools. 5. Class 3A: Next Largest 15% (appoximately) of football p laying schools. 6. Class 2A: Next Largest 15% (appoximately) of football p laying schools. 7. Class 1A: Lowest 12% (appoximately) of football playing schools. 8. When football schools opt to move up in classification, only the exact number of football playing schools at the bottom of the next class will be given the option to come down. If any of those schools opt not to come down, the GHSA office will not look further to larger schools in that class. 9. Non-public schools in Classes 2A, 3A and 4A will play in th eir assigned regions during the regular season but will then compete in a combined championship bracket of p rivate schools only. Public schools in 2A, 3A and 4A will each have separate championship brackets. All schools in a ll classifications will be seeded into playoff brackets using the Post Season Ranking Formula as determined by the GHSA office. b. Out-Of-Zone Multiplier: Every student attending a scho ol from outside that school’s district-assigned attendance zo ne shall be counted as three (3.0) students when it comes to calculating that school’s Reclassification Student Count. And that school shall be placed in the classification where the increased count falls. 1. The designated reclassification attendance zone for all GHSA public schools shall be that attendance zone assigned to the school by its respective school district. 2. Member non-public and charter schools may select a publi c school’s attendance zone within their county of residence that best reflects their student population to be their designated reclassification attendance zone (for reclassification purposes only, not for transfer eligibilit y. See Appendix S-R). 3. Children of certified professionals at the high school (grades 9-12) and military active duty dependent childre n will not be subject to the Out-Of-Zone Multiplier even if they live outside the school’s designated attendance zone. 4. Students who entered a feeder school of a member hig h school in grades K-5 and remained continuously enrolled will not be subject to the Out-Of-Zone Multi plier. 5. All member schools must submit the number of students th at will be counted as Out-Of-Zone students by October 1 of the final year of the reclassification cycle. 6. Single-gender schools will have the Out-of-Zone Multi plier applied only to the actual number of students enrolled in the school and not to their doubled enrol lment figure. 7. If a school is found to be intentionally reporting i ncorrect numbers, that school will be banned from partici pating in the state playoffs for two (2) years and must pay a fin e of $2,500. 8. A school shall be allowed to appeal its classification pl acement to the Reclassification Committee by filing a written appeal with the Executive Director not later tha n seven (7) days after notification of its classification placement, setting forth in detail why it contends the p lacement is unfair or unjustified, or why its assigned FTE number is inaccurate. 9. The Reclassification Committee shall thereafter set a date for the hearing of such appeals. If the Reclassification Committee finds that the placement is unf air or unjustified, the school’s placement may be modified by the Reclassification Committee. The decision o f the Reclassification Committee may be appealed by the school to the Executive Committee. The Executive Commit tee will not consider objections from schools regarding contested classification placements unless those schoo ls have filed timely appeals with the Reclassification Committee. c. Each classification will have eight (8) regions unless othe rwise determined by the Reclassification Committee or the Executive Committee. d. The Reclassification Committee shall have the authorit y to assign a different Reclassification Student Count or 41 classification placement for any school that is geographicall y isolated within its region in order to resolve difficul ties in travel and time out of class. (Football may be exempted f rom the isolation policy.) 1. An individual school shall be considered to be isolated if the average distance from that school to all other schools in the region is 100 miles or more one way. 2. The decision to place a school in a higher or lower cl assification will be based on a combination of factors tha t include travel distances and school population size. 3. If two or three schools in a region are considered to be isolated (even if the average travel distance is less th an 100 miles one way), the Reclassification Committee shall b e authorized to place those schools in another classification based on travel distances and school population size. 4. If four or more schools in a region are considered to be isolated (even if the average travel distance is less th an 100 miles one way), the Reclassification Committee shall b e authorized to form a subdivided region in which crossover games with the other subdivision will not be mand atory for region standing. 4.24 When the membership is divided into classifications as calle d for by the GHSA Constitution, the following process will be used: a. Schools will be assigned a Reclassification Student Count by the GHSA office. b. Member schools will be able to review and verify their assigned Reclassification Student Count on the GHSA web site. When there is a major discrepancy between the school’ s count and the count determined by the GHSA staff, the school may appeal to the Executive Director to reconsider the count. The Executive Director’s decision shall be final. c. When enrollment figures have been verified, schools wil l be placed in the proper classification and schools will h ave seven (7) calendar days to file a request to play at a hig her classification. 1. A request to move to a higher classification must be subm itted over the signatures of the school’s administrative authorities (i.e., the Principal and Super intendent). 2. A school that transfers to a higher classification must re main in the higher classification until schools are next reclassified on a statewide basis. d. The GHSA office will initially place schools in regions a nd the Reclassification Committee will then meet to rat ify or modify those placements. The decisions will be sent to the member schools after that meeting. 1. There will be a mandatory subdivision of each region containing ten (10) or more schools by the Reclassification Committee (Exception: Cheerleading). 2. The Reclassification Committee may subdivide a region co nsisting of less than ten schools if there is an extremely large geographic area within that region. 3. For football, the Reclassification Committee will re quire crossover games between teams in the subregions to guarantee a minimum of 70% of the season schedule unless there are isolation issues. 4. For all other sports, subdivided regions must guarante e member schools a minimum number of contests within the region equal to 50% of the season schedule unless the re are isolation issues. 5. Any region subdivided because of geographic consideration s may vote to play a full region schedule based on a two-thirds approval of all Principals in the region. e. Member schools will have seven (7) calendar days after no tification of assignment to request a lateral move to another region, by filing that request with the Executive Director. 1. A request to have a lateral transfer must be submitted over the signatures of the school’s administrative authorities (i.e., the Principal and Superintendent). 2. The request will be heard at a meeting of the Recl assification Committee and representatives from both regi ons shall be notified of the request, and may attend the m eeting to voice their approval or state their concerns about such a move. 3. A school that receives a lateral transfer must remain in that region until schools are next reclassified on a statewide basis. 4. At a meeting thereafter, the Executive Committee shall hear any appeals regarding lateral transfers by the Reclassification Committee. Representatives from both regi ons involved in the appeal shall be notified, and may voice their approval or state their concerns about the appeal. 5. Thereafter, the Executive Committee will approve, disa pprove or modify the final reclassification and region alignment plan. Notwithstanding any other provision her eof, all member schools are notified that at a meeting of the State Executive Committee to finally approve reclassificat ion, isolation status, lateral transfers, and assignment to regions, any member school may be assigned or transferred to different classifications or different regions other than those previously assigned. Th ere shall be no further appeal of such assignment or transfer either by the member school assigned or transferr ed at such meeting, or by any other school which objects to such assignment or transfer. Member schools desirin g to be heard on those issues are directed to be in attendance at the meeting of the State Executive Commi ttee as all action taken in connection with reclassification and region assignment will be final and no further appeal will be allowed. f. Member schools may begin scheduling contests for the new reclassification cycle as soon as the final vote has been taken, the membership notified, and any region subdivisio ns finalized. g. When a majority vote is used in a subdivided region to determine scheduling and the process for selecting teams f or post-season play, one or more schools may file a “minority r eport” with the Executive Director if the approved procedure is alleged to be unfair to all schools in the region. If the Executive Director believes that there is un fairness 42 with the chosen procedure, the Reclassification Committee will meet and make a final decision on such matters. No further appeal will be allowed. 4.25 The following scheduling policy will be in effect for p ublic schools entering the GHSA at the beginning of the se cond year of the reclassification cycle: a. In sports where the region has two-year scheduling, th e new school will not be able to play a complete region schedule at the varsity level. In those sports, the school coul d play a varsity non-region schedule or a JV schedule. b. In sports having year-to-year scheduling, the new school will have full membership once it has been assigned to th e new region by the Reclassification Committee. c. In sports that have a region tournament to advance to post-season play, the region may allow a new school to accep t a low seed in the tournament even though it did not p lay a complete region schedule. That is a decision made by the region. 4.26 Charter schools that apply for membership after the recl assification process has been completed will be accepted as schools playing sub-varsity schedules and/or non-region varsity sch edules for the next reclassification cycle. 4.30 - STATE ASSOCIATION CONTEST/EVENT RESPONSIBILITIES 4.31 The Executive Director shall determine the activities in wh ich a State Tournament, Playoff, and/or Meet are to be held. a. In order for a new sport to have a state competition to determine a state champion, the sport or activity must show significant growth and financial stability for a period of three (3) years. b. The GHSA Executive Director will appoint a committee and a sport liaison to monitor the sport. c. In order to have a State Championship in an Open Mee t Event, there must be a minimum of thirty-two (32) tea ms participating and this will be determined with the “I ntent to Participate” form that is submitted to the GHSA office the preceding school year (with the exception of coed cheerlead ing, which has a later deadline). Schools which submit this form and then withdraw from that sport will be f ined. 4.32 The GHSA Executive Director shall determine and provide ade quate sites for all State Tournaments, Playoffs, and/or Meets to successfully conduct the event. a. Tournament sites will not be available to participat ing teams for practice prior to the tournaments. b. The GHSA shall have full rights to the use of the GHSA l ogo at these events, and have full and complete rights to the sale of championship merchandise at the venue. The GH SA will also have the right to display signage of corporate partners and to restrict the use of goods in th e competitive area that promote a competitor of GHSA corporate partners. 4.33 The GHSA shall provide team trophies for State Champions and Runners-Up, and individual medals for first and second place winners in all State activities. a. The number of individual medals provided for team sp orts and activities is limited as follows: Baseball..............22 Cross Country....7 Golf........ .............6 Rifle..........................5 Bass Fishing.........6 Esports...............8 Lacrosse...... .....35 Tennis....................10 Basketball...........20 Football............56 Soccer.... ..........27 Volleyball................15 Cheerleading......22 Flag Football....30 Softball... ..........24 Wrestling (Dual).....14 Game Day..........30 Dance...............25 b. Schools may purchase additional medals if desired. The f orm to use to place an order for extra medals is found o n the GHSA web site. 4.34 The GHSA shall assign field/court officials for all Area, Se ctional, and State competitions (i.e., after the region winner has been determined), and the fees will be as shown in the chart in Appendix F. a. Baseball - crew of 3 or 4 b. Basketball - crew of 3 c. Cheerleading - 5 scoring judges and 2 safety judges d. Dance - 4 scoring judges and 2 safety judges e. Football - crew of 7 f. Game Day - 6 judges g. Lacrosse - crew of 3 h. Soccer - crew of 4 i. Softball - crew of 3 j. Swimming (TBA) k. Volleyball - crew of 4 l. Wrestling (TBA) 43 4.35 The Executive Director is authorized to modify all competit ion dates, times, sites, officiating requirements and oth er practical and logistical matters. 4.36 For state playoff events that are held at multiple, cen tralized sites, when venue expenses exceed 45% of the revenue for that day at that site, the GHSA will pay the excess expen ses. For state playoff events hosted by member schools, the school’s payment to the GHSA will be waived if the financia l report for that event shows a loss, subject to GHSA review. 4.37 Universal Coin Flip: The GHSA office will conduct one “un iversal” coin flip prior to the Quarterfinal round and again prior to the Semifinal round in all sports to determin e the designated home team in all classifications where e qual-seeded teams are meeting in that round. This flip will deter mine whether the top or bottom of the bracket in all such cases would be the host team (subject to other hosting requirements as specified by the GHSA by-laws for each respective sport). 4.40 - STATE PASSES TO GHSA EVENTS 4.41 The GHSA shall issue passes for regular season and post-season events annually to: a. Elected or appointed Board of Education members b. The following school system personnel who work directly w ith interscholastic activities in grades 9-12: 1. Superintendent 2. Assistant Superintendents 3. System-wide Athletic Directors and Assistant Athletic Director s c. The following school personnel of grades 9-12: 1. Principal and Assistant Principal(s) 2.

SECTION 1 CONTESTS A. Each region may hold annual contests in literary, athle tics, and other forms of contests designed to promote the cause of education and authorized by the State Executive Comm ittee. B. Such contests must be held on dates to be announced in t his Constitution and By-Laws under the rules governing State and Regional meets. C. Schools shall compete in their own classifications in State and Regional meets. D. Winners in regional meets may be sent to the State Me et in both athletic and literary events. SECTION 2 ORGANIZATION PURPOSE A. The purpose for which the Georgia High School Associatio n is organized is exclusively educational within the meaning of IRC 501 (c) (3) or the corresponding provisio ns of any future United States Internal Revenue Law. B. Notwithstanding any other provisions of these articles, the Georgia High School Association shall not carry on any other activities not permitted to be carried on by an or ganization exempt from Federal income tax under IRC 501 (c) (3) or the corresponding provision of any future United States Internal Revenue Law. C. In the event of dissolution, the residual assets of the organization will be turned over to one or more orga nizations which themselves are exempt as organizations described in secti ons 501 (c) (3) and 170 (c) (2) of the Code or corresponding sections of any prior or future Internal Re venue Code, or to the Federal, State, or local governme nt for exclusive public purpose. 10 BY-LAWS The Georgia High School Association recognizes that local boa rds and/or governing bodies may place more stringent requirements as they deem appropriate. The Association enco urages all boards of education and/or governing bodies t o extend the same rules and regulations to all extra-curricu lar activities under their jurisdiction. These rules establ ish the provisions governing student eligibility to participate in interscholastic activities. A. The word “student” used in these By-Laws refers either to a boy or girl participant in interscholastic athletics, cheerleading, or literary activities. Therefore, according to correct grammatical usage, since the antecedent “studen t” can involve persons of both sexes, the masculine pronouns he, his, or him used throughout said By-Laws will refer to either male or female participants. B. The word “principal” used in these By-Laws refers eithe r to a male or female head of a secondary school. Theref ore, according to correct grammatical usage, since the antecedent “principal” can involve or refer to persons of either or both sexes the masculine pronouns, he, him, or his, will r efer to a male or female head of a secondary school. C. The abbreviations GHSA used throughout these By-Laws refe rs to the Georgia High School Association. D. Nothing in the By-Laws of the GHSA is intended to give any individual students of GHSA member schools any due process or other rights as only member schools are entitled to any notice or opportunity to be heard in any question s coming before the GHSA. No student of GHSA member schools sha ll have any rights or benefits under these By- Laws as a third party beneficiary or otherwise. 11 BY-LAW 1.00 - STUDENT 1.10 - CERTIFICATION OF ELIGIBILITY 1.11 Students gain eligibility to practice or compete for the school in which they are e nrolled after they have been certified by the principal of that school, after the eli gibility forms have been processed by the GHSA office, and af ter the students have met the standards of: a. academic requirements b. age c. semesters in high school d. residence in the school's service area e. transfer rules Note: Students establishing eligibility as entering 9th g raders are automatically eligible for the first semester unless over age. 1.12 The certification of eligibility shall be submitted ini tially in each sport or activity no later than the date se t by the GHSA for the first practice in that sport or activity. a. This due date does not consider the date of the first contest scheduled. b. EXCEPTION: Literary, One-Act Play and Riflery certification is due twenty (20) calendar days prior to the first scheduled contest. 1.13 If a student ruled ineligible by the GHSA, competes inte rscholastically due to the terms of a court restraining order or injunction against his/her school and/or the GHSA, and then has the court order vacated, stayed, reversed, or ruled unjustified; the Executive Director shall take one or more of the following actions agains the school involved in the interest of restitution and fairness to the competing school(s): a. Require that individual and/or team records and per formances achieved during participation by the ineligible student be vacated or stricken. b. Require that team victories be forfeited to the opp onent(s). c. Require that team awards earned by the school or indi vidual awards earned by the ineligible student be retur ned to the GHSA. 1.20 - ENROLLMENT AND TEAM MEMBERSHIP 1.21 To be eligible to participate and/or try-out for a sport or activity, a student must be enrolled full time in grades 9-12 inclusive at the school seeking eligibility for that student . a. Enrollment is defined as follows: 1. Fall Semester: when the student participates in a pra ctice or contest before classes begin, or the student attends classes. 2. Spring Semester: when the student attends classes. 3. A student may be enrolled in only one (1) high school at a time. b. The student must be in regular attendance. c. The student must be taking courses that total at least 2 .5 Units that count toward graduation. NOTE: If an eligible student transfers from a school on a block-schedule format to a school using a traditional for mat (or vice versa) and cannot get a full schedule of classes with equivalent credit, the school may petition the Executive Director for a waiver of this rule for the semester the transfer occurs. d. All or part of the course load of a student may be ta ken online through a virtual school as long as the student ’s grades are being kept at the school in which the student is enrolled. Grades from virtual school courses must be on file at the school by the first day of the new semester fo r the student to be eligible. 1.22 Students enrolled in grade 9 in a middle or junior h igh school which is a feeder school to the high school may participate in interscholastic activities for the parent scho ol. 1.23 All-male schools may enlist female students from other schoo ls to be on sideline cheerleading squads as long as the following conditions are met: a. Each cheerleader must be eligible at the school at whi ch she is enrolled, and must have a signed release from an administrator at that school. b. Each cheerleader must have a GHSA Pre-participation Physical Evaluation Form on file at the school where she will be cheering as well as at the school at which she is enroll ed. 12 c. Each cheerleader must have insurance coverage comparable to all other participants in GHSA activities. d. Supervision must be provided by the all-male school for all practices and games. 1.30 - AGE To be eligible to participate in interscholastic activitie s, a student must not have reached his 19th birthday prior to May 1st, preceding his year of participation. 1.40 - LIMITS OF PARTICIPATION 1.41 Students must have a certificate of an annual physical exami nation on file at the school prior to participating in any athletic try-outs, practices, voluntary workouts or games that indicate the students are physically approved for participa tion. a. Physical examinations will be good for twelve (12) mont hs from the date of the exam. EXCEPTION: Any physical examination taken on or after April 1 in the preceding year will be accepted until that school ends classes the next Spring or concludes its final Spring sports season (for those participating students). b. The physical exam must be conducted by a licensed medical p hysician, doctor of Osteopathic medicine, nurse practitioner or a physician’s assistant. c. The exam must be signed by an M.D., D.O., or by a Physicia n’s Assistant, or an Advance Practice Nurse who has been delegated that task by an M.D., or D.O. d. The GHSA requires that member schools use the edition o f the preparticipation physical evaluation form approved by the American Academy of Pediatrics, et. al., found on the G HSA web site. 1.42 A student has eight (8) consecutive semesters or four (4) consecutive years of eligibil ity from the date of entry into the ninth grade to be eligible for interscholastic compe tition. a. A student is not considered to have entered the 9th gr ade when high school level courses are taken if the student is regularly enrolled in a school in a grade below the ni nth grade. b. Credits earned toward high school graduation which a re taken below the ninth grade may be used when consider ing high school eligibility. c. The provisions of the eight-semester rule in the case of an individual may be waived by the Executive Director upon presentation of evidence of true hardship beyond the stud ent’s control, or by the State Executive Committee upon timely application by a member school for placement on th e agenda. 1.43 Sub-varsity competitors must meet all eligibility requirements with the excepti on of the migratory rule. 1.44 Students in grade 9 and higher may participate on both the varsity and one (1) sub-varsity team in the same sport with the following limitations: a. Football – a player may not participate in interschol astic competitions more than six (6) quarters per week, beg inning with the varsity game. b. Basketball – a player may not participate in interschola stic competition more than six (6) quarters per calendar d ay. (Note: Tournaments are exempt from this restriction.) c. Soccer – a player may not participate in interscholastic com petition more than three (3) halves per calendar day. (Note: Tournaments are exempt from this restriction.) d. Lacrosse – a player may not participate in interscholasti c competitions more than six (6) quarters per day. e. Wrestling – the combination of play dates (wrestling and girls wrestling) in which a student participates may n ot be greater than the current varsity limit of play dates. f. All other sports - the combination of games or play da ys (varsity and sub-varsity) in which the student participates may not be greater than the limit allotted to the var sity in that sport (NOTE: Exceptions may be made by the Executive Director.) NOTE: Violations of these participation rules in ANY sport w ill result in a mandatory fine and an automatic forfei ture of the game in which the student exceeded the limit. Additional penalties may be imposed by the Executive Director in extrem e circumstances. 1.45 Eighth grade students may participate on a sub-varsity team of a high school pro vided they attend a feeder school of that high school. a. Students in grade 8 are never eligible for a varsity e vent in any activity. b. Eighth grade students who play on a high school team m ust meet all middle school requirements as put forth by t he State Department of Education. c. An eighth grade student who is declared ineligible at a middle school or retained for academic reasons, is consid ered to be ineligible for participation on a sub-varsity high school team. d. Eighth grade students participating on a sub-varsity tea m may only participate in 70% of the number of games allotted to the varsity team in that sport. Eighth grade students may not participate in more sub-varsity and middl e school contests combined than the number the GHSA allows for varsity competition in that respective sport. 13 e. Students below the eighth grade are not eligible t o participate on any high school team. f. Students enrolled in grade 8 in a middle school or j unior high school which is a feeder school to the member high school may participate in Spring football practice. g. Students enrolled in grade 8 in a middle school or j unior high school which is a feeder school to the member high school may try out for cheerleading, girls flag football, softball, and volleyball at the high school. Eighth grad e students at a non-feeder school that has no system high schoo l may participate in cheerleading tryouts at the member high school serving the student’s area of residence. Such a student must be pre-enrolled at that member high school, and once pre-enrolled, the student has estab lished eligibility at that high school. h. Eighth grade students who attend a feeder school for one member high school may NOT participate in any sport o r activity practice at a different member high school. i. All eighth grade students should be reported on Eligi bility Form D, available on the GHSA web site. 1.46 The number of contests, start and end dates, and the nu mber of practice days allowed for each sport or activity can be found listed in a calendar at the front of this pub lication. (NOTE: The season ends for a team when that te am is eliminated from the post-season competition or wins the State Championship in that sport.) 1.47 A student’s gender is determined as follows: a. Girls may participate on boys’ teams when there is no g irls’ team offered in that sport or activity by the school (exception: wrestling). Boys may not participate on girls’ t eams even when there is no corresponding boys’ sport or activity. Cheerleading is a coed sport. b. A student’s sex is determined by the sex noted on his/her certificate at birth. c. The GHSA will attempt to accommodate requests for privat e restroom or locker/dressing room facilities for students requesting the same at GHSA playoff events or contests provide d notice of the request is made as soon as possible to the GHSA office. No student shall be required to util ize the private facilities. 1.48 Advisory Notice - Pregnant Students : In response to the increasing number of pregnant stude nts attending member schools, and the continued participation of these students in GHSA activities, the following advisory notice is being offered: a. During the first 18 weeks of pregnancy, students, with written consent from a physician, may be allowed to parti cipate in athletic activities except those activities in which a fall or other rapid deceleration is likely to occur. b. Pregnant students are not allowed to participate in any athletic activities after the 18th week of pregnancy. 1.49 Schools having students participate in athletic activities wi th artificial limbs must certify that the artificial limb is no more dangerous to participants than a natural limb. a. A permission form must be filed with the GHSA office. b. The form may be found in the Miscellaneous section on the GHSA web site. 1.50 - SCHOLASTIC STANDING / SCHOLARSHIP 1.51 To be eligible to participate, practice, and/or try ou t in interscholastic activities, a student must be academicall y eligible. A student is required to pass classes that carry at least 2.5 Units counting toward graduation the semester immediately preceding participation. Exception: First semest er ninth-grade students. a. Passing in all GHSA member schools is a grade of seventy (70 ). b. Students participating in junior varsity or “B” team com petition must meet all scholastic requirements. c. If an eligible student transfers from a school that use s a block-schedule format to a school using a traditional f ormat (or vice versa) and that student cannot get a full schedule of classes with equivalent credit in the semester of the transfer, the school may petition the Executive Director for a waiver of this rule for the first semester after the transfer occurs. d. For schools offering courses with yearlong grading, eli gibility must be computed for each semester. 1. At the end of the first semester, the school must deter mine that the student has a grade of 70% or higher in classes carrying at least 2.5 Units. 2. The second semester grade will be the grade given for the entire course and shall include the end-of-course test grade. 3. Remediation programs designed to bring the student’ s first semester grade up to 70% or higher may be used (in accordance with GHSA guidelines) if the school allows such programs for all students. 1.52 Students gain or lose eligibility on the first day of th e subsequent semester. The first day of the Fall semester sh all be interpreted as the first date of practice for the first sport. a. Exception: Students who successfully complete summer school to maintain eligibility become eligible the last day of summer school. 1. Summer school is an extension of the previous semester and courses may be: 14 a. remedial in nature where a previously-taken course is r epeated in its entirety with a new grade being given. b. enrichment in nature where a new course is taken that results in new credit being earned. 2. A maximum of two (2) unit credits earned in summer scho ol may be counted for eligibility purposes. NOTE: Additional credits may be earned in credit recovery pr ograms or make-up programs after the start of the new semester. 3. Summer school credits earned in non-accredited home stud y programs or non-accredited private schools may not be used to gain eligibility. Accreditation recognized under the rule shall be from the Georgia Accrediting Commission (GAC) or a regional accreditation agency (such as SACS) or the Georgia Private School Accreditation Council (GAPSAC). 4. An independent study course taken in summer school must be regionally accredited and accepted by the school system for graduation credit. b. Courses completed after the beginning of a new semes ter may not be used to gain eligibility for that semeste r. Example: night school classes, correspondence courses, etc. c. Independent study courses taken during the school year must meet the criteria of 1.52 (a) 4. 1.53 Students must accumulate units towards graduation according to the following criteria: a. First-year students (entering 9th grade) are eligibl e academically. Second semester first-year students must have passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units the previous semester in order to participate. b. Second-year students must have accumulated five (5) total units in the first year, AND passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units in the previous semester. c. Third-year students must have accumulated eleven (11) uni ts in the first and second years, AND passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units in the previous semester. d. Fourth-year students must have accumulated seventeen (17) units in the first three years, AND passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units in the previous semester. e. Students may accumulate the required units for particip ation during the school year and eligibility will be re instated at the beginning of the next semester. ADVISORY NOTICE: CURRICULAR INNOVATIONS A. BLOCK FOUR PROGRAMS: 1. The student takes four courses that are worth one (1) unit each and the classes meet twice the number of hours per week as in the standard curricular programs. 2. To be eligible, a student must earn at least 2.5 un its. 3. Unit requirements are the same in all curricular pro grams. B. BLOCK EIGHT PROGRAMS: 1. The student takes eight courses at some time during the term, and each course is worth one-half unit. 2. To be eligible, a student must earn at least 2.5 un its during the term. 3. Unit requirements are the same in all curricular pro grams. C. HYBRID SCHEDULING: 1. Definition: A student takes a combination of courses sched uled as block courses, yearlong courses and/or traditional courses. 2. To be eligible, a student must be enrolled in a com bination of courses that carry at least 2.5 units. 3. To be eligible, a student must have passed a combinati on of courses the previous semester that carries at least 2.5 units. 1.54 A Dual Enrollment program is defined as a program in w hich a fulltime student at a GHSA member high school takes one or more courses from a state public or private postsecon dary institution and receives credit at the high school (to ward graduation) and at the postsecondary institution. a. Dual enrolled students shall take courses that are appr oved by the Georgia Department of Education. b. Courses may be taken in a variety of formats (including distance learning and virtual courses) as long as the courses are approved. c. Postsecondary semester hour credit shall be converted to hig h school unit credit as follows: 1. 1-2 semester hours equates to .5 unit 2. 3-5 semester hours equates to 1 unit d. Postsecondary quarter hour credit shall be converted to h igh school unit credit as follows: 1. 1-3 quarter hours equates to .5 unit 2. 4-8 quarter hours equates to 1 unit 1.55 Students involved in approved Dual Enrollment programs sha ll be eligible to participate in GHSA activities provided that academic eligibility is maintained. 15 a. Courses taken each semester at the high school and/or po stsecondary institution must total at least 2.5 units. b. Courses passed the previous semester at the high school an d/or postsecondary institution must total at least 2.5 units c. Students will gain or lose eligibility on the first da y of each semester at the high school and a college calenda r that differs from the high school calendar may cause problems. d. Students who withdraw or are dropped from a Dual En rollment program and are returned to the high school only, may encounter eligibility problems. e. Students involved in Joint Enrollment programs, Early Col lege programs, or Gateway to College programs may not be eligible at their respective high schools. f. A student who participates on an intercollegiate athl etic team may not participate in any GHSA activity. 1.56 Loss of Eligibility : Students assigned to an alternative school or on out-of- school suspension for disciplinary reasons, or adjudicated to YDC, lose their eligibility. Su spension is considered to have ended when the student is physically readmitted to the classroom. 1.57 Failure to Meet Academic Standards: When a school administ rator believes that the student has failed to meet the academic eligibility requirements due to conditions that were beyond the control of the school, the student, and/ or his parents, and such that none of them could have been expect ed reasonably to comply with the rule, he may request tha t the student's case be put on the agenda of the Hardship Committee. a. Ignorance of the rule(s) on the part of any individu al is not sufficient cause to set aside the rule(s). b. Schools must supply all the materials requested on the H ardship Application Form on the GHSA website. 1.58 Credit Recovery/Make-up Work: Students who have academic def iciencies at the end of a semester may make up those deficiencies in programs that are available to any st udent in the school. NOTE: Programs allowing students to recover academic credit have a variety of names in various schoo ls. a. Credit recovery programs are short-term programs that involve a course that has been completed and a grade given . The student is given the opportunity to work on areas of deficiency. b. Make-up programs occur when a course has not been comple ted and an “Incomplete” grade has been given. The student is given the opportunity to work on areas of defi ciency. c. Credit recovery and make-up work must be completed by the first day of the first semester and within 15 school days after the beginning of the second semester. The student is ineligible until such time as the work is completed and the required passing grade has been recorded. Exception: If th e end-of-course test is not offered before the first day of the first semester or within the 15-school-day window of the second semester, the student may be granted a reasonable extension by the GHSA. d. The GHSA Executive Director shall be authorized to approve credit recovery or make-up work completed later than the first day of the first semester or subsequent to the 1 5-school-day window of the second semester if he finds that the 1. timeframe was not met due to circumstances outside the control of the student, his parent(s), and the school, AND 2. work was completed as soon as reasonably possible, AND 3. allowance for such a delay is offered on the same basis to all students in the school. e. Credit recovery programs operated during the summer s hall be completed by the first day of the first semester. Students using those credits to gain eligibility are ineli gible until the course is completed successfully. Credit recovery is used for remedial work only, and no new credit courses may be applied under this provision. f. Students using credit recovery or make-up programs must ha ve their eligibility submitted to the GHSA office on a “Form C.” 1.59 Students with disabilities: a. A student with disabilities who is enrolled in a specia l education program which is not physically located at the parent school (example: psycho-education center, regional occupation center, community-based instruction class, etc.) shall be eligible to participate, practice, and/or try out in interscholastic activities at the parent school if IEP (Indivi dual Education Program) requirements are met. b. Schools with students having to meet only IEP requirement s for course credit must establish an accounting process for the number of courses passed each semester, and for the awarding of units. Requirements for the date of entr y into the ninth grade and for age apply to students wit h IEPs without variation. c. Competitive interscholastic activities administered throug h local special education programs shall follow Georgia Department of Education guidelines and procedures for spe cial education, and are exempt from GHSA requirements. 1.60 - SCHOOL SERVICE AREAS / TRANSFER / MIGRANT STUDENTS / MIG RATORY WAIVER 1.61 School service areas for member public schools are those atte ndance boundaries established by local boards of education from which a school normally draws its students. T he service area for a member private school is the public 16 school’s attendance zone in which the private school resides. The service area for a startup or converted charter school will be the same as the school from which the charter schoo l draws its students. 1.62 A transfer student who has established eligibility at a former school in grades 9-12 shall be deemed a migrant at the new school for 365 days from the date of transfer unless t he following criteria are met: a. The student moved simultaneously with the entire fami ly unit, and all other persons he/she lived with at the former residence, and that residential unit moved into the servi ce area of the new school with simultaneous enrollment o f the student in the new school. This is known as a “bona fide m ove.” (NOTE: A move within the same service area does not constitute a bona fide move.) b. It must be apparent that the parent(s) and all the persons residing with the student and the student have r elinquished the residence in the former service area and have moved to a residence in the new service area with the intention that the move be permanent. The bona fide move is vali dated when the student’s family maintains the new residence for at least one calendar year. A return to the previous service area or a move to a new service area withi n that year renders the student to be a migrant student. c. Determination of what constitutes a bona fide change of residency and with the intent that it be permanent depends on the circumstances of each case. The GHSA will consider all r elevant facts and circumstances in making that determination. Confirmation of the following factor s, although not conclusive, MUST be provided as evidence of relinquishment of the former residence: 1. All licensed drivers in the household must comply with th e Georgia DMV change of address policy and schools must provide copies of updated driver’s licenses with the ne w address. 2. The former residence must be vacated, all unnecessary uti lities terminated and all household goods and furniture must be either moved to the new residence or stored (except as may be necessary to ready the residence for sale). 3. The former residence must not be used or occupied by an y member of the family unit. 4. The residence, if owned, must either be sold or liste d for sale. If the former residence was leased by the fa mily unit, the lease must be cancelled. Copies of any applicabl e listing agreement, deed, contract for sale, or lease cancellation must be provided. 5. Change of address notification must be made to all e mployers and the postal service. The bona fide move is validated when the student’s family maintains the new re sidence for at least one calendar year. A return to the previous service area within that year renders the student to be a migrant student. d. The student was enrolled in a private school or a mag net school and has a bona fide move from one public school service area to another public school service area. A student in this situation may attend either the public school or a private school serving his area of residence. e. The student was enrolled in a non-member school in G eorgia and, without a bona fide move, transferred to a GHSA member school that serves his area of residence as long as: 1. It is the initial move of the student from a non-me mber school to a member school serving his area of residence, AND 2. The student was enrolled at the high school serving hi s area of residence in grades 9-12 before attending the non-member school, OR 3. The student has not yet established eligibility in gra des 9-12 at a member school. Eligibility is established the first time the student enrolls in a GHSA member school reg ardless of service area. 4. A student who transfers from a GHSA member school to an independent school entering the GHSA in the next school year must be enrolled at the entering independen t school by January 31 of the year preceding their becoming a GHSA member school in order to be eligible. N OTE: Rules about joint custody transfers have control over the one-time transfer restriction in this by- law. 5. In compliance with the Dexter Mosley Act, schools must file el igibility for home study students and students enrolled in qualifying virtual schools using Transfer Eligi bility Form "HS" found on the GHSA web site. Students enrolled in qualifying virtual schools must meet all requ irements of the Dexter Mosley Act with the exception of the Declaration of Intent to Home Study. f. The student transfers from a non-member home school a nd the receiving school grants credit so that the student h as accumulated sufficient units. At the time such credit is given , the student must also have passed a minimum of at least 2.5 units the previous semester. The student becomes e ligible when credit is awarded officially. g. The student is involved in a foreign exchange program that is approved and published on the “Advisory List of International Educational Travel and Exchange Programs” pub lished by the Council on Standards for International Educational Travel (CSIET). This list is found on the GHSA we b site. 1. The student shall be considered eligible for a maximu m period of one calendar year. 2. The student shall not be a graduate of a secondary scho ol in his home country. 3. The student must maintain eligibility requirements a t the member school. 4. The foreign exchange program must randomly assign stude nts to schools by a method that insures that no student, school, or other interested party may influence t he assignment for athletic purposes. “Direct Placement” foreign exchange students must go through the h ardship appeal process to become eligible. 5. All eligibility forms (Form B) for foreign exchange stu dents must be accompanied by documentation from the CSIET-approved foreign exchange program showing that the student has been placed according to the normal 17 procedures for that agency. h. If one of his/her parents or the custodial parent is a certified teacher or administrator teaching in grades 9-12 at the receiving school. This opportunity is available one time on ly at any given school. (NOTE: Rules about joint custody transfers overrule the one-time transfer restriction in t his by-law.) i. The student has one of the following family related circumstances which shall constitute a waiver of the “bona f ide move” rule: 1. There is a Superior Court Final Order changing perm anent physical custody of the student from one parent to the other parent and the student moves to the residence of the parent receiving custody in a new service area and attends the member school serving that service area. 2. There is a Superior Court Final Order awarding per manent joint physical custody to the parents and the studen t elects to move from the residence of one parent to the r esidence of the other parent in a new service area and attends the member school serving that area of residence. Provided, however, that such an election can be made only once during a 12-month period beginning the date of the transfer and the Final Order must have specifically awarded the parents “joint physical custody” of t he student. Award of “joint legal custody” shall not suffice for purposes of this paragraph. 3. There is a death of the custodial parent with whom the student resided and the student moves to live with th e other parent in a new service area and attends the memb er school serving that area of residence. 4. There is a military transfer of one or both custodial parents that requires a change of residence of the stude nt to a new service area and the student attends the member school serving that area of residence.(NOTE: Eligibility forms for transfer eligibility under paragra phs (1), (2) and (3) above must be accompanied by certifie d copies of applicable Court Orders. Eligibility forms for t ransfer eligibility under paragraph (4) above must be accompanied by true and correct copies of verifiable deploym ent orders.) 5. Students changing schools due to non-parent custodial cha nges shall be declared migrant students and ineligible for twelve months from the date of transfer . All cases involving non-parental custody changes may be appealed through the hardship process. 6. Illegitimate children do not gain eligibility by tr ansfer to the residence of the child’s father. In order to gain eligibility, the child must be legitimized by the father pursuant to Georgia law. Signing the birth certificat e, paying child support or living with the father is not suf ficient to deem the child legitimate. NOTE: Children are considered legitimate under Georgia if born or conceived during the marriage to the mother. j. Students who are U.S. citizens and who have been enroll ed and attended a high school in a foreign country, upo n return to the U.S., shall be eligible to participate a t a GHSA member school provided the student lives in the ne w school’s service area and is otherwise eligible under GHSA ag e, eight-semester, academic and other eligibility rules. k. Students who are transferred from one school attendance area to another school attendance area by a mandate of the local board of education maintain their eligibili ty. l. Married students setting up a household (domicile) sha ll be eligible in the school of their residence provided they meet all other requirements of eligibility. m. Students at the Atlanta School for the Deaf will be e ligible at the school serving their area of residence pro vided they meet all other eligibility requirements. n. Students entering a school as an “unaccompanied youth” u nder the conditions of the McKinney-Vento Act must go through the hardship appeal process to become eligible. o. If approved by the local board of education, students enrolled in a magnet or specialty school established by the local board of education shall be allowed to participate in GHSA extracurricular activities as a member of the school team for the school which they would ordinarily attend accordin g to local board of education attendance policy. Provided, however, that: 1. 1. If the magnet/specialty school offers the only act ivity in which the student elects to participate, the stude nt shall be required to participate as a member of the ma gnet/specialty school program in that activity. 2. Students at magnet/specialty schools may not participate i n GHSA extracurricular activities at both the magnet/specialty school and the school that the student wou ld ordinarily attend. Those students must elect to participate in GHSA extracurricular activities at only one scho ol per school year. For example, students could not play basketball at the magnet school and football at the home school. 3. The election of the student to participate in GHSA ext racurricular activities for either the magnet/specialty school or the school the student would ordinarily attend shall be binding for the current school year. 4. Such students shall be required to comply with all GHSA e ligibility and other rules. The member school shall be required to provide to the GHSA a copy of the local board of education approval of such participation. 5. The receiving school will submit students on an MT Eligi bility Form. This form is available on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). p. All eligibility appeals arising under by-law 1.60-1.6 9 shall initially be submitted to the Executive Director (o r his/her designee) for decision. Appeals from those decisions may the reafter be made to the Hardship Committee.